DNP Cabling GuideAT&T offers a Hotline Technical Support Service for customers needing technical assistance in the administration, operation, maintenance, and problem analysis of Data

255-100-025Issue 4

Data Networking ProductsCabling Guide

Copyright 1995 AT&TAll Rights ReservedPrinted in USA

Datakit, DATAPHONE, Lightpack, Merlin, SLC, ST, StarKeeper, Star Server, and SYSTIMAX are registeredtrademarks of AT&T.

Amdahl is a registered trademark of Amdahl Corporation.Apple, AppleTalk, LocalTalk, and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.Canoga Data Systems is a registered trademark of Perkins Research Manufacturing Company.Datacomm is a registered trademark of General Datacomm Ltd.Datalink is a registered trademark of Penril Corporation.DEC, DECxpress, DELNI-AA, and VAX are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.D/I MUX is a trademark of COASTCOM.Excelan is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.FARALLON is a registered trademark of Farallon Computing, Inc.HALAR is a registered trademark of Allied Chemical Corporation.HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.MICOM is a registered trademark of MICOM Systems, Inc.Phoenix 1536 is a registered trademark of Phoenix Technologies, Inc.Pyramid is a registered trademark of Pyramid Technologies, Inc.Saturn D4/ESF is a trademark of Scitec, Inc.Spectron is a registered trademark of Spectron Corp.Stratus is a registered trademark of Stratus Computers, Inc.Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.3COM is a registered trademark of 3COM Corporation.T-Serv is a trademark of Kentrox Industries, Inc.Unisys is a registered trademark of Unisys Corporation.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.AT&T assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

________________Contents

Preface v

Asynchronous Connections 1-1Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000 Series M1 ShelfMPC7MPC15SAM8SAM16SAM64SAM504VDM-SAM504ISN Concentrators

Synchronous Connections 2-1Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000MPC7MPC15SAM8SAM16SAM64SAM504VDM-SAM504

Special Connections 3-1Datakit II VCSMPC15

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 iii

________________Standard Connections 4-1

Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000 Series M1 ShelfMPC7MPC15

Trunk Connections 5-1Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000 Series M1 ShelfSAM8SAM16SAM64

Host Computer Connections 6-1Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000 Series M1 ShelfMPC7MPC15

LAN Interconnect Services andISN Bridging Connections 7-1Datakit II VCSBNS-1000BNS-2000 Series M1 ShelfBNS-2000 Series M2 ShelfMPC7MPC15ISN Concentrators

Building Distribution Connections 8-1

AppendixesAppendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions A-1Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information B-1Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections C-1Appendix D. VDM Physical Interface Pictorials D-1Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview E-1Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix F-1

iv Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

________________Preface

The AT&T Data Networking Products Cabling Guide contains detailed cabling information forplanning the physical connections to form a network using the following Data NetworkingProducts:

Datakit II Virtual Circuit Switch (VCS) modular cabinets

BNS-1000 cabinets

BNS-2000 shelves

Multipurpose Concentrators (MPCs)

ISN Concentrators

Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexers (SAMs)

These Data Networking Products provide capabilities for connecting a wide range of networkingdevices in the following network types:

Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) Subscriber Network Interface (SNI)

routers connected by Frame Relay service

geographically dispersed sites connected by a wide area network (WAN)

backbone trunking for Datakit II VCS and BNS-1000 connection-oriented service

two or more sites connected via a telephone company central office local area network(CO-LAN)

two or more networks connected by gateways (such as a Datakit II VCS network)

The hardware and software components of these products, as well as the new or enhancedservices and features for the latest release of each, are fully described in the System Description.

This guide includes ordering information for all of the cables and adapters shown. If you needadditional ordering information for this equipment, consult your AT&T account representative.

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 v

Preface________________Notes for Users

The AT&T Data Networking Products Cabling Guide is intended for network engineeringpersonnel to assist them in the overall planning and preparation for a network installation.

The document is organized into the following chapters:

Chapter 1AsynchronousConnections

Explains how to cable asynchronous connections, includingLAN bridge cabling configurations, via the Datakit II VCS node,BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 node, MPC7, MPC15, and SAMs.

Chapter 2SynchronousConnections

Explains how to cable synchronous connections via theDatakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, MPC7, MPC15, andSAMs.

Chapter 3SpecialConnections

Explains how to cable special purpose telephone companyconnections between the Datakit II VCS node, MPC15, andcentral office (CO) equipment.

Chapter 4StandardConnections

Explains how to cable standard connections using the X.25,X.25P, and X.75 modules via the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, MPC7, and MPC15.

Chapter 5TrunkConnections

Explains how to cable trunk connections between Datakit II VCSnodes BNS-1000 nodes, BNS-2000 nodes, MPC7s, MPC15s,SAMs, and ISN concentrators.

Chapter 6Host ComputerConnections

Explains how to cable host computers to the Datakit II VCSnode, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 node, MPC7, and MPC15.

Chapter 7LAN InterconnectServices andISN BridgingConnections

Explains cabling via the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node,BNS-2000 node, MPC7, and MPC15 for each of the interfacemodules that provide LAN Interconnect Services. Cablingconfigurations for each of the modules that provide ISN bridgingconnections and reside in the ISN concentrators are alsopresented.

Chapter 8Building DistributionConnections

Explains cabling for connections between Data NetworkingProduct nodes and the SYSTIMAX Premises DistributionSystem (PDS) backbone (or riser) subsystem, with wire and fiberoptic cables, using SYSTIMAX PDS 110P patch panels.

vi Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Preface________________Each chapter contains a section called Finding Cabling Information which provides steps tofollow to obtain the information needed for specific types of cabling. This document also includesthe following Appendixes:

Appendix ACable and AdapterGeneral Descriptions

Includes descriptions and illustrations of cables, cablingequipment, and adapters used for Data Networking Productsnetwork configurations.

Appendix BCable and AdapterOrdering Information

Gives guidelines for organizing ordering information, includinga summary of the ordering codes for all cables and adapters, andfor placing an order.

Appendix CRemote-VDMConnections

Explains cabling for three Remote Voice/Data Multiplexers(R-VDMs) configurations: R-VDMs used in single-lineapplications; R-VDMs in multi-line key set applications; andR-VDMs in Merlin key set applications.

Appendix DVDM Physical InterfacePictorials

Contains brief descriptions and illustrations of equipmentassociated with VDMs, including a VDM cabinet shelf, a VDMStand-Alone Shelf, the Model 045CS VDM, and the R-VDM.

Appendix ESYSTIMAX PDSOverview

Explains the organization of the distribution system into sixindependent subsystems: campus, equipment, backbone,horizontal (riser or house distribution), administration, and worklocations; and explains transmission media, signaling techniques,and cross-connect devices.

Appendix FModule and I/O BoardApplication Matrix

Contains charts that show the relation of functional componentsto circuit pack configurations.

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 vii

Preface________________Other Useful Documents

The Datakit II VCS Publications brochure and the BNS-2000 Publications brochure describe allof the documents available for Datakit II VCS and BNS-2000, respectively.

The following Data Networking Products documentation is helpful for obtaining more specificinformation about product features, capabilities, planning, and installation:

Data Networking Products Planning Guide

Data Networking Products Messages Reference

The Node Reference, Vol. 1 appropriate for your product

Refer to the interface module reference documents appropriate for your particular configurationfor more detailed information on the module, its administration, and troubleshooting; forexample, the Data Networking Products Frame Relay Module Reference.

Documents can be ordered from the Customer Information Center (CIC), as described at the frontof this guide.

Training Courses

A complete description of courses for Data Networking Products is available in the DataNetworking Training brochure available from the following training organization:

AT&T Corporate Education and TrainingTechnical Training and Services Organization5151 Blazer Memorial ParkwayDublin, OH 43017-1392

1 800 TRAINER (872-4637)In Canada: 1 800 221-1647

Customer Assistance

AT&T offers a Hotline Technical Support Service for customers needing technical assistance inthe administration, operation, maintenance, and problem analysis of Data Networking products.The Hotline Technical Support Service can be obtained on a contract or Time and Material basis.Time and Material billing can be established with a running or per-event Purchase Order.

To establish an account, contact your AT&T account representative or call the appropriate hotlinenumber.

viii Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Preface________________Support Services

Support agreements are available from AT&T to ensure that maintenance and other services areavailable to you, as required.

The support services offered include:

call-in support hotline. This hotline service provides technical assistance for problems thatcannot be resolved by local action, and dispatches technicians when appropriate.

on-site technician service. AT&T trained technical service personnel can perform on-sitediagnostic procedures to isolate faulty modules for replacement.

Technical personnel can also use call-in support hotlines for remote diagnostics, suggestionsfor alternative procedures, and consultation with AT&T research and development staff.

Information for the Hotline Operator

When calling for assistance from a hotline, the operator will ask for the following information:

Name

Phone number

Company name

System or product name

Service contract number or Purchase Order number for consultation services

Description of the problem or question (see Information for Hotline Consultant)

Severity of call (see the following table)

This information will be used to verify your support coverage and to help the hotline consultantunderstand the nature and urgency of your request.

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 ix

Preface________________Severity Codes for Hotline Assistance

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Severity Description_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

Major system failure. The node, network, or critical application is inoperative. The userenvironment is currently adversely affected or will be adversely affected within 24 hours. Theappropriate customer resources will be made available to the hotline support staff while theproblem or request is being worked.

1

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Partial system failure. A critical service affecting feature of the node, network, or application isinoperative, or the customer cannot commit the appropriate resources to resolve the problem orrequest. The user environment is not currently adversely affected, but may be adversely affectedwithin five business days.

2

_ ____________________________________________________________________________A feature of the system, network, or application is inoperative or missing, but the effect isnoncritical. The user will not be adversely affected, but a solution is required.

3

_ ____________________________________________________________________________All other problems or requests, such as system enhancement requests, elaboration upon the userdocumentation, or other noncritical service requests.

4

_ ____________________________________________________________________________

Information for the Hotline Consultant

Before calling the hotline, gather the following information for the hotline consultant. Thisinformation will facilitate a timely resolution of your problem or request:

A description of the network, system, and/or application configurations. Include the softwaregeneric or release number of all nodes involved in the network configuration.

A description of the full impact of the problem or request on users at the site.

Status reports for the virtual circuits in question.

The exact text of any console messages displayed when diagnostics are performed on portionsof the network.

The exact text of other console messages or alarms that may be related to the problem.

A record or history of recent configuration changes, relevant problems, and machine usagedata.

See the related user documentation for a description of the operational prompts and commands,and how to obtain software release information and module status.

Escalation Procedures

If at any time you become concerned about the rate of progress of the resolution of a problem,you may escalate the problem to the hotline management by calling the hotline and requestingescalation. Please have the associated trouble report (TR) or trouble ticket number, given to youby the hotline, available for reference at this time.

x Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

________________Asynchronous Connections

Finding Cabling Information 1-5

Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, andMPC15 1-7

Overview 1-7

Cabling from TY, TY6, or TY12 to:• Terminal or Host 1-9• Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel 1-12• Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM 1-16

Cabling from TY or TY12 to:• Terminal or Host via Existing ISN/PDS Wiring 1-19• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 1-21• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-24• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 1-27• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet 1-30• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-34• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM 1-38

Cabling from TSM8 to:• Terminal or Host 1-42• Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM 1-44• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 1-47• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-51• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 1-55• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet 1-59• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-63• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM 1-67

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

________________Cabling from Control Computer to:

• Administrative Console 1-71• Administrative Printer and/or ARU 1-73• StarKeeper II NMS Host 1-75• StarKeeper II NMS Host via Network Connection 1-78• StarKeeper II NMS Host via Host Connection 1-80

Cabling from MSM to:• Terminal or Host Computer 1-83• Terminal or Host Computer via 110 Patch Panel 1-86• Terminal or Host Computer via Modem or FOM 1-90• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 1-93• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-96• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 1-99• R-VDM via D4 and VDM Cabinet 1-102• R-VDM via D4 and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-105• R-VDM via D4 and Model 045CS VDM 1-108

SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, andVDM-SAM504 1-111

Overview 1-111

Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to:• Terminal or Host 1-113• Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM 1-115• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 1-118• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-121• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 1-124

Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to:• Terminal or Host 1-127• Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel 1-130• Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM 1-133• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 1-136• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-139• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 1-142• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet 1-145• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 1-149• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM 1-153


________________Cabling from VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to:

• R-VDM 1-157

ISN Concentrators 1-159

Overview 1-159

Cabling from MF-AIM to:• Terminal or Host with Software Flow Control 1-160• Terminal or Host with Hardware EIA Flow Control 1-162• Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM 1-164• Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel 1-167


________________Asynchronous Connections

This chapter explains how to cable asynchronous connections via the:

Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, 7-slot MultipurposeConcentrator (MPC7), and 15-slot Multipurpose Concentrator (MPC15)

Synchronous Asynchronous Multiplexers (SAMs)

Information Systems Network (ISN) Concentrator

Finding Cabling Information

To find cabling information for specific asynchronous applications, refer to this chapter’s table ofcontents. This table of contents has been designed as an easy reference to find the desiredconfiguration and is to be used in the following manner:

This chapter’s table of contents is divided into five major headings that have been defined atthe cabinet level. First, identify the heading that addresses the particular cabinet from whichcabling will originate. The major cabinet level headings are as follows:

— Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15

— SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504

— ISN Concentrators

Then, identify the asynchronous interface module from which the cabling will originate:

— Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15 use the MSM, TY6, TY12, or TSM8 interfacemodules

— BNS-1000 node uses the MSM, TY12 or TSM8 interface modules

— BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf uses the MSM or TY12 module

— SAM8 uses the Access Module for Dedicated Applications (AMDA)

— SAM16 uses the TERM8

— SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504 use the TERM32

— ISN Concentrators use the Multi-function Asynchronous Interface Module (MF-AIM)

Next, identify the device at the terminating end of the connection (e.g., terminal, host, PDN,R-VDM, and so forth).

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 1-5

Asynchronous Connections________________Finally, select the path of the connection (e.g., directly wired or via modem, FOM, D4channel bank, 110 patch panel, VDM cabinet, VDM Stand-Alone Shelf, and so forth).

Proceed to the appropriate subsection.

Each subsection provides a brief overview of the cabling for that application, a pictorialrepresentation of the interconnections, and a table that contains cable (and adapter) orderinginformation.

1-6 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000,

BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for each of the asynchronous interfacemodules that are installed in the Datakit II VCS and BNS-1000 nodes, BNS-2000 Series M1Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15. Each cabling configuration represents the required connectionsbetween the module and other equipment associated with the communications path, such asterminals, modems, hosts, patch panels, multiplexers, and so forth.

Overview

The cabling for the Datakit II VCS and BNS-1000 nodes, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7,and MPC15 is determined by their supported interface modules and the physical characteristicsand configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

The asynchronous modules supported by the Datakit II VCS and BNS-1000 nodes, BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are listed below:

MSM, TY, and TY12 are interface modules that support up to 12 asynchronous ports.

TY6 is an interface module that supports up to 6 asynchronous ports.

TSM8 (Transparent Synchronous Module 8-port) is an interface module that providesnon-switched synchronous or asynchronous connections via predefined destinations (PDD)only.

Other asynchronous interfaces to support alarms and administrative activities are provided viathe CPU or ECPU Module and the optional MRCM (Maintenance Redundancy ControlModule).

The following table illustrates the association of the interface modules to the appropriate cabinets.


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-1. Asynchronous Interface Modules in Cabinets

____________________________________________________Equipment Datakit II VCS BNS-1000 BNS-2000 MPC________________________________________________________________________________________________________MSM √ √ √ √____________________________________________________TSM8 √ √ √ √____________________________________________________TY √____________________________________________________TY6 √ √____________________________________________________TY12 √ √ √____________________________________________________

Shielding Requirements for Cabling

The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 must be shielded to meet Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs areneeded for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after the first 25 feet.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TY, TY6, or TY12 Directly to Terminal or Host

The cabling for a TY, TY6, or TY12 originates at the I/O board on the backplane of theDatakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15. Interfacemodules such as a TY6 or TY12 reside in the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15. An I/O board equipped with connectors provides the meansfor cable connections. See the following figure for the particular module supported.

The cabling from a TY, TY6, or TY12 module to a terminal or host can be configured as follows:

The TY6 consists of a TN1006 main circuit pack and an ED5P066-30, G-1 I/O board.

The TY and TY12 consist of a TN1011C main circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O board.

The B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the first 25 feet. The cable may be extendedusing a B25A cable.

Each B25FS-1MOD 25-pair cable supports six 8-wire interface ports.

One 50-pin connector on the ED5P066-30, G-1 I/O board links a TY6 module to a B25FS-1MOD 25-pair cable. Each TY6 module requires one cable.

Two 50-pin connectors on the AWJ4 I/O board link a TY or TY12 module to B25FS-1MOD25-pair cables. Each TY or TY12 module requires two cables.

The B25FS-1MOD may be connected to an M48EX cable assembly that provides six femaleends that connect directly to terminals and hosts, or it may be connected to a 258AF or 258BFadapter that provides six 8-wire modular jacks.

NOTE: The M48EX cable does not provide for the DSR lead. Use the 258AF or 258BFadapter when the connecting terminal or host requires the DSR signal.

If the 258AF or 258BF adapter is used, the connection from the adapter to the terminal or hostdepends on the gender of the terminal connector.

— Use D8AG cables for terminals with male connectors.

— Use D8AN cables for terminals with female connectors.

As an alternative cabling method, use D8W cables from the 258BF adapter to a D8AG-Fadapter for a terminal or host with a male connector or a D8AN-M adapter for a terminal orhost with a female connector.

See the following figure for an illustration of these configurations.


Asynchronous Connections________________

M48EX

To Terminals or Host

Computers

D8AG

D8AN

D8W

To Terminals

or Host Computers

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

Datakit II VCS,MPC7, orMPC15

TY6

ED5P

066-

30TY

12AW

J4

J1

J2

J1

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter

BNS-1000

TY12

AWJ4

J1

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf TYAW

J4

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.

FIGURE 1-1. From TY, TY6, or TY12 Directly to Terminal or Host


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-2. Ordering Information: From TY, TY6, or TY12 Directly to Terminal orHost

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-262, G-C

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258AF adapter 50-pin-F G-152

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G-155

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG 25-pin-F G-130, G-G

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN 25-pin-M G-132, G-G

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG-F adapter 25-pin-F G-138

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN-M adapter 25-pin-F G-140

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48EX 50-pin 90°-F G-168, G-E

6x25-pin-F, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________

For plenum cables, see Appendix B.


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY, TY6, or TY12 to Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel

With use of the indicated cables, asynchronous connections from the Datakit II VCS node,MPC7, and MPC15 are compatible with standard non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels.Asynchronous connections from the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000, BNS-2000 Series M1Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are compatible with SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels.

NOTE: For background information on SYSTIMAX PDS design and components, seeAppendix E. It explains SYSTIMAX PDS concepts, how SYSTIMAX PDS subsystemscover various parts of the distribution system, and where the backbone cablingsubsystem fits into the overall building distribution system design.

Non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 Patch Panels

The cabling from a TY6 or TY12 module to a non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panel can beconfigured as follows:


The TY12 consists of a TN1011C main circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O board.

A 110 patch panel can accept up to thirty-six 25-pair cables. Each 25-pair cable supports six8-wire interface ports.

For 110 patch panels that require field termination of building cables, use B25FS-1MOD fromthe TY6 or TY12 I/O board along with an A25R-SE to connect to a 110 patch panel.

Depending on the type of 110 patch panel used and the specific distribution method required,connections from the patch panel to the terminating equipment may be made with 4-pair "D"wire to 103A connecting blocks or they may be made with a B25A cable to a 258A or 258Badapter. In either case, the final connection to the terminating equipment will be made withmodular cables or adapters.

— Use the D8AG cable for equipment with male connectors.

— Use the D8AN cable for equipment with female connectors.

As an alternative to using the D8AG and D8AN cables, a D8W cable may be connected toD8AG-F or D8AN-M adapters to provide the same respective connections.

SYSTIMAX PDS 110 Patch Panels

The cabling from a TY, TY6 or TY12 module to a SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panel can beconfigured as follows:




Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________The TY, TY6 and TY12 modules require M42P or M30P shielded cable for the first 25 feet.

— The M42P cable provides flow control signaling (SYSTIMAX PDS compatible).

— The M30P cable is used where flow control signaling is not required (SYSTIMAX PDScompatible).

The M42P or M30P cables may terminate directly to the 110 patch panel or they may beextended with B25A or A25U cables as required.

For 110 patch panels that require field termination of building cables, use B25FS-1MOD fromthe TY, TY6 or TY12 I/O board along with an A25R-SE to connect to a 110 patch panel.






See the following figure for an illustration of this configuration.



4-Pair "D" wire

B25A

110 Patch Panel*

M42P or M30P

A25U

B25A

B25FS-1MOD A25R-SE

M42P or M30P

D8AG

D8AN

To Terminals

or Host

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter

258Aor

258BAdapter

103AConnecting

Block(or

equivalent)

B25FS-1MODF

D8W


TY6

ED5P

066-

30TY

12AW

J4

J1

J2

J1

BNS-1000

TY12

AWJ4

J1

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf TYAW

J4

J1

J2

*110 patch panels are available with different interconnects.Before selecting cables, determine which interconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 1-2. From TY, TY6 or TY12 to Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-3. Ordering Information: From TY, TY6 or TY12 to Terminal or Host via 110Patch Panel


B25FS-1MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-262, G-C

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25R-SE 50-pin 90°-F G-103, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________M42P 50-pin 180°-M G-177, G-AR

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M30P 50-pin 180°-M G-176, G-AR

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90°-M G-114, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258A adapter 50-pin-M G-153

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258B adapter 50-pin-M G-154





mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN-M adapter 25-pin-M G-140

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MODF 50-pin 180°-M G-254, G-C

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY, TY6 or TY12 to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM

The cabling for a TY, TY6, or TY12 originates at the I/O board on the backplane of theDatakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15 where aninterface module such as a TY12 resides. The I/O board plugs into the backplane and providesconnections between the TY, TY6 or TY12 modules and the modems or Fiber-Optic Multiplexers(FOMs) housed in a separate cabinet.

The cabling configurations of TY, TY6 or TY12 to terminals or hosts via modems or FOMs areas follows:



The TY, TY6 and TY12 modules require B25FS-1MOD shielded cable for the first 25 feet.


One 50-pin connector on the ED5P066-30, G-1 I/O board links a TY6 module to a B25FS-1MOD 25-pair cable. Each TY6 module requires one cable.

Two 50-pin connectors on the AWJ4 I/O board link a TY or TY12 module to B25FS-1MOD25-pair cables. Each TY or TY12 module requires two cables.

Although B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the initial 25 feet from theDatakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15, aB25A unshielded cable can be used at the customer’s option after the first 25 feet.

The terminating end of the B25FS-1MOD cable may be connected to an M48D cableassembly that provides six male ends that connect directly to modems or multiplexers, or theB25FS-1MOD cable may be connected to a 258AF or 258BF adapter that provides six 8-pinmodular jacks.

— If the 258AF or 258BF adapter is used, the connection from the adapter to the modem ormultiplexer should be made with a D8AH cable.

— As an alternative to the D8AH cable, a D8W modular cable may be used with an adapter.If the modem or multiplexer has a male connector, use the D8AH-F adapter. If themodem or multiplexer has a female connector, use the D8AH-M adapter.

— Terminal and host connections are made at the terminating modems or multiplexers usingM25A and M25B cables. The cable selected depends on the gender of the modem ormultiplexer.

Another option is to use a B25FS-1MOD cable from the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15 plugged directly into a 50-pin connectoron a FOM. Canoga Data Systems Model CDS372 and Optical Data Systems ModelODS310 are two FOM vendors that provide 50-pin connectors.



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________

Switched or Private Line

M48D

To Modems or FOMs

D8AH

D8W

To Modems or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

D8AH-FAdapter

D8AH-MAdapter

B25FS-1MOD*

Modems or FOMs at the other end


M25A

M25B


TY6

ED5P

066-

30, G

1TY

12AW

J4

J1

J2

J1

BNS-1000

TY12

AWJ4

J1

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf TYAW

J4

J1

J2


FIGURE 1-3. From TY, TY6 or TY12 to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-4. Ordering Information: From TY, TY6 or TY12 to Terminal or Host viaModem or FOM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G-131, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-F adapter 25-pin-F G-147

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-M adapter 25-pin-M G-139

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-F G-109, G-E

6 x 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to Terminal or Host via Existing ISN/PDS Wiring

With the use of the indicated cables, asynchronous connections from the Datakit II VCS node,BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are compatible with standardSYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels previously wired for connection to ISN AIM8 modules.


The cabling from a TY or TY12 module to a 110 patch panel previously wired for connections toISN AIM8 modules can be configured as follows:

TY and TY12 consists of TN1011C main circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O board.

This configuration requires the use of two TY or TY12 modules in the node. With thisarrangement an ISN node connected to three AIM8 modules can be replaced with a Datakit IIVCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15 node withoutmodifying 110 patch panel or existing ISN AIM8 cabling.

The TY-AIM cable connectors A and B connect to the J1 or J2 connectors on one TY orTY12 I/O board while connectors C and D connect to J1 and J2 on another TY or TY12 I/Oboard.

The TY-AIM connectors 1, 2, and 3 terminate directly to existing ISN AIM8 cabling. TheTY-AIM cable maps 24 Asynchronous AIM8 ports (i.e. 3 cables with 8 circuits each) to 24asynchronous TY or TY12 ports (i.e. 4 cables with 6 circuits each) making Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000, BN-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 nodes compatible with existingPDS wiring.




TY-AIM

AIM8 cablesfrom existing

ISN terminators

110 PatchPanel

To Terminal,Host, etc.

PDS Wiring

Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000,MPC7, orMPC15

TY12

AWJ4

TY12

AWJ4

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf

TY AWJ4

TY

AWJ4

FIGURE 1-4. From TY or TY12 to Terminal or Host via Existing ISN/PDS Wiring

TABLE 1-5. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to Terminal or Host via ExistingISN/PDS Wiring

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________TY-AIM 4 50-pin 180°-M G-240, G-AX

3 50-pin 180°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY orTY12 module to a Remote-Voice Data Multiplexer (R-VDM) via a VDM cabinet can beconfigured as follows:

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. Each shelf provides four 50-pin data connectorsthat support six circuits each. A fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and 288circuits requires 48 data interface cables. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf, seeAppendix D.

The TY and TY12 provide 12 circuits via two 50-pin connectors (J1 and J2) on theirassociated AWJ4 I/O board.

A B25FSX-1MOD cable is required to connect each 50-pin connector on the AWJ4 I/O boardto the VDM shelf 50-pin connectors.

For each VDM circuit in a central office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the VDM cabinet in theCO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

— The VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO Main Distribution Frame(MDF) with an A25RX cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RX cables provides voice andvoice/data connections for 12 circuits.

— The end of the A25RX cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on the VDM backplane.The butt end is then connected to the MDF.

— Voice channels are wired from the MDF to the CO voice switch.

— Voice/data channels are wired from the MDF to the R-VDM over 2-wire unloaded loop(maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber Loop Carrier (SLC 96) system.

— For more information about the R-VDM connection, see the appropriate subsection inAppendix C that matches your application:

Cabling R-VDMs in Single Line Applications

Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications

Cabling R-VDMs in Merlin Key Set Applications




2-Wire Unloaded Loop (Max. 18,000 Ft.)

To Remote

VDM Site

B25FSX-1MOD

Main Distribution

Frame

TY12

AWJ4

J2

WP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

6

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1

Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the Datakit II VCS or BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-5. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-6. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


B25FSX-1MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-204, G-C

50-pin 180°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY or TY12module to an R-VDM via a VDM Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 connectors for data interfaceconnections. For an illustration of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.


A B25FS-1MOD cable from the AWJ4 I/O board plugs into a 258BF adapter or M48D cable.

A 258BF adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232-C connections. Use D8AHcords to complete the connections from the 258BF adapter to the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

Alternately, an M48D cable splits the 50-pin cable into six RS-232-C cables with DB25 maleconnectors. Each leg of the M48D cable can connect directly to one of the DB25 connectorson the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf backplane.

For each VDM circuit in a central office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the VDM Stand-AloneShelf in the CO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided asfollows:

— The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) with an A25RXM cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RXM cablesprovides voice and voice/data connections for 12 circuits.

— The end of the A25RXM cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on the VDMbackplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.











To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

J125

B25FS-1MOD* VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1) J126

D8AH258BFAdapter

M48D

TY12

AWJ4

J2


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: Wire all circuits on J125 and only the first six circuits on J126. The VDM Stand-Alone Shelfsupports a maximum of 18 circuits.

FIGURE 1-6. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-7. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-AloneShelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G-155

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-F G-109, G-E

6 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G-131, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

butt-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY or TY12module to an R-VDM via a Model 045CS VDM can be configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM is equipped with one DB25 data connector. For an illustration of theModel 045CS VDM rear panel, see Appendix D.


A B25FS-1MOD cable connects from the AWJ4 I/O board of the TY or TY12 module to a258BF adapter or M48D cable.

A 258BF adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232-C connections. Use oneD8AH cord to complete each connection from the 258BF adapter to one Model 045CS VDM.

Alternatively, an M48D cable splits the 50-pin cable into six RS-232-C legs with DB25 maleconnectors. Each leg of an M48D cable can connect directly to the DB25 connector at theback of a Model 045CS VDM.

For each VDM circuit in a central office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the Model 045CS VDM inthe CO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided asfollows:

— The Model 045CS VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) via D6AM modular cables and 635B connecting blocks. Eachpair of the D6AM modular cables provides one voice and one voice/data connection.

— One end of each of the D6AM modular cables connects to the TEL and LINE receptacleson the Model 045CS VDM. The other end of these cables connects to receptacles on a635B connecting block that, in turn, is connected to the CO MDF.

— Voice channels (from the TEL receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the CO voiceswitch.

— Voice/data channels (from the LINE receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the R-VDMover 2-wire unloaded loop (maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber LoopCarrier (SLC 96) system.









To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

LINE

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

B25FS-1MOD* VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1) TEL

M48D

D8AH258BFAdapter

TY12

AWJ4

J2


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.

FIGURE 1-7. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-8. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-M G-109, G-E

6 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G-144, G-H

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY or TY12module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bank and the VDM cabinet can be configured as follows:



Connections to the D4 RS-232-C DSU-II data port, used for CO-LAN Foreign Serving Office(FSO) arrangements of the VDM and the node, may be made via a DB25 connection on thefaceplate of the DSU-II data port plug-in unit or via direct connections to the backplane of theD4 channel bank.

A DSU-II data port plug-in supports one circuit with a female DB25 RS-232-C connector.

A B25FS-1MOD cable is required to connect each 50-pin connector on the AWJ4 I/O boardto a 258BF adapter. This adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232-C connections.

Use D8AHX cords to make the connection from the adapter to the DSU-II data port.

At the remote end, use D8ANX cords to make the connection from a DSU-II data port to ajack in a 258BF adapter.

Use a B25F 50-pin cable to connect the 258BF adapter to the VDM cabinet.








Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling R-VDMs in Single Line Applications






B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

D8ANX


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

258BFAdapter

B25FA25RX

258BFAdapter

TY12

AWJ4

J2


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the Datakit II VCS or BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-8. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-9. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Cabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AHX 25-pin-M G-193, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8ANX 25-pin-M G-194, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G-155

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25F 50-pin 180°-M G-100, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY or TY12module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bank and Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports 18 circuits. Female DB25 RS-232-C connectors areprovided for each circuit, requiring 18 data cables per shelf. For an illustration of the VDMStand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.





Use D8AHX cords to make the connection from the adapter to the D4 DSU-II data port.

At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the DSU-II data port to one of the DB25connectors at the back of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.














B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Stand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

A25RXM

J125

J126

258BFAdapter

TY12

AWJ4

J2


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1


FIGURE 1-9. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-10. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AHX 25-pin-M G-193, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G-166, G-AM

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CSVDM

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 TY or TY12module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bank and the Model 045CS VDM can be configured asfollows:

The Model 045CS VDM supports one circuit. A female DB25 RS-232-C connector isprovided, requiring one data cable per 045CS VDM. For an illustration of the Model 045CSVDM rear panel, see Appendix D.






At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the DSU-II data port to the DB25 connectorat the back of the Model 045CS VDM.















To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

LINE

M25B-DSU

B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1258BFAdapter

TY12

AWJ4

J2


J1TY AW

J4

J2

BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

J1


FIGURE 1-10. From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-11. Ordering Information: From TY or TY12 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Model 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F





25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G-144, G-H

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TSM8 Directly to Terminal or Host

Although the TSM8 is designed to support a variety of synchronous protocols, it is also capableof providing transport service for asynchronous ports. The TSM8 must be configured with anAWJ18 I/O board.

Note the following conditions for configuring this module as an asynchronous port:

a. This connection supports only predefined destination (PDD) calls originating from theendpoints. However, the endpoints can be destinations for switched calls from otherasynchronous endpoints (such as dial-in calls to a host).

b. Although the endpoints can be permanently active ports, it is not a requirement.

c. Flow control is not a configurable option for this type of port. If the endpoint usesXON/XOFF flow control, it is supported. EIA flow control is not supported.

The cabling configuration is as follows:

For this application, the TSM8 consists of a MC1D088A1 main circuit pack and an AWJ18I/O board.

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to each 50-pin connector on the AWJ18 I/O board.

Each B25FS-1MOD cable is terminated with either a SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable.

— The SYNC4-F cable provides four female RS-232-C connections.

— The SYNC4-M cable provides four male RS-232-C connections.

SYNC4 cables may be connected directly to terminal or host ports or they may be extendedusing M25A and M25B cables.




Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000,BNS-2000

Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15

SYNC4-FM25A

M25B

To Terminalsor Host

SYNC4-M

M25A

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2


FIGURE 1-11. From TSM8 Directly to Terminal or Host

TABLE 1-12. Ordering Information: From TSM8 Directly to Terminal or Host


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-M 50-pin 90°-F G-160, G-R

4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-F 50-pin 90°-F G-161, G-R

4 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from TSM8 to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM

Although the TSM8 is designed to support a variety of synchronous protocols, it is also capableof providing transport service for asynchronous ports. For this application, the TSM8 must beconfigured with an AWJ17 I/O board.





The cabling configuration is as follows:

For this application, the TSM8 consists of a MC1D088A1 main circuit pack and an AWJ17I/O board.

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to each 50-pin connector on the AWJ17 I/O board.

Each B25FS-1MOD cable is terminated with either a SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable.

— The SYNC4-F cable provides 4 female RS-232-C connections.

— The SYNC4-M cable provides 4 male RS-232-C connections.

The SYNC4 cables may be connected directly to modems or multiplexers or they may beextended using M25A and M25B cables.

Terminal and host connections are made at the terminating modems and multiplexers usingM25A and M25B cables. The cable selected depends on the gender of the modem ormultiplexer.






To Modems or FOMs


SYNC4-FM25A

M25B

SYNC4-M

M25A

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8AW

J17

J1

J2

To Modems or FOMs at other end


M25A

M25B


FIGURE 1-12. From TSM8 to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-13. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to Terminal or Host via Modem orFOM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-F 50-pin 90°-F G-161, G-R

4 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet






The cabling can be configured as follows:


The TSM8 provides eight circuits via two 50-pin connectors (J1 and J2) on its associatedAWJ18 I/O board. Each connector supports four circuits.

A B25FS-1MOD cable is connected to each 50-pin connector on the AWJ18 I/O board.

A SYNC4-MX cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable. The SYNC4-MXcable splits the 50-pin cable into four separate RS-232-C legs with DB25 male connectors.

The SYNC4-MX cable legs connect to the legs of a SYNC6-M cable. Since the SYNC6-Mcable has six legs, and the SYNC4-MX only has four, two legs from another SYNC4-MXcable plug into the remaining legs of the first SYNC6-M cable. The remaining two legs of thesecond SYNC4-MX cable plug into a second SYNC6-M cable, leaving four emptyconnectors. The first four circuits of another TSM8 board can be plugged into these legs.Thus, three SYNC4-MX cables from TSM8 boards are needed for every two SYNC6-Mcables connected to the VDM cabinet.

The 50-pin male connector of the SYNC6-M cable is connected to the VDM cabinet.





Asynchronous Connections________________— Voice channels are wired from the MDF to the CO voice switch.












To Remote

VDM Site

B25FS-1MOD*

Main Distribution

Frame

TSM

8AW

J18

WP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

J1

J2

B25FS-1MOD*

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-MX

SYNC6-M

SYNC6-M6

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the Datakit II VCS side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-13. From TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-14. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-MX 50-pin 90°-M G-217, G-R

4 25-pin-M, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC6-M 50-pin 180°-M G-164, G-E

6 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf








The TSM8 provides eight circuits via two 50-pin connectors (J1 and J2) on its associatedAWJ18 I/O board. Each connector supports four circuits.

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a 50-pin connector on the AWJ18 I/O board.

A SYNC4-MX cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable. The SYNC4-MXcable splits the B25FS-1MOD cable into four separate RS-232-C legs with DB25 maleconnectors.

Each leg of the SYNC4-MX cable can connect directly to one of the DB25 connectors on theVDM Stand-Alone Shelf backplane.








Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling R-VDMs in Single Line Applications









To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

SYNC4-MXVDM

Stand-Alone Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126


FIGURE 1-14. From TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-15. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-MX 50-pin 90°-F G-217, G-R

4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM








The TSM8 provides 8 circuits via two 50-pin connectors (J1 and J2) on its associated AWJ18I/O board. Each connector supports four circuits.


A SYNC4-MX cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable. The SYNC4-MXcable splits the 50-pin cable into four separate RS-232-C legs with DB25 male connectors.

Each leg of the SYNC4-MX cable can connect directly to the DB25 connector on one Model045CS VDM.






Asynchronous Connections________________— Voice/data channels (from the LINE receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the R-VDM

over 2-wire unloaded loop (maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber LoopCarrier (SLC 96) system.










SYNC4-MXB25FS-1MOD*


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

LINE

TEL


FIGURE 1-15. From TSM8 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-16. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet










A D4 DSU-II data port plug-in supports one circuit with a female DB25 RS-232-C connector.


The other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a SYNC4-MX cable. This cable splitsthe B25FS-1MOD cable into four RS-232-C legs with DB25 male connectors.

Use an M25AS-DSU cable to connect one leg of the SYNC4-MX cable to the RS-232-Cconnector on the D4 DSU-II data port.

At the remote end, use D8ANX cords to make the connection from a D4 DSU-II data port to ajack in a 258BF adapter.

Use a B25F 25-pair cable to connect the 258BF adapter to the VDM cabinet.




Asynchronous Connections________________— The end of the A25RX cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on the VDM backplane.

The butt end is then connected to the MDF.












TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

B25FS-1MOD* M25AS-DSU

D4

DSU

IIT1

D4

DSU

II

SYNC4-MX

D8ANX


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

258BFAdapter

B25FA25RX


FIGURE 1-16. From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-17. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Cabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25AS-DSU 25-pin-M G-169, G-AL

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8ANX 25-pin-M G-194, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G-155

6 mod sockets_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25F 50-pin 180°-M G-100, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-AloneShelf





c. Flow control is not a configurable option for this type of port. If the endpoint usesXON/XOFF flow control, it is supported. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) flowcontrol is not supported.







The other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a SYNC4-MX cable. This cable splitsthe 25-pair cable into four RS-232-C legs with DB25 male connectors.


At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the DSU-II data port to one connector at theback of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.


— The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) with an A25RXM cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RXM cables


Asynchronous Connections________________provides voice and voice/data connections for 12 circuits.













TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

M25AS-DSU T1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Stand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

A25RXM

J125

J126

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-MX D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

II


FIGURE 1-17. From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-18. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Stand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G-166, G-AM


single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM







The Model 045CS VDM supports one circuit. A female DB25 RS-232-C connector isprovided, requiring one data cable per 045CS VDM. For an illustration of the Model 045CSVDM rear panel, see Appendix D.





The other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a SYNC4-MX cable. This cable splitsthe B25FS-1MOD cable into four RS-232-C legs with DB25 male connectors.


At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the D4 DSU-II data port to the Model045CS VDM.



Asynchronous Connections________________— The Model 045CS VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO Main

Distribution Frame (MDF) via D6AM modular cables and 635B connecting blocks. Eachpair of the D6AM modular cables provides one voice and one voice/data connection.













TSM

8AW

J18

J1

J2

M25AS-DSU T1B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-MX D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

II


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

TEL

M25B-DSU


FIGURE 1-18. From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-19. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andModel 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G-166, G-AM


6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from Control Computer to Administrative Console

The node’s Control Computer consists of a CPU or ECPU Module with or without an MRCM.The cabling from the node’s Control Computer to an administrative console terminal can beconfigured as follows:

The administrative console terminal is connected to Port A of the Control Computer’sassociated AWJ15 (CPU or ECPU) I/O board or AWJ16 (MRCM) I/O board by an M25BS-MOD cable.

There are two basic Control Computer configurations that may be used:

— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the M25BS-MOD cable to Port A of the AWJ16I/O board.

— If the system does not have an MRCM, connect the M25BS-MOD cable to Port A of theAWJ15 I/O board.




M25BS-MOD

Datakit II VCS

AWJ1

6BAW

J15 Port A

Port A

Console Terminal*

MR

CM

CPU

/EC

PU

BNS-1000, BNS-2000 Series

M1 Shelf

AWJ1

EBAW

J15 Port A

Port A

MR

CM

ECPU

*Video display terminal is compatible with either 110 VAC or 220 VAC.

FIGURE 1-19. From Control Computer to Administrative Console

TABLE 1-20. Ordering Information: From Control Computer to AdministrativeConsole


M25BS-MOD 25-pin-M G-179, G-L

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from Control Computer to Administrative Printer and/or ARU

The node’s Control Computer consists of a CPU or ECPU Module with or without an MRCM.The cabling from the node’s Control Computer to an administrative printer or an Alarm RelayUnit (ARU), or both can be configured as follows:

The printer is the AT&T Model 572 Teleprinter or equivalent and the recommended ARU isthe AT&T JIP186B-1, L110.

If this application will be using an ARU, an ARU-Y cable is used to connect both the printerand the ARU to Port B of the Control Computer’s associated AWJ15 (CPU or ECPU) I/Oboard or AWJ16 (MRCM) I/O board.


— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the 25-pin connector on the ARU-Y cable to PortB of the AWJ16 I/O board.

— If the system does not use an MRCM, connect the 25-pin connector on the ARU-Y cableto Port B of the AWJ15 I/O board.

— Connect one of the 8-pin modular connectors directly to the ARU.

— Connect the other 8-pin modular connector to a D8G-F adapter.

— Connect the D8AG-F adapter directly to the printer.

— The relay connection cable connects the relay connections port of the ARU to the COalarm grid.

If this application will not be using an ARU, a printer cable may be connected to Port B of theControl Computer’s associated AWJ15 (CPU or ECPU) I/O board or AWJ16 (MRCM) I/Oboard.


— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the printer cable to Port B of the AWJ16 I/O board.

— If the system does not use an MRCM, connect the printer cable to Port B of the AWJ15I/O board.



Asynchronous Connections________________ED1P123-30, G-7A

D8AG-FAdapter

AWJ1

6BM

RC

MAW

J15 Port B

Alarm Relay Unit

CentralOfficeAlarms

RS-

232-

C

Port B

Printer

CPU

/EC

PU

ED2P501-30, G-8


Series M1 Shelf

ED2P501-30, G-13

*Printer is compatible with 110 VAC only.

FIGURE 1-20. From Control Computer to Administrative Printer and/or ARU

TABLE 1-21. Ordering Information: From Control Computer to Administrative Printerand/or ARU


ARU-Y cable 25-pin-F ED2P501-30, G-13

2 8-pin mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG-F adapter 25-pin-F G-138

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________Printer cable 25-pin-F ED1P123-30, G-7A

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________Relay Connection Cable 25-pin-F ED2P501-30, G-8

raw end_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from Control Computer Directly to StarKeeper II NMS Host

The node’s Control Computer consists of a CPU or ECPU Module with or without an MRCM.The cabling from the node’s Control Computer to a StarKeeper Network Management System(NMS) host can be configured as follows:

The female end of an M25AS cable connects to Port B of the Control Computer’s associatedAWJ15 (CPU or ECPU) I/O board or AWJ16 (MRCM) I/O board.


— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the female end of the M25AS cable to Port B ofthe AWJ16 I/O board.

— If the system does not use an MRCM, connect the female end of the M25AS cable to PortB of the AWJ15 I/O board.

An M8AF cable is then connected to the male end of the M25AS cable.

The modular end of the M8AF cable then connects to the StarKeeper II NMS host’s EPORTSconnector.




AWJ1

6AW

J15 Port B

M8AFM25AS

Port B

StarKeeper II NMSHost

EPORTS

MR

CM

CPU

/EC

PU

Datakit II VCSAW

J16

AWJ1

5 Port B

Port B

MR

CM

ECPU

BNS-1000

FIGURE 1-21. From Control Computer Directly to StarKeeper II NMS Host


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-22. Ordering Information: From Control Computer Directly toStarKeeper II NMS Host

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M25AS 25-pin-M G-118, G-L

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M8AF 25-pin-F G-142, G-G

8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMS Host via NetworkConnection

The node’s Control Computer consists of a CPU or ECPU Module with or without an MRCM.An alternate method of cabling the Control Computer to the StarKeeper II NMS network is tocable the Control Computer’s Port B into the data network where it can be accessed by theStarKeeper II NMS host. This method is described below:

The 25-pin end of a D8AG cable is connected to Port B of the Control Computer.

— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the 25-pin end of the D8AG cable to Port B of theAWJ16 I/O board.

— If the system does not use an MRCM, connect the 25-pin end of the D8AG cable to PortB of the AWJ15 I/O board.

The modular end of the D8AG is connected to one of the six receptacles of a 258B adapterthat has been plugged into Port J1 of a TY or TY12’s AWJ4 I/O board.

The B25FS-1 cable connects Port J2 of the AWJ4 I/O board to the 258CF adapter.

A D8AA cable is connected to one of the six receptacles on a 258CF adapter that has beenconnected to Port J2 of the same AWJ4 I/O board.

The other end of the D8AA cable is connected to the StarKeeper II NMS host’s EPORTSconnector.



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________AW

J16

CPU

/EC

PU*

AWJ1

5 Port B

D8AG

EPORTSTY12

AWJ4

J1

258BAdapter

B25FS-1MOD**

258CFAdapter

D8AA

Port B

J2

MR

CM


Datakit II VCSor BNS-1000

* For Datakit II VCS, CPU/ECPU is used.

** After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD may be extended with a B25A cable.

FIGURE 1-22. From Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMS Host via NetworkConnection

TABLE 1-23. Ordering Information: From Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMSHost via Network Connection


D8AG 25-pin-F G-130, G-G

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________258B adapter 50-pin-M G-154

6 8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________258CF adapter 50-pin-F G-210

6 8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AA 8-pin mod G-134, G-G

8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MOD 50-pin-M 180° G-262, G-C

50-pin-M 90°_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMS Host via HostConnection

The node’s Control Computer consists of a CPU or ECPU Module with or without an MRCM.Another method of cabling the Control Computer to the StarKeeper II NMS network is via a hostcomputer connection using fiber. This method is similar to the network connection except thatthe connection to the StarKeeper host is made via a CPM-HS module. This method is describedbelow:

The 25-pin end of a D8AG cable is connected to Port B of the Control Computer.

— If the system uses an MRCM, connect the 25-pin end of the D8AG cable to Port B of theAWJ16 I/O board.

— If the system does not use an MRCM, connect the 25-pin end of the D8AG cable to PortB of the AWJ15 I/O board.

The modular end of the D8AG is connected to one of the six receptacles of a 258B adapterthat has been connected to one of a TY or TY12’s AWJ4 I/O board connectors.

A fiber cable (FL2P-P) is connected from a CPM-HS AWJ2 I/O board to theStarKeeper II NMS host’s Datakit interface module.

Other nodes on the network can also use this method, but instead of connecting directly to theStarKeeper II NMS host, they are trunked to a node that already has the StarKeeper II NMShost connection.



Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TY AW

J4EC

PU*

AWJ1

5AW

J16B

CPM

-HS

AWJ2

SFT

AWJ3

Port B

Port B

D8AG

Fiber Interface Module

258BAdapterJ1

J2

TY AWJ4

AWJ1

5AW

J16B

SFT

AWJ3

Port B

Port B

D8AG

258BAdapterJ1

J2

FL2P-P

FL2P-P

MR

CM

ECPU

*M

RC

M



Series M1 Shelf


Series M1 Shelf

* For Datakit II VCS, CPU/ECPU is used.

SK-ARU-YARU

CustomerAlarmGrid

FIGURE 1-23. From Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMS Host via Host Connection


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-24. Ordering Information: From Control Computer to StarKeeper II NMSHost via Host Connection


D8AG 25-pin-F G-130, G-G

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________258B adapter 50-pin-M G-154

6 8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________FL2P-P dual fiber*

st connectors_ ____________________________________________________________________________SK-ARU-Y 25-pin-F ED3P324-30 G41

2 8-pin mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________

* See Chapter 5, Trunk Connections, and Chapter 6, Host Computer Connections.For plenum cables, see Appendix B.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from MSM Directly to Terminal or Host Computer

The cabling for this part of the configuration originates at the I/O distribution board on thebackplane of the node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7. An I/O distribution board equipped withconnectors provides the means for cable connections.

The MSM consists of a TN2111B main circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O distribution board.

The node cabinet, the MPC15, or the MPC7 requires B25FS-1MOD shielded cable for thefirst 25 feet.


Two 50-pin connectors on the AWJ4 I/O distribution board link an MSM to B25FS-1MOD25-pair connectorized cables. Therefore, each MSM requires two cables.

Although B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the initial 25 feet from the nodecabinet, the MPC15, or the MPC7, a B25A unshielded cable can be used at the customer’soption after the first 25 feet.

The B25FS-1MOD may be connected to an M48EX cable assembly that provides sixconnectorized female ends that connect directly to terminals and host computers, or it may beconnected to a 258AF or 258BF adapter that provides six 8-wire modular jacks.

NOTE: The M48EX cable does not provide for the DSR lead. Use the 25AF or 258BFadapter when the connecting terminal or host requires the DSR signal.

If the 258AF or 258BF adapter is used, the connection from the adapter to the terminaldepends on the gender of the terminal connector.

– Use D8AG cables for terminals with male connectors.

– Use D8AN cables for terminals with female connectors.

As an alternative cabling method, use D8W cables from the 258BF adapter to a D8AG-Fadapter for a terminal or host with a male connector or a D8AN-M adapter for a terminal orhost with a female connector.




M48EX**


Computers

D8AG

D8AN

D8W

To Terminals

or Host Computers

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.**M48EX does not provide for the DSR lead. Use the 25AF or 258BF adapter when the connectingterminal or host requires the DSR signal.

FIGURE 1-24. MSM Directly to Terminal or Host Computer


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-25. Ordering Information: MSM Directly to Terminal or Host

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31

Cable/Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90-M G(106), G(F)

50-pin 90-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MOD 50-pin 180-M G(262), G(C)

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258AF adapter 50-pin-F G(152)

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G(155)

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG 25-pin-F G(130), G(G)

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN 25-pin-M G(132), G(G)

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G(137), G(G)

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG-F adapter 25-pin-F G(138)

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN-M adapter 25-pin-F G(140)

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48EX 50-pin 90-F G(168), G(E)

6 x 25-pin-F, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MSM to Terminal or Host Computer via 110 Patch Panel

With use of the indicated cables, asynchronous connections from the Datakit II VCS node,MPC7, and MPC15 are compatible with standard non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels.Asynchronous connections from the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000, BNS-2000 Series M1Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are compatible with SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels.

Non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 Patch Panels

The cabling from an MSM to a non-SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panel can be configured asfollows:



For 110 patch panels that require field termination of building cables, use B25FS-1MOD fromthe MSM I/O board along with an A25R-SE to connect to a 110 patch panel.





SYSTIMAX PDS 110 Patch Panels

The cabling from an MSM to a SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panel can be configured as follows:


The MSM requires an M42P or M30P shielded cable for the first 25 feet.

— The M42P cable provides flow control signaling (SYSTIMAX PDS compatible).

— The M30P cable is used where flow control signaling is not required (SYSTIMAX PDScompatible).

The M42P or M30P cables may terminate directly to the 110 patch panel or they may beextended with B25A or A25U cables as required.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________For 110 patch panels that require field termination of building cables, use B25FS-1MOD fromthe MSM I/O board along with an A25R-SE to connect to a 110 patch panel.









4-Pair "D" wire

B25A

110 Patch Panel*

M42P or M30P

A25U

B25A

B25FS-1MOD A25R-SE

M42P or M30P

D8AG

D8AN

To Terminals

or Host

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter

258Aor

258BAdapter

103AConnecting

Block(or equivalent)

B25FS-1MODF

D8W

MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2



*110 patch panels are available with different interconnects.Before selecting cables, determine which interconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 1-25. MSM to Terminal or Host Computer via 110 Patch Panel


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-26. Ordering Information: MSM to Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31

Cable/Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MOD 50-pin 180-M G(262), G(C)

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25R-SE 50-pin 90-F G(103), G(A)

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________M42P 50-pin 180-M G(177), G(AR)

50-pin 90-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M30P 50-pin 180-M G(176), G(AR)

50-pin 90-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90-M G(106), G(F)

50-pin 90-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90-M G(114), G(F)

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258A adapter 50-pin-M G(153)

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258B adapter 50-pin-M G(154)

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG 25-pin-F G(130), G(G)

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN 25-pin-M G(132), G(G)

mod plug, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G(137), G(G)

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG-F adapter 25-pin-F G(138)

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AN-M adapter 25-pin-M G(140)

mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MODF 50-pin 180-M G(262), G(C)

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MSM to Terminal or Host Computer via Modem or FOM

The cabling for this part of the configuration originates at the I/O distribution board on thebackplane of the node cabinet, the MPC15, or the MPC7 where the MSM resides. The I/Odistribution board plugs into the backplane and provides connections between the MSMs and themodems or fiber-optic multiplexers (FOMs) housed in a separate cabinet.

The cabling configurations of the MSM to terminals or host computers via modems or FOMs isas follows:


The MSM requires B25FS-1MOD shielded cable for the first 25 feet.


Two 50-pin connectors on the AWJ4 I/O distribution board link an MSM to B25FS-1MOD25-pair connectorized cables. Therefore, each MSM requires two cables.

Although B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the initial 25 feet from the nodecabinet, the MPC15, or the MPC7, a B25A unshielded cable can be used at the customer’soption after the first 25 feet.

The terminating end of the B25FS-1MOD cable may be connected to an M48D cableassembly that provides six connectorized male ends that connect directly to modems ormultiplexers, or the B25FS-1MOD cable may be connected to a 258AF or 258BF adapter thatprovides six 8-pin modular jacks.

– If the 258-type adapter is used, the connection from the adapter to the modem ormultiplexer should be made with a D8AH cable.

– As an alternative to the D8AH cable, a D8W modular cable may be used with an adapter.If the modem or multiplexer has a male connector, use the D8AH-F adapter. If the modemor multiplexer has a female connector, use the D8AH-M adapter.

– Terminal and host computer connections are made at the terminating modems ormultiplexers using M25A and M25B cables. The cable selected depends on the gender ofthe modem or multiplexer.

Another option is to use a B25FS-1MOD cable from the node cabinet or from the MPC15 orMPC7 plugged directly into a 50-pin connector on an FOM. Canoga Data Systems ModelCDS372 and Optical Data Systems Model ODS310 are two FOMs that provide 50-pinconnectors.





M48D

To Modems or FOMs

D8AH

D8W

To Modems or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

D8AH-FAdapter

D8AH-MAdapter

B25FS-1MOD*



M25A

M25B



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2


FIGURE 1-26. MSM to Terminal or Host Computer via Modem or FOM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-27. Ordering Information: MSM to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31



50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258AF adapter 50-pin-F G(152)

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G(155)

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G(131), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G(137), G(G)

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-F adapter 25-pin-F G(147)

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-M adapter 25-pin-M G(139)

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90-F G(109), G(E)

6 x 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G(107), G(P)

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G(108), G(P)

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to a Remote-Voice/DataMultiplexer (R-VDM) via a VDM cabinet can be configured as follows:

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. Each shelf provides four 50-pin data connectorsthat support six circuits each. Therefore, a fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and288 circuits requires 48 data interface cables.

The MSM provides 12 circuits via two 50-pin connectors (J1 and J2) on its associated AWJ4I/O distribution board.

A B25FSX-1MOD cable is required to connect each 50-pin connector on the AWJ4 to theVDM shelf 50-pin connectors.

For each VDM circuit in a Central Office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the VDM cabinet in theCO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO Main Distribution Frame(MDF) with an A25RX cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RX cables provides voice andvoice/data connections for 12 circuits.

– The connectorized end of the A25RX cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.

– Voice channels are wired from the MDF to the CO voice switch.

– Voice/data channels are wired from the MDF to the R-VDM over 2-wire unloaded loop(maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber Loop Carrier (SLC 96) system.





To Remote

VDM Site

B25FSX-1MOD

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

6

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2

Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectors on thenode cabinet side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-27. MSM to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-28. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31

Cable/Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FSX-1MOD 50-pin 180-M G(204), G(C)

50-pin 180-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180-F G(115), G(A)

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to an R-VDM via a VDMStand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 connectors for data interfaceconnections.


A B25FS-1MOD cable from the AWJ4 plugs into a 258BF adapter or M48D cable.

A 258BF adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232 connections. Use D8AH cordsto complete the connections from the 258BF adapter to the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

Alternately, an M48D cable splits the 50-pin cable into six RS-232 cables with DB25 maleconnectors. Each leg of the M48D cable can connect directly to one of the DB25 connectorson the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf backplane.

For each VDM circuit in a CO, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer or enduser equipment location. The connection between the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf in the CO andthe R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) with an A25RXM cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RXM cablesprovides voice and voice/data connections for 12 circuits.

– The connectorized end of the A25RXM cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.







To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

J125


Shelf

(See Note 1) J126

D8AH258BFAdapter

M48D



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2


FIGURE 1-28. MSM to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-29. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31



50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G(155)

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90-F G(109), G(E)

6 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G(131), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180-M G(167), G(A)

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to an R-VDM via a Model045CS VDM can be configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM is equipped with one DB25 data connector.


A B25FS-1MOD cable connects from the AWJ4 I/O distribution board of the MSM to a258BF adapter or M48D cable.

A 258BF adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232 connections. Use one D8AHcord to complete each connection from the 258BF adapter to one Model 045CS VDM.

Alternatively, an M48D cable splits the 50-pin cable into six RS-232 legs with DB25 maleconnectors. Each leg of an M48D cable can connect directly to the DB25 connector at theback of a Model 045CS VDM.

For each VDM circuit in a CO, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer or enduser equipment location. The connection between the Model 045CS VDM in the CO and theR-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The Model 045CS VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) through D6AM modular cables and 635B connecting blocks.Each pair of the D6AM modular cables provides one voice and one voice/data connection.

– One end of each of the D6AM modular cables connects to the TEL and LINE receptacleson the Model 045CS VDM. The other end of these cables connects to receptacles on a635B connecting block that, in turn, is connected to the CO MDF.

– Voice channels (from the TEL receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the CO voice switch.

– Voice/data channels (from the LINE receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the R-VDMover 2-wire unloaded loop (maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber LoopCarrier (SLC 96) system.





To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

LINE

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

B25FS-1MOD* VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1) TEL

M48D

D8AH258BFAdapter



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2


FIGURE 1-29. MSM to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-30. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G(131), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90-M G(109), G(E)

6 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G(144), G(H)

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Cabinet

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to an R-VDM via D4 andthe VDM cabinet can be configured as follows:

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. Each shelf provides four 50-pin data connectorsthat support six circuits each. Therefore, a fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and288 circuits requires 48 data interface cables.


Connections to the D4 RS-232 DSU-II Dataport, used for CO-LAN Foreign Serving Office(FSO) arrangements of the VDM and the node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7, may be made via aDB25 connection on the faceplate of the DSU-II Dataport plug-in unit or via directconnections to the backplane of the D4 channel bank.

A DSU-II Dataport plug-in supports one circuit with a female DB25 RS-232 connector.

A B25FS-1MOD cable is required to connect each 50-pin connector on the AWJ4 I/Odistribution board to a 258BF adapter. This adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks forRS-232 connections.

Use D8AHX cords to make the connection from the adapter to the DSU-II Dataport.

At the remote end, use D8ANX cords to make the connection from a DSU-II Dataport to ajack in a 258BF adapter.

Use a B25F 50-pin cable to connect the 258BF adapter to the VDM cabinet.

For each VDM circuit in a CO, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer or enduser equipment location. The connection between the VDM cabinet in the CO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO Main Distribution Frame(MDF) with an A25RX cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RX cables provides voice andvoice/data connections for 12 circuits.

– The connectorized end of the A25RX cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.






B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

D8ANX


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

258BFAdapter

B25FA25RX

258BFAdapter



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectors on the node sideand two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-30. MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-31. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Cabinet

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31



50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AHX 25-pin-M G(193), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8ANX 25-pin-M G(194), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________258BF adapter 50-pin-F G(155)

6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25F 50-pin 180-M G(100), G(F)

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180-F G(115), G(A)

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to an R-VDM via D4 andStand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports 18 circuits. Female DB25 RS-232 connectors areprovided for each circuit, requiring 18 data cables per shelf.





Use D8AHX cords to make the connection from the adapter to the D4 DSU-II Dataport.

At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the DSU-II Dataport to one of the DB25connectors at the back of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

For each VDM circuit in a CO, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer or enduser equipment location. The connection between the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf in the CO andthe R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) with an A25RXM cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RXM cablesprovides voice and voice/data connections for 12 circuits.

– The connectorized end of the A25RXM cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.






B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Stand-Alone

Shelf**

A25RXM

J125

J126

258BFAdapter



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.**Wire all circuits on J125 and only the first six circuits on J126. The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supportsa maximum of 18 circuits.

FIGURE 1-31. MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 1-32. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via D4 and VDM Stand-AloneShelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AHX 25-pin-M G(193), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G(166), G(AM)

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180-M G(167), G(A)

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MSM to R-VDM via D4 and Model 045CS VDM

The cabling for an MSM residing in a node cabinet, MPC15, or MPC7 to an R-VDM via D4 andthe Model 045CS VDM can be configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM supports one circuit. A female DB25 RS-232 connector is provided,requiring one data cable per 045CS VDM.





Use D8AHX cords to make the connection from the adapter to the D4 DSU-II Dataport.

At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the DSU-II Dataport to the DB25 connectorat the back of the Model 045CS VDM.

For each VDM circuit in a CO, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer or enduser equipment location. The connection between the Model 045CS VDM in the CO and theR-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is provided as follows:

– The Model 045CS VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO MainDistribution Frame (MDF) through D6AM modular cables and 635B connecting blocks.Each pair of the D6AM modular cables provides one voice and one voice/data connection.

– One end of each of the D6AM modular cables connects to the TEL and LINE receptacleson the Model 045CS VDM. The other end of these cables connects to receptacles on a635B connecting block that, in turn, is connected to the CO MDF.

– Voice channels (from the TEL receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the CO voice switch.

– Voice/data channels (from the LINE receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the R-VDMover 2-wire unloaded loop (maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber LoopCarrier (SLC 96) system.





To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS**

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

LINE

M25B-DSU

B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1258BFAdapter



MSM

AWJ4

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.**The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.

FIGURE 1-32. MSM to R-VDM via D4 and Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-33. Ordering Information: MSM to R-VDM via D4 and Model 045CS VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AHX 25-pin-M G(193), G(G)

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G(166), G(AM)

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G(144), G(H)

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504,

and VDM-SAM504

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for each of the interface modules that areinstalled in the Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexers (SAMs). Each cabling configurationrepresents the required connections between the module and other equipment, such as terminals,modems, hosts, multiplexers, and so forth.

SAMs are multiplexers that provide switched asynchronous and transparent synchronous*services as configurable options for independently administered ports. There are five versions:SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504.

Overview

The cabling for the SAMs is determined by their supported interface modules and the physicalcharacteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

In SAMs, the following modules can be configured for asynchronous devices:

AMDA (Access Module for Dedicated Applications) is an interface module in the SAM8.

TERM8 is an interface module in the SAM16.

TERM32 is an interface module in the SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504.

The following figure illustrates the association of the interface modules to the appropriate cabinet.

________________

* For information about synchronous connections supported by the TERM32, see Chapter 2 of this guide.


Asynchronous Connections________________SAM8

AMDA

SAM16

TERM8

SAM64, SAM504,VDM-SAM504

TERM32

FIGURE 1-33. Interface Modules in SAMs


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504 must be shielded to meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagneticinterference (EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration,unshielded cables can be used after the first 25 feet.


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directly to Terminal or Host

NOTE: Cables for the SAM16 may differ; contact your AT&T Account Representative formore information.

The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 to terminals or hosts can be configured asfollows:

The cabling for the SAM8 or the SAM16 begins at the rear panel. The SAM8 AMDA and theSAM16 TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board are equipped with eight, RS-232-C connectors (one perport) with data communications equipment (DCE) interfaces.

The connection for each port can be made in one of the following ways:

— using RS-232-C cables

Use an M25A cable if the terminal or host has a male connector.

Use an M25B cable if the terminal or host has a female connector.

— using modular cables

Connect a D8AH cable to a port at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.

An optional method is to use a D8AH-M adapter and a D8W cable.

Plug the other end of the D8W cord into the modular socket of either a D8AH-F orD8AH-M adapter, depending on the gender of the terminal or host connector. UseD8AH-F if the terminal or host connector is male and use D8AH-M if the terminal orhost connector is female.

Plug the D8AH adapter into the terminal or host connector.




SAM8AM

DA

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

To Terminals

or Host

D8AH

D8AH-MAdapter

D8W D8AH-FAdapter

D8AH-MAdapter

M25B

M25A

FIGURE 1-34. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directly to Terminal or Host

TABLE 1-34. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directlyto Terminal or Host


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G-131, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-M adapter 25-pin-M G-139

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-F adapter 25-pin-F G-147

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to Terminal or Host viaModem or FOM


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 to terminals or host via a modem or FOMcan be configured as follows:

The cabling for the SAM8 or SAM16 begins at the rear panel. The SAM8 AMDA or SAM16TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board is equipped with eight RS-232-C connectors (one per port).

The connection for each port can be made in one of the following ways:

— using RS-232-C cables

An M25A cable connects to the port at the rear of the SAM8.

The other end of the M25A cable connects to the DCE to DCE adapter.

The DCE to DCE adapter connects to the modem or FOM.

— using modular cables

Connect a D8AH cable to the port at the rear of the SAM8.

An alternate method is to connect a D8W modular cord to the modular socket of aD8AH-M adapter.

Plug the other end of the D8W modular cord into the modular socket of a D8AH-Fadapter.




To Modems or FOMs

Modems or FOMs at the

other end

M25ATo Terminals or Host Computers


M25B

D8AH

D8AH-MAdapter

D8W D8AH-FAdapter

DCE to DCE

Adapter

M25ASAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

FIGURE 1-35. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to Terminal or Host viaModem or FOM


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 1-35. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) toTerminal or Host via Modem or FOM


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G-131, G-G


mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-M adapter 25-pin-M G-139

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-F adapter 25-pin-F G-147

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________DCE to DCE adapter 25-pin-M G-208

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 to an R-VDM via a VDM cabinet can beconfigured as follows:

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. For this application, an ED2P497, G-7(Model 10F) shelf is required. It provides twenty-four DB25 female connectors, one per datachannel. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf, see Appendix D.

The SAM8 provides 8 circuits via eight female DB25 connectors located on the AMDA panelon the rear of the unit.

The SAM16 provides 16 circuits via eight female DB25 connectors located on the twoTERM8 CPY1 I/O boards on the rear of the unit.

A DCE to DCE adapter is required to connect the SAM8 or SAM16 to a device with a DCEinterface.

NOTE: When connecting a SAM8 or SAM16 to a VDM cabinet, an ED2P497, G-7(Model 10F) shelf is required in the VDM cabinet.

An M25A cable connects to a port at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.


The DCE to DCE adapter connects to the VDM cabinet.

NOTE: The DCE to DCE adapter can be attached at the SAM8 or SAM16 or at the VDMcabinet end of the configuration.


— The VDM voice and voice/data circuits are connected to the CO Main Distribution Frame(MDF) with an A25RXM cable. Each of the 50-pin A25RXM cables provides voice andvoice/data connections for 12 circuits.






SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling R-VDMs in Single Line Applications




SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

Note 1: This configuration requires an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) VDM shelf in the VDM cabinet.This shelf provides 24 RS-232-C female DB25 connections.

FIGURE 1-36. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-36. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________DCE to DCE adapter 25-pin-M G-208


single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board to an R-VDM via aVDM Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:



The SAM16 provides 16 circuits via eight DB25 RS-232-C connectors located on twoTERM8s on the rear of the units.

An M25A cable connects to the port at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.


The DCE to DCE adapter connects to the Stand-Alone Shelf.

NOTE: The DCE to DCE adapter can be attached at the SAM8 or SAM16, or at the Stand-Alone Shelf end of the configuration.












SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126

Note 1: Wire all circuits on J125 and only the first six circuits on J126. The VDM Stand-Alone Shelfsupports a maximum of 18 circuits.

FIGURE 1-37. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-AloneShelf


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 1-37. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P



single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via Model 045CSVDM


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board to an R-VDM via aModel 045CS VDM can be configured as follows:



The SAM16 provides 8 circuits via eight female DB25 connectors located on two TERM8s onthe rear of the unit.

An M25A cable connects to the port at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.


The DCE to DCE adapter connects to the Model 045CS VDM.

NOTE: The DCE to DCE adapter can be attached at the SAM8 or SAM16, or at the Model045CS VDM end of the configuration.












M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

LINE

TEL

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

Note 1: The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.

FIGURE 1-38. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-38. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P



6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly to Terminal or Host

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module directly to terminals or host can beconfigured as follows:

Cabling originates at the distribution panel of the SAM64 and SAM504. TERM32 modulesreside in the SAM64 and SAM504. An I/O distribution panel equipped with 50-pinconnectors provides cable connections.

The TERM32 requires B25FS-1MOD shielded cable for the first 25 feet.


There are eleven 50-pin connectors on the SAM64 I/O distribution panel that link TERM32modules to the 25-pair cables.

There are eighty-four 50-pin connectors on the SAM504 I/O distribution panel that linkTERM32 modules to the 25-pair cables.

Although B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the initial 25 feet from the TERM32module, a B25A unshielded cable can be used at the customer’s option after the first 25 feet.

A B25FS-1MOD 25-pair cable is connected to one of the 50-pin connectors associated withthe TERM32 module.

One of three methods may be used to make direct connections to terminals or hosts:

— An M48EX cable can be connected to the B25FS-1MOD cable providing six 25-pinconnections.

NOTE: The M48EX cable does not provide for the DSR lead. Use the 258AF, 258BF, or258CF adapter when the connecting terminal or host requires the DSR signal.

— A 258AF or 258BF adapter can be connected to the B25FS-1MOD cable to provide six8-wire modular jacks.

— A 258CF adapter can be connected to a B25FS-1MOD cable to provide six 8-wiremodular jacks.

NOTE: When connecting a 3B2 EPORTS, use only the 258CF adapter. The TERM32board may blow a fuse if a 258AF or 258BF adapter is used in this configuration.

The connection from the 258CF adapter to the 3B2 EPORTS is made with a D8AA cable.

The connection from the 258BF adapter to the terminal depends on the gender of the terminalor host connector.

— Use D8AG cables for terminals or hosts with male connectors.

— Use D8AN cables for terminals or hosts with female connectors.


Asynchronous Connections________________As an alternative cabling method, use D8W modular cable from the 258BF adapter to aD8AG-F adapter for a terminal or host with a male connector or a D8AN-M adapter for aterminal or host with a female connector.


SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

M48EX


D8AG

D8AN

D8W

To Terminals

or Host

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapterTE

RM

32

258CFAdapter

D8AA

EPO

RTS AT&T

3B2 Host


FIGURE 1-39. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly to Terminal or Host


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 1-39. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly toTerminal or Host


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




6 mod sockets_ ____________________________________________________________________________258CF adapter 50-pin-F G-210

6 mod sockets_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG 25-pin-F G-130, G-G



mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AA 8-pin-M G-134, G-G

(rev wiring)_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AG-F adapter 25-pin-F G-138


mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48EX 50-pin 90°-F G-168, G-E

6 25-pin-F, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal or Host via 110Patch Panel

With use of the indicated cables, asynchronous connections from the SAM64 and SAM504 arecompatible with standard SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels.

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to terminals or hosts via a 110 patchpanel can be configured as follows:

The TERM32 modules are accessed via 50-pin connectors located on the rear panel of theSAM64 and on the distribution panel of the SAM504. Each 50-pin connector supports six 8-wire ports.


The TERM32 module requires M42P or M30P shielded cable for the first 25 feet.

— The M42P cable provides flow control signaling and is not compatible with SYSTIMAXPDS.

— The M42P or M30P cables may be terminated directly to the 110 patch panel, or they maybe extended with B25A or A25U cables as required.

For 110 patch panels that require field termination of cables, use B25FS-1MOD cable fromthe SAM64 or SAM504 connected to an A25R-SE single-ended cable.

Depending on the type of 110 patch panel used and the specific distribution method required,connections from the patch panel to the terminating equipment may be made with 4-pair "D"wire to 103A connecting blocks, or they may be made with a B25A cable to a 258A or a 258Badapter.

In either case, the final connection to the terminating equipment will be made with modularcables.






SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________

258Aor

258BAdapter

B25A

4-Pair "D" wire

D8AG

D8AN

D8W

To Terminals

or HostComputers

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter

SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32

110 Patch Panel

M42P or M30P

A25U

B25A

B25FS-1MOD* A25R-SE

M42P or M30P

(See Note 1)

103AConnecting

Block(or

equivalent)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: 110 patch panels are available with different interconnects. Before selecting cables, determine whichinterconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 1-40. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal or Hostvia 110 Patch Panel


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-40. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminalor Host via 110 Patch Panel


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25R-SE 50-pin 90°-F G-103, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________M42P 50-pin 180°-M G-177, G-AR

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M30P 50-pin 180°-M G-176, G-AR

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90°-M G-114, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________258A adapter 50-pin-M G-153







mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal or Host via Modemor FOM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to terminals or hosts via a modem orFOM can be configured as follows:

The TERM32 modules are accessed via 50-pin connectors located on the rear panel of theSAM64 and on the distribution panel of the SAM504. Each 50-pin connector supports six 8-wire ports.

The TERM32 requires B25FS-1MOD shielded cable for the first 25 feet.


There are eleven 50-pin connectors on the SAM64 I/O distribution panel that link TERM32modules to the 25-pair cables.

There are eighty-four 50-pin connectors on the SAM504 I/O distribution panel that linkTERM32 modules to the 25-pair cables.

Although B25FS-1MOD shielded cable is required for the initial 25 feet, a B25A unshieldedcable can be used at the customer’s option after the first 25 feet.

The terminating end of the B25FS-1MOD cable may be connected to an M48D cableassembly that provides six male ends that connect directly to modems or multiplexers, or itmay be connected to a 258AF or 258BF adapter that provides six 8-pin modular jacks.

If the 258AF or 258BF adapter is used, the connection from the adapter to the modem ormultiplexer should be made with a D8AH cable.

As an alternative to the D8AH cable, a D8W modular cable may be used with an adapter toprovide the same connection.

— Use a D8AH-F adapter for a modem or multiplexer with a male connector.

— Use a D8AH-M adapter for a modem or multiplexer with a female connector.

Terminal and host connections are made at the terminating modems and multiplexers usingM25A and M25B cables as required. The cable selected depends on the gender of the modemor multiplexer.


Direct Connection

Another option is to use an B25FS-1MOD cable (B25F for a SAM504) from the SAM64 orSAM504 cabinet plugged directly into a 50-pin connector on a FOM at the other end. CanogaData Systems Model CDS372 and Optical Data Systems Model ODS310 are two FOM vendorsthat provide 50-pin connectors.



SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32


M48D

To Modems or FOMs

D8AH

D8W

To Modems or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD*

258AFor

258BFAdapter

D8AH-FAdapter

D8AH-MAdapter

B25FS-1MOD*



Computers

M25A

M25B


FIGURE 1-41. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal or Hostvia Modem or FOM


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 1-41. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminalor Host via Modem or FOM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F






mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-F adapter 25-pin-F G-147

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH-M adapter 25-pin-M G-139

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-F G-109, G-E

6 x 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a VDM cabinet canbe configured as follows:

The TERM32 provides 32 data circuits. On the SAM64, the data circuits are accessed viaeleven 50-pin connectors on the rear panel. On the SAM504, the data circuits are accessed viaeighty-four 50-pin connectors on the distribution panel. Each of these connectors provides for6 data circuits.

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. Each shelf provides four 50-pin connectors thatsupport 6 circuits each. A fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and 288 circuitsrequires 48 data interface cables. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf, seeAppendix D.

Connect a SAM-VDM adapter to the connector at the rear of the SAM64 or SAM504.

CAUTION: The SAM-VDM adapter must be used or premature TERM32 fuse failure mayresult. The adapter must be removed for synchronous operation. Adapters arenot required when using Model 045C Series 2 VDMs.

Connect a B25FSX-1MOD cable to the 50-pin connector on the adapter.

The other end of this cable connects to a 50-pin connector on the VDM shelf backplane.












SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32

2 Wire Unloaded Loop (Max. 18,000 Ft.)

To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

B25FSX-1MODSAM - VDM

Adapter

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)

Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the Datakit II VCS side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 1-42. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-42. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaVDM Cabinet


SAM-VDM adapter 50-pin-M G-201

50-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FSX-1MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-204, G-C

50-pin 180°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-AloneShelf

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a VDM Stand-AloneShelf is configured as follows:



A B25FS-1MOD cable connects the SAM64 to a 258BF adapter or M48D cable.

Connect a 258BF adapter to the B25FS-1MOD cable. It provides six 8-pin modular jacks forRS-232-C connections. Use D8AH cords to complete the connections from the 258BF adapterto the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

Alternatively, an M48D cable can connect to the B25FS-1MOD cable that splits the 25-paircable into six RS-232-C cables with DB25 male connectors. Each leg of the M48D cable canconnect directly to one of the DB25 connectors on the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf backplane.

NOTE: A SAM-VDM adapter is not required when connecting SAM64 or SAM504 to aVDM Stand-Alone Shelf or a Model 045CS VDM.












B25FS-1MOD*


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126

M48D

D8AH258BFAdapter

SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32


FIGURE 1-43. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-AloneShelf


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 1-43. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaVDM Stand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-M G-109, G-E

6 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G-131, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a Model 045CSVDM can be configured as follows:



A B25FS-1MOD cable connects the SAM64 or SAM504 50-pin connector to a 258BFadapter or M48D cable.

A 258BF adapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232-C connections. Use oneD8AH cord to complete each connection from the 258BF adapter to one Model 045CS VDM.

Alternatively, an M48D cable splits the 25-pair cable into six RS-232-C cables with DB25male connectors. Each leg of an M48D cable can connect directly to the DB25 connector atthe back of a Model 045CS VDM.

NOTE: A SAM-VDM adapter is not required when connecting SAM64 or SAM504 to aVDM Stand-Alone Shelf or Model 045CS VDM.












SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32 B25FS-1MOD*


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

LINE

TEL

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

M48D

D8AH258BFAdapter


FIGURE 1-44. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-44. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaModel 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AH 25-pin-M G(131), G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48D 50-pin 90°-F G-109, G-E


6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a D4 RS-232-CDSU-II data port and a VDM cabinet can be configured as follows:

A VDM cabinet can have up to 12 shelves. Each shelf provides four 50-pin connectors thatsupport 6 circuits each. A fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and 288 circuitsrequires 48 data interface cables. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf, seeAppendix D.


Connections to the D4 RS-232-C DSU-II data port, used for CO-LAN Foreign Serving Office(FSO) arrangements of the VDM and the Datakit II VCS, may be made via a DB25connection on the faceplate of the DSU-II data port plug-in unit or via direct connections tothe backplane of the D4 channel bank.


The B25FS-1MOD cable from the SAM64 or SAM504 plugs into a 258BF adapter. Thisadapter provides six 8-pin modular jacks for RS-232-C connections.


At the remote end, use D8ANX cords to make the connection from a D4 DSU-II data port to ajack in a 258BF adapter.

Use a B25F 25-pair cable to connect the 258BF adapter to the VDM cabinet.







Asynchronous Connections________________— For more information about the R-VDM connection, see the appropriate subsection in

Appendix C that matches your application:







SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32 B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

D8ANX


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

258BFAdapter

B25FA25RX

258BFAdapter


FIGURE 1-45. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Cabinet


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-45. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8ANX 25-pin-M G-194, G-G

mod plug_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25F 50-pin 180°-M G-100, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via D4 RS-232-CDSU-II data port and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:







At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the D4 DSU-II data port to one DB25connector on the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.














SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32 B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

A25RXM

258BFAdapter

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126


FIGURE 1-46. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Stand-Alone Shelf


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-46. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and Stand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F






single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a D4 RS-232-CDSU-II data port and a Model 045CS VDM can be configured as follows:







At the remote end, an M25B-DSU cable connects the D4 DSU-II data port to the Model045CS VDM.







Asynchronous Connections________________— For more information about the R-VDM connection, see the appropriate subsection in








SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

TEL

M25B-DSU

B25FS-1MOD* D8AHX

D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIT1258BFAdapter


FIGURE 1-47. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Model 045CS VDM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-47. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F






6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

The cabling from a VDM-SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM can be configured as follows:

A VDM-SAM504 cabinet combines the functions of the SAM504 and a VDM cabinet. Thecabling between the SAM504 TERM32 module and the VDM in the VDM cabinet is internalto the VDM-SAM504 cabinet. For an illustration of the VDM-SAM504, see Appendix D.

For each VDM circuit in a central office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the VDM-SAM504cabinet in the CO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is providedas follows:













To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

A25RXSAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32

FIGURE 1-48. From VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

TABLE 1-48. Ordering Information: From VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



ISN Concentrators________________ISN Concentrators

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for each of the interface modules that areinstalled in ISN Concentrators. Each cabling configuration represents the required connectionsbetween the module and other interfaces.

Overview

The cabling for the ISN Concentrators is determined by their supported interface modules and thephysical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

There are two types of ISN Concentrators.

fiber concentrators

wire remote concentrators

Each fiber concentrator supports a maximum of four AIM modules. Each wire remoteconcentrator supports a maximum of five AIM modules.

Interface Modules

ISN concentrators are connected to the node via optical fiber (local) or wire trunk (remote) andhave interface slots for Asynchronous Interface Modules (AIMs).

In ISN Concentrators, asynchronous interfaces include the following module:

MF-AIM (Multi-function Asynchronous Interface Module) is an 8-port asynchronousmodule, for placement in a ISN Concentrator, that supports setting the size of data windows.


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the ISN Concentrator must be shielded to meetFederal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements.If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after thefirst 25 feet.


Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host with Software FlowControl

The cabling configuration from the MF-AIM board to terminals or hosts with software flowcontrol is explained below.

Connect an M56A cable to the 78-pin connector at the back of the AIM. The other end of thiscable has one 50-pin connector.

Connect an M48C cable to the 50-pin connector on the M56A cable. This cable splits the 25-pair main cable into eight RS-232-C legs with 25-pin female connectors.

Use an M25A (female-to-male) or an M25B (male-to-male) cable to connect to a terminal orhost with software (XON/XOFF) flow control.



ISN Concentrators________________

Local or RemoteConcentrator M

F-AI

M M56A M48C

M25A

M25B

To Terminalsor Host

Computers

FIGURE 1-49. From MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host with SoftwareFlow Control

TABLE 1-49. Ordering Information: From MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host withSoftware Flow Control

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M56A 78-pin 90°-M Comcode: 105373138

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48C 50-pin 90°-M Comcode: 104109285

8 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host with Hardware EIA FlowControl

Only the MF-AIM supports EIA flow control. The configuration for this cabling is as follows:

Connect an M72B cable to the 78-pin connector at the back of the AIM. This cable splits intotwo 25-pair cables with 50-pin connectors.

Connect one M40B cable to each 50-pin connector of the M72B cable. This cable splits the25-pair main cable into four RS-232-C cables with 25-pin female connectors.

Use an M25A (female-to-male) or M25B (male-to-male) cable to extend each RS-232-C legof the M40B cable to an asynchronous device requiring EIA (RTS/CTS) flow control.





F-AI

M M72B

M25A

M25B

To Terminalsor Host

Computers

M40B

FIGURE 1-50. From MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host with HardwareEIA Flow Control

TABLE 1-50. Ordering Information: From MF-AIM Directly to Terminal or Host withHardware EIA Flow Control

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M72B 78-pin 90°-M Comcode: 105373146

2 50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M40B 50-pin 90°-M Comcode: 104109277

4 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Asynchronous Connections________________Cabling from MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM

The cabling from an MF-AIM to a terminal or host via a modem or FOM has one configurationfor software flow control:

An M56A cable plugs into the 78-pin connector at the rear of the MF-AIM. The other end ofthis cable provides a 50-pin female connector.

The 50-pin connector on the M56A cable plugs into an M48F adapter cord. The M48F cableconverts the 25-pair cable into eight RS-232-C cable legs, one for each terminal port. Eachcable leg is four feet long.

Each leg of the M48F or M40B adapter has a 25-pin EIA RS-232-C male connector; these canconnect directly to the modem or FOM, or can be extended with an M25A cable.

Use an M25A (female-to-male) or an M25B (male-to-male) cable to connect from the modemor FOM to a terminal or host.





F-AI

M M56A M48F M25A To Modemsor FOMs

Switched or Private LineModems orFOMs at the

other end

M25A

M25B

To Terminals orHost Computers

FIGURE 1-51. From MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via Modem or FOM


Asynchronous Connections________________TABLE 1-51. Ordering Information: From MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via Modem orFOM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M56A 78-pin 90°-M Comcode: 105373138

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M48F 50-pin 90°-M Comcode: 104258157

8 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



ISN Concentrators________________Cabling from MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel

With use of the indicated cables, asynchronous connections from the MF-AIM are compatiblewith standard SYSTIMAX PDS 110 patch panels. Note that asynchronous devices with EIA(RTS/CTS) flow control require 4-pair patch cords that are not SYSTIMAX PDS compatible.

The cabling configuration from the MF-AIM to a terminal or host via a 110 patch panel is asfollows:

One end of an M72B cable plugs into a 78-pin connector at the rear of the ISN Concentratorcabinet. This cable splits into two 25-pair cables with 50-pin female connectors.

One A25D 25-pair cable plugs into each 50-pin connector at the end of the M72B cable. Theother (terminating) end of the A25D cable connects to the 110 patch panel.

A 110 patch panel can accept up to 36 25-pair cables. Each 25-pair cable supports six 8-wireinterface ports.

Depending on the type of 110 patch panel used and the specific distribution method required,connections from the patch panel to the terminating equipment may be made with 4-pair "D"wire to 103A connecting blocks or they may be made with a B25A cable to a 258A or 258Badapter.

In either case, the final connection to the terminating equipment will be made with modularcables.








F-AI

M M72B A25D 110 PatchPanel*

103AConnecting

Block(or

Equivalent)

258Aor

258BAdapter

4-Pair "D" Wire

B25A

D8W

D8AG

D8AN

D8AG-FAdapter

D8AN-MAdapter

ToTerminalsor Hosts

* 110 patch panels are available with different interconnects.Before selecting cables, determine which interconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 1-52. From MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via 110 Patch Panel


ISN Concentrators________________TABLE 1-52. Ordering Information: From MF-AIM to Terminal or Host via 110 PatchPanel


M72B 78-pin 90°-M Comcode: 105373146

2 50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25D male-male See Appendix B

various lengths_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F

50-pin 90°-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________258A adapter 50-pin-M G-153







mod socket, null modem wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Synchronous Connections


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15 2-5

Overview 2-5

Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to:• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device 2-11• Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel 2-15• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU,

or FOM 2-19• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 2-23• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 2-26• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 2-29• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet 2-32• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 2-36• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM 2-40

Cabling from TSM-T1 to:• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device 2-44

SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, andVDM-SAM504 2-46

Overview 2-46

Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to:• Terminal, Host, or Cluster Controller 2-48• Terminal, Host, or Cluster Controller via Modem or FOM 2-50• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 2-52• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 2-55• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 2-58


________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to:

• Terminal, Host, or Cluster Controller 2-61• Terminal, Host, or Cluster Controller via Modem or FOM 2-64• R-VDM via VDM Cabinet 2-67• R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 2-70• R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM 2-73• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet 2-77• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf 2-81• R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM 2-85

Cabling from VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to:• R-VDM 2-89

BNS-1000 2-91

Overview 2-91

Cabling from TSM8 or SDLC8 to:• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device 2-95• Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel 2-98• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU,

or FOM 2-101


BNS-2000 2-105

Overview 2-105

Cabling from TSM8 to:• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device 2-109• Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel 2-112• Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU,

or FOM 2-115



________________Synchronous Connections

This chapter explains how to cable synchronous connections via the:

Datakit II VCS node

7-slot Multipurpose Concentrator (MPC7)

15-slot Multipurpose Concentrator (MPC15)

BNS-1000 node

BNS-2000 node

Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexers (SAMs)


To find cabling information for specific synchronous applications, refer to this chapter’s table ofcontents. This table of contents has been designed as an easy reference to find the desiredconfiguration and is to be used in the following manner:

This chapter’s table of contents is divided into three major headings that have been defined atthe cabinet level. First, identify the heading that addresses the particular cabinet from whichcabling will originate. The major cabinet level headings are as follows:

— Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15

— BNS-1000 node

— BNS-2000 node

— SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504

NOTE: BNS-1000 nodes do not support the MPC15, SAM504, VDM-SAM504, and allVDMs.

Then, select the synchronous interface module from which the cabling will originate:

— Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15 use SYNC8, TSM8, TSM-T1, and SDLC8

— BNS-1000 node uses TSM8, TSM-T1, and SDLC8

— BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf uses TSM-8 and TSM-T1

— SAM8 uses AMDA


Synchronous Connections________________— SAM16 uses TERM8

— SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504 use TERM32

Next, identify the device at the terminating end of the connection (e.g., terminal, hostcomputer, R-VDM, and so forth).

Finally, select the path of the connection (e.g., directly wired via modem, Fiber OpticMultiplexer (FOM), 110 patch panel, D4 channel bank, VDM cabinet, VDM Stand-AloneShelf, and so forth).




Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the synchronous interface modulesinstalled in the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15. The modules include the SYNC8,TSM8, TSM-T1, and SDLC8. Each cabling configuration represents the required connectionsbetween the module and other equipment associated with the communications path, such asterminals, modems, hosts, patch panels, multiplexers, and so forth.

Overview

The cabling for Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15 is determined by their supportedinterface modules and the physical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

The synchronous interface modules supported by the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15are listed below:

SYNC8 (Synchronous Module 8-port) is an 8-port interface module for switched binarysynchronous services for devices operating under the 3270 Bisync protocols. The SYNC8 isalso known as Binary Synchronous Communication 3270 (BSC3270) Module.

TSM8 (Transparent Synchronous Module 8-port) is an 8-port interface module thatprovides non-switched synchronous or asynchronous* connections.

SDLC8 (Synchronous Data Link Control 8-port) is an 8-port interface module forinterfacing synchronous devices operating under SDLC protocol.

TSM-T1 (Transparent Synchronous Module –T1) is an 8-port interface module forinterfacing synchronous devices operating under SDLC protocol up to an aggregate data rateof 1.536 Mbps.

________________

* For information about asynchronous connections supported by the TSM8, see Chapter 1 of this guide.


Synchronous Connections________________The SYNC8, TSM8, and SDLC8 modules can be cabled for low-speed connections up to 19.2Kbps or for medium-speed connections from 48 to 64 Kbps, depending on the I/O board used.

Low-speed connections use the RS-232-C interfaces on the I/O boards.

Medium-speed connections use the CCITT V.35 interface available on certain I/O boards forall three modules. The SYNC8, TSM8, and SDLC8 modules support speeds up to 64 Kbpsvia the V.35 interface.

Cabling for the SYNC8, TSM8, and SDLC8 can be somewhat confusing due to the number offeature options provided by different I/O boards. An overview of the various feature options ofthese particular synchronous interface modules are addressed in the following sections.

The following figure illustrates the association of the interface modules to their appropriatecabinets.

Datakit II VCSModular Cabinet,

MPC7 and MPC15

TSM8

SDLC8

SYNC8

TSM-T1

FIGURE 2-1. Interface Modules in Cabinets

For illustrations of the rear view of the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15, seeDatakit II VCS Node, MPC7, and MPC15 in Chapter 1.

Physical Characteristics

The SYNC8 module consists of an MC1D089A1 main circuit pack and uses one of four availableI/O boards.

The TSM8 module consists of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack and one of six available I/Oboards.


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________The SDLC8 module consists of an MC1D116A1 main circuit pack and uses the same I/O boardsas the TSM8.

The TSM-T1 module consists of an MC1D149A1 main circuit pack with an AWJ24 I/O board.

By selecting the appropriate I/O board, these modules can be configured as DCE or DTE, usingstandard signaling or NRZI encoding. The following options are available:

An AWJ5 I/O board offers three DCE RS-232-C ports, for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps, and one DTE V.35 port, for a line operating at a speed up to 64 Kbps. The I/O boardhas two 50-pin connectors. The top 50-pin connector handles three DCE ports, while thebottom connector handles one V.35 port.

An AWJ6 I/O board offers three DTE RS-232-C connections, for lines operating at speeds upto 19.2 Kbps, and one DTE V.35 connection, for a line operating at a speed up to 64 Kbps.The I/O board has two 50-pin connectors. The top 50-pin connector handles three DTE ports,while the bottom connector handles one V.35 port.

An AWJ7 I/O board offers eight DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and has two 50-pin connectors; each connectorhandles four DTE ports.

NOTE: The AWJ7 I/O board cannot be used with the SYNC8 module.

An AWJ8 I/O board offers eight DCE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and has two 50-pin connectors; each connectorhandles four DCE ports.

NOTE: The AWJ8 I/O board cannot be used with the SYNC8 module.

An AWJ17 I/O board offers eight DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to19.2 Kbps. The I/O board has two 50-pin connectors; each connector handles four DTE ports.

An AWJ18 I/O board offers eight DCE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to19.2 Kbps. The I/O board has two 50-pin connectors; each connector handles four DCE ports.

The following figure illustrates the SYNC8 I/O boards and their various configurations.


Synchronous Connections________________MC1D089A1 (SYNC8)

AWJ5 AWJ6 AWJ17 AWJ18

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

RS-232

I/OBoard

RS-232

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DCE(3)

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DTE(3) DTE(4) DTE(4) DCE(4) DCE(4)

FIGURE 2-2. SYNC8 I/O Board Interfaces

The following table illustrates the I/O boards and the number of ports provided by the SYNC8interface module.

TABLE 2-1. Number of Ports Provided by SYNC8 I/O Board Interfaces

_ _________________________________________________________________________Number of Ports Provided of Each Interface Type_ _______________________________________________________________

RS-232-C_ __________________________________________________V.35

Without NRZI Option With NRZI Option_ _______________________________________________________________I/O Board

DTE DTE DCE DTE DCE_ __________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ5 1 — 3 — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ6 1 3 — — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ17 — 8 — — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ18 — — 8 — —_ _________________________________________________________________________

The following figure illustrates the TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O boards and their variousconfigurations.


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________MC1D088A1 (TSM8) or MC1D116A1 (SDLC8)

AWJ5 AWJ6 AWJ7 AWJ8 AWJ17 AWJ18

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232

I/OBoard

RS-232

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DCE(3)

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DTE(3) DTE(4) DTE(4) DCE(4) DCE(4) DTE(4) DTE(4) DCE(4) DCE(4)

FIGURE 2-3. TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O Board Interfaces

The following table illustrates the I/O boards and the number of ports provided by the TSM8 andSDLC8 interface modules.

TABLE 2-2. Number of Ports Provided by TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O Board Interfaces


RS-232-C_ __________________________________________________V.35


DTE DTE DCE DTE DCE_ __________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ5 1 — 3 — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ6 1 3 — — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ7 — — — 8 —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ8 — — — — 8_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ17 — 8 — — —_ _________________________________________________________________________AWJ18 — — 8 — —_ _________________________________________________________________________


Synchronous Connections________________Shielding Requirements for Cabling

The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, and MPC15 mustbe shielded to meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference(EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cablesmay be used after the first 25 feet.


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller,or V.35 DTE Device

The cabling for the SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 modules differs only in the type of interfacemodule (main circuit pack) used within the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15.

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DTE device can be directlyconnected, as follows:

The SYNC8 module consists of an MC1D089A1 main circuit pack with an associated I/Oboard as follows:

— AWJ5 (three RS-232-C DCE or one V.35 DTE)

— AWJ6 (three RS-232-C DTE or one V.35 DTE)

— AWJ17 (eight RS-232-C DTE)

— AWJ18 (eight RS-232-C DCE)

The TSM8 module consists of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack with an associated I/Oboard as follows:



— AWJ7 (eight RS-232-C DTE, NRZI)

— AWJ8 (eight RS-232-C DCE, NRZI)



The SDLC8 module consists of an MC1D116A1 main circuit pack with an associated I/Oboard as follows:







For RS-232-C connections, connect a B25FS-1MOD cable to the 50-pin connectors on the I/Oboard.


Synchronous Connections________________NOTE: If the AWJ5 or AWJ6 is being used, only Port J1 may be used for RS-232-C

connections.

Connect a SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD as required.These cables are identical except for the gender of the 25-pin connectors.

Each of the 25-pin connectors on the SYNC4 cable may be connected directly to the enddevice, or they may be extended using M25A and M25B cables.

NOTE: If the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/O boards are used, a modem eliminator/driverwill be required.

For V.35 connections, a C25AS-MOD cable is connected to Port J2 of the AWJ5 or AWJ6I/O board.

A modem eliminator/driver must then be used to connect directly to a V.35 DTE device.

NOTE: On the AWJ5 and AWJ6 I/O board, Port J2 may be used for V.35 or Port J1 may beused for RS-232-C, however; both ports cannot be used at the same time.



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________

Datakit II VCS,MPC7, or MPC15

To Host, Cluster Controllers, or other

DTE devices

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8, S

YNC

8, o

r SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

(See Note 1)

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

C25AS-MOD

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25BModem

Eliminator/ Driver

(See Note 2)

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 2)

To V.35DTE Device

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The SYNC8 module cannot be used with the AWJ7 or AWJ8 I/O boards.Note 2: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/Oboards.

FIGURE 2-4. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller,or V.35 DTE Device


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-3. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 Directly to Host,Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-F 50-pin 90°-F G-161, G-R

4 25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-M 50-pin 90°-F G-160, G-R

4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25AS-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-202, G-C

V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTEDevice via 110 Patch Panel


Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DTE device can be connected toDatakit II VCS via a 110 patch panel, as follows:




















Attach a B25FS-1MOD cable to the appropriate 50-pin connector on the I/O board at the rearof the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15.

The other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable connects to the 110 patch panel.


Synchronous Connections________________A SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable, which splits into four RS-232-C legs, connects to the patchpanel. The 50-pin connector side of the SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable, ifnecessary.

The SYNC4 cables may be connected directly to hosts, cluster controllers, or other DTEdevices. M25A or M25B cables may be used to extend the RS-232-C legs of the SYNC4cables, if necessary.

If RS-232-C I/O ports are wired directly from the patch panel via 6-pair "D" wire, an M25Bcable can be used to connect to the DTE device.





B25FS-1MOD**

TSM

8, S

YNC

8, o

r SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

(See Note 3)

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

J1

J2

110 Patch Panel

NC*


DTE devices

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 2)

RS-232-CIO

SYNC4-F

M25B

SYNC4-M

M25A

M25B

(See Note 1)

6-Pair "D" wire

B25A

*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 2: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/Oboards.Note 3: The SYNC8 module cannot be used with the AWJ7 or AWJ8 I/O boards.

FIGURE 2-5. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTEDevice via 110 Patch Panel


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-4. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host, ClusterController, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM


Using one of the DTE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DCE device (or other equipmentwith a DCE interface) can be connected to the node by a direct connection, as follows:















Attach a B25FS-1MOD shielded cable to the appropriate 50-pin connectors on the I/O boardat the rear of the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15.

A SYNC4 cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable to provide four RS-232-C connections.

— Selection of the proper SYNC4 cable depends on the gender of the RS-232-C connectoron the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM.

— The SYNC4-M cable provides four male connections.

— The SYNC4-F cable provides four female connections.


Synchronous Connections________________The SYNC4 cable then connects directly to the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM. An M25A orM25B cable may be used to extend the RS-232 connections, if necessary.

NOTE: A subrate DSU is one with a speed of 19.2 Kbps or lower.

At the remote end modem, subrate DSU, or FOM, the final connection to a host, clustercontroller, or other DTE device will be made using an M25A or M25B cable, as required.


The other end of the C25AS-MOD cable is then connected to a V.35 modem or DSU.

At the remote end modem or DSU, the final connection to a V.35 DTE device is made with aV.35 or V.35-MM cable. Selection of the proper terminating cable will depend on the genderof the V.35 connectors on the modem or DSU and the end device.





(See Note 1)

B25FS-1MOD**

TSM

8, S

YNC

8, o

r SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

C25AS-MOD To V.35 Modemor DSU

J1

J2


To Modems, DSUs, or FOMs


To Host, Cluster Controllers, and other

DTE Devices

M25A

M25B

NC*

NC*

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25B

V.35 Modem or DSU at other end

To V.35 DTE Devices

V.35

V.35-MM


*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The SYNC8 module cannot be used with the AWJ7 or AWJ8 I/O board.

FIGURE 2-6. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host Computer, Cluster Controller,or DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-5. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to Host Computer,Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31





4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P


V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35-MM 34-pin-M G-220, G-T

34-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 moduleto an R-VDM via a VDM cabinet can be configured as follows:

VDM cabinet backplanes each provide four 50-pin data-interface connectors that support sixcircuits each. A fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and 288 circuits requires 48data interface cables. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf backplane, seeAppendix D.

The SYNC8 module for this application consists of an MC1D089A1 main circuit pack withan AWJ17 I/O board.

The TSM8 module for this application consists of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack with anAWJ17 I/O board or an AWJ7 (for NRZI circuits).

The SDLC8 module for this application consists of an MC1D116A1 main circuit pack with anAWJ17 I/O board or an AWJ7 (for NRZI circuits).

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to each port of the I/O board and to a SYNC4-M cableproviding four RS-232-C connections.

A SYNC6-M cable is then connected to the RS-232-C connectors on the SYNC4-M cables.The 50-pin connector end of the SYNC6-M cable is then connected to the VDM backplane.

NOTE: The SYNC6-M cable provides six RS-232-C connections, each SYNC6-M cablewill mate with one and one half SYNC4-M cables.

When determining cable lengths, it should be noted that the B25FS-1MOD shielded cablesconnect the node and the VDM cabinet. The SYNC4-M and SYNC6-M cables reside withinthe VDM cabinet. AT&T recommends an overall cable length of six feet for these cables; thelength of each cable leg is five feet and the length from the 50-pin connector to the butt (i.e.,the point at which the cable branches out into the cable legs) is one foot.



— The connectorized end of the A25RX cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.




Synchronous Connections________________— For more information about the R-VDM connection, see the appropriate subsection in







To Remote

VDM Site

B25FS-1MOD*

Main Distribution

Frame

TSM

8 or

SYN

C8

or S

DLC

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

WP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

TSM

8 or

SYN

C8

or S

DLC

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17 J1

J2

J1

J2

B25FS-1MOD*

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-MX

SYNC6-M

SYNC6-M6

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)

SYNC4-MX

SYNC4-MX


*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the node side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 2-7. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 2-6. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDMCabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC6-M 6 25-pin-F G-164, G-E

50-pin 180°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 moduleto an R-VDM via a VDM Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 VDM circuit packs. The backplane for theStand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 connectors for RS-232-C connections. For anillustration of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.





All four legs of the SYNC4-M cable can connect to receptacles on the VDM Stand-AloneShelf.



— The connectorized end of the A25RXM cable connects to one of the 50-pin plugs on theVDM backplane. The butt end is then connected to the MDF.











To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

TSM

8, S

YNC

8, o

r SD

LC8

AWJ7

or A

WJ1

7J1

J2

J125


Shelf

(See Note 1) J126

SYNC4-MDatakit II VCS,

MPC7, or MPC15


FIGURE 2-8. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-7. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via VDMStand-Alone Shelf


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 moduleto an R-VDM via a Model 045CS VDM can be configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM is a single circuit assembly housed in a plastic enclosure with themodulating circuitry of the VDM cabinet circuit pack. The Model 045CS VDM is equippedwith one DB25 connector for the data interface. For an illustration of the Model 045CS VDMrear panel, see Appendix D.





One leg of the SYNC4-M cable connects to the Model 045CS VDM.








Synchronous Connections________________Cabling R-VDMs in Single Line Applications




SYNC4-MB25FS-1MOD*


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

TSM

8, S

YNC

8, o

r SD

LC8

AWJ7

or A

WJ1

7

J1

J2

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

LINE

TEL



FIGURE 2-9. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 2-8. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM viaModel 045CS VDM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Cabinet

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 module to anR-VDM via D4 channel bank and the VDM cabinet in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO) can beconfigured as follows:

Each VDM cabinet shelf used for synchronous service in this application must be configuredwith an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf with 24 RS-232-C DB25 connectors. Thisconfiguration supports up to 24 circuits (one circuit per data connector) per shelf, and requiresup to 24 data cables to the D4 DSU-II dataport. Each shelf also has two 50-pin connectors forvoice and voice/data connections to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). For an illustrationof the VDM cabinet shelf backplane, see Appendix D.

Connections to the D4 RS-232-C DSU-II dataport, used for CO-LAN Foreign Serving Office(FSO) arrangements of the VDM and the node, may be made via a DB25 connection on thefaceplate of the DSU-II dataport plug-in unit or via direct connections to the backplane of theD4 channel bank.


The TSM8 module for this application consists of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack with anAWJ7 (for NRZI circuits) or AWJ17 I/O board.

The SDLC8 module for this application consists of an MC1D116A1 main circuit pack with anAWJ7 (for NRZI circuits) or AWJ17 I/O board.


An M25AS-DSU cable connects each leg of the SYNC4-M cable to one D4 DSU-II dataport.

A D4 DSU-II dataport plug-in supports one circuit with a female DB25 RS-232-C connector.

At the remote end D4 DSU-II dataport, a M25B-DSU cable is connected from each D4 DSU-II dataport to a port in the VDM cabinet.






Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________— Voice/data channels are wired from the MDF to the R-VDM over 2-wire unloaded loop

(maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber Loop Carrier (SLC 96) system.







Synchronous Connections________________TS

M8

or S

YNC

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J1

J2

M25AS-DSU T1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

A25RXM

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-M D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

II


*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: This configuration requires an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf in the VDM cabinetwhich provides 24 RS-232-C DB25 female connections.

FIGURE 2-10. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Cabinet


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 2-9. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25AS-DSU 25-pin-F G-169, G-AL

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G-166, G-AM


single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 module to anR-VDM via D4 channel bank and the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO)can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 circuits. Female DB25 RS-232-C connectorsare provided for each circuit, requiring 18 data cables per shelf. For an illustration of theVDM Stand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.








At the remote end D4 DSU-II dataport, an M25B-DSU cable connects the D4 DSU-II dataportto the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.







Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________— For more information about the R-VDM connection, see the appropriate subsection in








M8,

SYN

C8,

or S

DLC

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J1

J2

M25AS-DSU T1

M25B-DSU


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Stand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

A25RXM

J125

J126

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-M D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

IIDatakit II VCS,MPC7, or MPC15


FIGURE 2-11. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andVDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 2-10. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31







single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andModel 045CS VDM

The cabling from a Datakit II VCS, MPC7, or MPC15 SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 module to anR-VDM via D4 channel bank and the Model 045CS VDM in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO) canbe configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM supports one circuit. A female DB25 RS-232-C connector isprovided, requiring one data cable per VDM. For an illustration of the Model 045CS VDMrear panel, see Appendix D.








At the remote end D4 DSU-II dataport, an M25B-DSU cable connects the D4 DSU-II dataportto the Model 045CS VDM.






Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________— Voice/data channels (from the LINE receptacle) are wired from the MDF to the R-VDM

over 2-wire unloaded loop (maximum length is 18,000 feet) or via a Subscriber LoopCarrier (SLC 96) system.








M8,

SYN

C8,

or S

DLC

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J1

J2

M25AS-DSU T1B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-M D4

DSU

II

D4

DSU

II


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

TEL

M25B-DSU



FIGURE 2-12. From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bank andModel 045CS VDM


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15________________TABLE 2-11. Ordering Information: From SYNC8, TSM8, or SDLC8 to R-VDM via D4Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31







6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from TSM-T1 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device

The cabling from the TSM-T1 module to synchronous hosts, cluster controllers, or other V.35DTE devices can be configured as follows:

The TSM-T1 module for this application consists of an MC1D149A1 main circuit pack andan AWJ24 I/O board.

An HD-2V.35M cable is connected to each port (J2 and J6) of the AWJ24 I/O board. Each ofthese cables provide two V.35 connections.

NOTE: The overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable cannot exceed 10 feet. In addition,each of the two V.35 legs cannot exceed one foot in length.

A V.35 cable connects each leg of the HD-2V.35M cable to a V.35 DSU or a V.35 modemeliminator/driver.

— If you are connecting via a modem, connect the remote end to the host, cluster controller,or V.35 DTE device.

— If you are connecting via a modem eliminator/driver, connect directly to the host, clustercontroller, or V.35 device.




TSM

-T1

AWJ2

4

J2

J6

HD-2V.35M*

HD-2V.35M*

DSU(V.35)

DSU(V.35)

PrivateLineTo Host,

Cluster Controller,or other

DTE Device

V.35Datakit II VCS,

BNS-1000,BNS-2000


* The maximum overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable is 10 feet.

FIGURE 2-13. From TSM-T1 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device

TABLE 2-12. Ordering Information: From TSM-T1 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35DTE Device


HD-2V.35M 50-pin-M G-222, G-AS

2 V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504,

and VDM-SAM504

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the interface modules installed in theSAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504. Each cabling configuration representsthe required connections between the module and other equipment associated with thecommunications path, such as terminals, modems, patch panels, hosts, multiplexers, and so forth.

NOTE: The SAM504 and VDM-SAM504 are not supported by BNS-1000 nodes.

Overview

The cabling for the Synchronous Asynchronous Multiplexers (SAMs) is determined by theirsupported interface modules and the physical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

SAMs are concentrators that provide switched asynchronous* and transparent synchronousservices as configurable options for independently administered ports. There are five versions:SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504.

In SAMs, the following modules can be configured for synchronous devices:

AMDA (Access Module for Dedicated Applications) is an interface module in the SAM8.

TERM8 is an interface module for the SAM16.

TERM32 is an interface module for the SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504.


The physical characteristics and configuration of the SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, andVDM-SAM504 are as follows:

SAM8 (Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexer 8-port) provides a maximum of eightsynchronous ports. There are eight 25-pin female connectors on the SAM8 rear panel.

SAM16 (Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexer 16-port) provides a maximum of 16synchronous ports. There are sixteen 25-pin female connectors on the SAM16 rear panel.

________________

* For information about asynchronous connections supported by SAMs, see Chapter 1 of this guide.


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________SAM64 (Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexer 64-port) supports a maximum of twoTERM32 modules, providing a maximum of 64 synchronous ports. There are eleven 50-pinconnectors on the SAM64 rear panel.

SAM504 (Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexer 504-port) supports a maximum of 16TERM32 modules, providing a maximum of 504 synchronous ports. There are forty-eight50-pin connectors on the SAM504 I/O distribution panel.

VDM-SAM504 (Voice Data Multiplexer - Synchronous/Asynchronous Multiplexer504-port) supports a maximum of 16 TERM32 modules, providing a maximum of 504synchronous ports. The VDM to SAM connectors are internal and only the voice andvoice/data connections need to be wired.

For illustrations of the rear view of SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504, seeSAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504 in Chapter 1.


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504 must be shielded to meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagneticinterference (EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration,unshielded cables may be used after the first 25 feet.


Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directly to Terminal, Host,or Cluster Controller


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 to terminals, hosts, or cluster controllerscan be configured as follows:

The cabling for the SAM8 or SAM16 begins at its rear panel. The SAM8 AMDA and SAM16TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board are equipped with eight DB25, RS-232-C connectors (one perport) with a DCE interface.

An M25A or M25B cable connects to a DB25 connector at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.Use an M25A if the connector on the terminating end is male and an M25B if the connector isfemale.

The other end of the cable connects to a synchronous terminal, host port, or cluster controller.




To Terminals, Host, or

Cluster Controllers

SAM8

AMD

A

M25A

M25B

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

FIGURE 2-14. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directly to Terminal, Host, orCluster Controller

TABLE 2-13. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) Directlyto Terminal, Host, or Cluster Controller

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to Terminal, Host, orCluster Controller via Modem or FOM


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 to terminals, hosts, or cluster controllersvia modems or FOMs can be configured as follows:

The cabling for the SAM8 or SAM16 begins at its rear panel. The SAM8 AMDA andSAM16 TERM8’s CPY1 I/O board are equipped with eight DB25, RS-232-C connectors (oneper port) with a DCE interface.

An M25A cable connects to the 25-pin connector at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16.

A DCE to DCE adapter is required to connect the AMDA or TERM8 to a device with a DCEinterface. The DCE to DCE adapter can be plugged into either the AMDA or TERM8, or themodem or FOM.

The other end of the M25A cable connects to a DCE to DCE adapter, which connects to themodem or FOM.

At the remote end modem or multiplexer, an M25A or M25B cable connects to terminals,hosts, or cluster controllers. Cable selection will depend on the gender of the connectors usedon the terminating equipment.




SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

To Modems or FOMs

Modems or FOMs at the

other end

M25ATo Terminals,

Host, or Cluster Controllers


M25B

DCE to DCE

Adapter

M25A

FIGURE 2-15. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to Terminal, Host, or ClusterController via Modem or FOM

TABLE 2-14. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) toTerminal, Host, or Cluster Controller via Modem or FOM


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________DCE to DCE adapter 25-pin-M

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 module to an R-VDM via a VDM cabinetcan be configured as follows:

Each VDM cabinet shelf used for synchronous service in this application must be configuredwith an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf with 24 RS-232-C DB25 connectors. Each shelfalso has two 50-pin connectors for voice and voice/data connections to the Main DistributionFrame (MDF). For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf backplane, see Appendix D.

The cabling for the SAM8 begins at its rear panel. The SAM8 AMDA is equipped with eightDB25, RS-232-C connectors (one per port) with a DCE interface.

The cabling for the SAM16 begins at its rear panel. Each of the two TERM8’s CPY1 I/Oboards are equipped with eight DB-25 RS-232-C connectors. These connectors (one per port)are DCE interfaces.

An M25A cable connects to one of the ports of the SAM8 or SAM16.

A DCE to DCE adapter is then connected to the M25A cable and is plugged into the VDMback panel.













SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)

Note 1: This configuration requires an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf in the VDM cabinetwhich provides 24 RS-232-C DB25 female connections.

FIGURE 2-16. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-15. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P



single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 module to an R-VDM via a VDM Stand-Alone Shelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 VDM circuit packs. The backplane for theStand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 connectors for RS-232-C data connections andtwo 50-pin connectors for voice and voice/data connections. For an illustration of the VDMStand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.




A DCE to DCE adapter is then connected to the M25A cable and is plugged into the VDMStand-Alone Shelf rear panel.











Synchronous Connections________________See the following figure for an illustration of this configuration.

SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126


FIGURE 2-17. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDMStand-Alone Shelf


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 2-16. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P


25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via Model 045CSVDM


The cabling from a SAM8 AMDA or SAM16 TERM8 module to an R-VDM via a Model 045CSVDM can be configured as follows:





A DCE to DCE adapter is then connected to the M25A cable and is plugged into the Model045CS VDM 25-pin receptacle.












SAM8

AMD

A

SAM16

TER

M8

CPY

1

M25A DCE to DCE

Adapter


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

LINE

TEL

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

Note 1: The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.

FIGURE 2-18. From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM viaModel 045CS VDM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-17. Ordering Information: From SAM8 (AMDA) or SAM16 (TERM8) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P



6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly to Terminal, Host, orCluster Controller

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to terminals, hosts, or clustercontrollers can be configured as follows:

The cabling for the SAM64 or SAM504 begins at the rear panel of the SAM64 or the I/Odistribution panel of the SAM504.

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to each 50-pin connector at the rear of a SAM64 orSAM504.

NOTE: SAM64s that are running pre-release R2.1 software will require a controllerinterface adapter (ED5P055-31, G-215) when connecting to AT&T 6500 or IBM3174 cluster controllers.

The other end of the cable connects to a 258AF or 258BF adapter which provides six 8-pin,modular connections.

One D8W modular cable is used for each connection from the 258AF or 258BF adapter to aterminal.

The D8W cable connects to the terminal via an 8-pin modular to 25-pin DB RS-232-Csynchronous adapter. If the gender of the connector on the terminal is female, use a SYNCDCE-M adapter. If the gender of the connector on the terminal is male, use a SYNC DCE-Fadapter. This adapter is designed for synchronous communications only, and one adapter isrequired per port.



Synchronous Connections________________

SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

D8W

To Terminals,

Host Computers

or otherDTE

Devices

B25FS-1MOD*258AF

or258BF

AdapterTER

M32

SYNCDCE-MAdapter

SYNCDCE-FAdapter

(See Note 1)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: SAM64s that are running pre-release R2.1 software will require a controller interface adapter(ED5P055-31, G-215) when connecting to AT&T 6500 or IBM 3174 clustercontrollers.

FIGURE 2-19. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly to Terminal, Host, orCluster Controller


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 2-18. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) Directly toTerminal, Host, or Cluster Controller

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________258AF adapter 50-pin-F G-152

6 mod sockets, side entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC DCE-M adapter 25-pin-M G-148

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC DCE-F adapter 25-pin-F G-150

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal, Host, or ClusterController via Modem or FOM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to terminals, hosts, or clustercontrollers via modems or FOMs can be configured as follows:



NOTE: SAM64s that are running pre-release R2.1 software will require a controllerinterface adapter (ED5P055-31, G-215) when connecting to AT&T 6500 or IBM3174 cluster controllers.

The other end of each cable connects to a 258AF or 258BF adapter which provides six 8-pinmodular connections.

One D8W modular cable is used for each connection from the 258AF or 258BF adapter to themodem or FOM.

The D8W modular cable connects to the modem or FOM via an 8-pin modular to 25-pin DRS-232-C synchronous adapter. If the gender of the connector on the terminal is female, usea SYNC DTE-M adapter. If the gender of the connector on the terminal is male, use a SYNCDTE-F adapter. This adapter is designed for synchronous communications only, and oneadapter is required per port.

At the remote end modem or multiplexer, an M25A or M25B cable connects to terminals,hosts, or cluster controllers. Cable selection will depend on the gender of the connectors usedon the terminating equipment.




SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

D8WTo

Modems or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD*258AF

or258BF

AdapterTER

M32

SYNCDTE-MAdapter

SYNCDTE-F

Adapter

Switched or Private LineModems or FOMs at the other end

To Terminals,Host Computers orother DTE Devices

M25A

M25B


FIGURE 2-20. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal, Host, or ClusterController via Modem or FOM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-19. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to Terminal,Host, or Cluster Controller via Modem or FOM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




6 mod sockets, rear entry_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC DTE-M adapter 25-pin-M G-149

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC DTE-F adapter 25-pin-F G-151

mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a VDM cabinet canbe configured as follows:

A VDM cabinet backplane provides four 50-pin connectors per shelf for data circuits; eachconnector supports six circuits. A fully populated VDM cabinet with 12 shelves and 288circuits requires 48 data cables. For an illustration of the VDM cabinet shelf backplane, seeAppendix D.

A B25FSX-1MOD cable is required to connect the SAM64 or SAM504 to the VDM cabinet.














To Remote

VDM Site

B25FSX-1MOD

Main Distribution

FrameWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RX

6

VDMCabinet

(See Note 1)

SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32

Note 1: The VDM cabinet may contain a maximum of 12 shelves, each with four connectorson the Datakit II VCS side and two on the MDF side.

FIGURE 2-21. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Cabinet


SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________TABLE 2-20. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaVDM Cabinet


B25FSX-1MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-204, G-C

50-pin 180°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDM Stand-AloneShelf

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a VDM Stand-AloneShelf can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 VDM circuit packs. The backplane for theStand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 connectors for RS-232-C connections. Three25-pair cables are required from the SAM64 or SAM504 end to support a VDM Stand-AloneShelf with 18 circuit packs installed. For an illustration of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf, seeAppendix D.



The other end of the 25-pair cable connects to a 258BF adapter.

A D8W cable connects each modular connection on the 258BF adapter to a SYNC DTE-Madapter.

This adapter plugs into one of the ports at the rear of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.













SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32 B25FS-1MOD* D8W SYNC

DTE-MAdapter


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

A25RXM

258BFAdapter

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)

J125

J126

(See Note 2)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: Wire all circuits on J125 and only the first six circuits on J126. The VDM Stand-Alone Shelfsupports a maximum of 18 circuits.Note 2: Adapter connector.

FIGURE 2-22. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via VDMStand-Alone Shelf


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-21. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaVDM Stand-Alone Shelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31






mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via a Model 045CSVDM can be configured as follows:

The Model 045CS VDM is a single circuit assembly housed in a plastic enclosure with themodulating circuitry of the VDM cabinet circuit pack. The Model 045CS VDM is equippedwith one DB25 connector for the data interface. For an illustration of the Model 045CS VDMrear panel, see Appendix D.




Use a D8W cable to connect the 258BF adapter to a SYNC DTE-M adapter.

This adapter plugs into the DB25 connector on the rear of the Model 045CS VDM.














SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

VDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

TEL

B25FS-1MOD* D8W SYNCDTE-MAdapter

258BFAdapter

(See Note 2)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.Note 2: Adapter connector.

FIGURE 2-23. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via Model 045CS VDM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-22. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaModel 045CS VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31






mod socket_ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G-144, G-H

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Cabinet

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bankand the VDM cabinet in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO) can be configured as follows:

Each VDM cabinet shelf used for synchronous service in this configuration must beconfigured with an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf with 24 RS-232-C DB25 connectors.This configuration supports up to 24 circuits (one circuit per data connector) per shelf, andrequires up to 24 data cables to the D4 DSU-II dataport. For an illustration of the VDMcabinet shelf backplane, see Appendix D.

Connections to the D4 RS-232-C DSU-II dataport, used for CO-LAN Foreign Serving Office(FSO) arrangements of the VDM and the Datakit II VCS, may be made via a DB25connection on the faceplate of the DSU-II dataport plug-in unit or via direct connections to thebackplane of the D4 channel bank.


A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a 50-pin connector at the rear of a SAM64 or SAM504.


D8W cables connect the 258BF adapter to a SAM/DSU-M adapter, which then connects to aD4 DSU-II dataport.

The D4 DSU-II dataport plug-in supports one circuit with a female DB25 RS-232-Cconnector.

At the remote end, a M25B-DSU cable is connected from each D4 DSU-II dataport to a portin the VDM cabinet.














SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32 B25FS-1MOD* D8W258BF

Adapter

VDM Cabinet

(See Note 1)


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

Frame WP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

T1

D4D4

DSU

II

DSU

II

SAM/DSU-MAdapter

M25B-DSU

(See Note 2)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: This configuration requires an ED2P497-30, G-7 (Model 10F) shelf in the VDM cabinetwhich provides 24 RS-232-C DB25 female connections.Note 2: Adapter connector.

FIGURE 2-24. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Cabinet


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-23. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and VDM Cabinet


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM/DSU-M adapter mod socket

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8ANX 25-pin-M G-194, G-G

8-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B-DSU 25-pin-M G-166, G-AM

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bankand the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO) can be configured as follows:

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 circuits. Female DB25 RS-232-C connectorsare provided for each circuit, requiring 18 data cables per shelf. For an illustration of theVDM Stand-Alone Shelf, see Appendix D.




The other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a 258BF adapter.



At the remote end, a M25B-DSU cable is connected from each D4 DSU-II dataport to theVDM Stand-Alone Shelf.















SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER


Adapter


To Remote

VDM Site

Main Distribution

Frame WP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

A25RXM

T1

D4D4

DSU

II

DSU

II

SAM/DSU-MAdapter

M25B-DSU

J125

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1)J126

(See Note 2)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: Wire all circuits on J125 and only the first six circuits on J126. The VDM Stand-Alone Shelfsupports a maximum of 18 circuits.Note 2: Adapter connector.

FIGURE 2-25. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand VDM Stand-Alone Shelf


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-24. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31





mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM/DSU-M adapter mod socket G-158



single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Model 045CS VDM

The cabling from a SAM64 or SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM via D4 channel bankand the Model 045CS VDM in a Foreign Serving Office (FSO) can be configured as follows:








At the remote end, a M25B-DSU cable is connected from each D4 DSU-II dataport to theModel 045CS VDM.















SAM64 or

SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER


Adapter


To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

SAM/DSU-MAdapter

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

D6AM

D6AM

LINE

TEL

M25B-DSU

D4D

SU IIT1

D4

DSU

IIVDM Model 045CS

(See Note 1)

Main Distribution

Frame

(See Note 2)

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The Model 045CS VDM LINE jack supports voice and data. The TEL jack supports voice only.Note 2: Adapter connector.

FIGURE 2-26. From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM via D4 Channel Bankand Model 045CS VDM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-25. Ordering Information: From SAM64 or SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM viaD4 Channel Bank and Model 045CS VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31





mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM/DSU-M adapter mod socket G-158



6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________



SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504________________Cabling from VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

The cabling from a VDM-SAM504 TERM32 module to an R-VDM can be configured as follows:

A VDM-SAM504 cabinet combines the functions of the SAM504 and a VDM cabinet. Thecabling between the SAM504 TERM32 module and the VDM in the VDM cabinet is internalto the VDM-SAM504 cabinet. For an illustration of the VDM-SAM504, see Appendix D.

For each VDM circuit in a central office (CO), a corresponding R-VDM is required at thecustomer or end user equipment location. The connection between the VDM-SAM504cabinet in the CO and the R-VDM at the customer or end user equipment location is providedas follows:













To Remote

VDM SiteWP 48B

SLC 96RT

SLC 96COT

WP 47BT1

Main Distribution

Frame

A25RXVDM-SAM504

Dis

tribu

tion

Pane

l

TER

M32

FIGURE 2-27. From VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

TABLE 2-26. Ordering Information: From VDM-SAM504 (TERM32) to R-VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RX 50-pin 180°-F G-115, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________



BNS-1000________________BNS-1000

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the synchronous interface modulesinstalled in the BNS-1000 node. The modules include the TSM8, TSM-T1, and SDLC8. Eachcabling configuration represents the required connections between the module and otherequipment associated with the communications path, such as terminals, modems, hosts, patchpanels, multiplexers, and so forth.

Overview

The cabling for the BNS-1000 node is determined by their supported interface modules and thephysical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

The synchronous interface modules supported by the BNS-1000 node are listed below:


SDLC8 (Synchronous Data Link Control 8-port) is an 8-port interface module forinterfacing synchronous devices operating under SDLC protocol.

TSM-T1 (Transparent Synchronous Module–T1) is an 8-port interface module forinterfacing synchronous devices operating under SDLC protocol up to an aggregate data rateof 1.536 Mbps.

The TSM8 and SDLC8 modules can be cabled for low-speed connections up to 19.2 Kbps or formedium-speed connections from 48 to 64 Kbps, depending on the I/O board used.


Medium-speed connections use the CCITT V.35 interface available on certain I/O boards forall three modules. The TSM8 and SDLC8 modules support speeds up to 64 Kbps via theV.35 interface.

Cabling for the TSM8 and SDLC8 can be somewhat confusing due to the number of featureoptions provided by different I/O boards. An overview of the various feature options of theseparticular synchronous interface modules are addressed in the following sections.

________________



Synchronous Connections________________The following figure illustrates the association of the interface modules to their appropriate node.

TSM8

SDLC8

BNS-1000

FIGURE 2-28. Interface Modules in the Node

For illustrations of the rear view of the BNS-1000 node, see BNS-1000 in Chapter 1.


The TSM8 module is made up of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack and one of six available I/Oboards.

The SDLC8 module consists of an MC1D116A1 main circuit pack and uses the same I/O boardsas the TSM8.





An AWJ7 I/O board offers eight DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and has two 50-pin connectors; each connector


BNS-1000________________handles four DTE ports.




The following figure illustrates the TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O boards and their variousconfigurations.

MC1D088A1 (TSM8) or MC1D116A1 (SDLC8)


I/OBoard

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232

I/OBoard

RS-232

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DCE(3)

V.35DTE(1)


FIGURE 2-29. TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O Board Interfaces

The following table illustrates the I/O boards and the number of ports provided by the TSM8 andSDLC8 interface modules.


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-27. Number of Ports Provided by TSM8 and SDLC8 I/O Board Interfaces


RS-232-C_ __________________________________________________V.35




The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the BNS-1000 node must be shielded to meetFederal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements.If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after thefirst 25 feet.


BNS-1000________________Cabling from TSM8 or SDLC8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35DTE Device

The cabling for the TSM8 or SDLC8 modules differs only in the type of interface module (maincircuit pack) used in the BNS-1000 node.

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DTE device can be directlyconnected, as follows:
















NOTE: If the AWJ5 or AWJ6 is being used, only Port J1 may be used for RS-232-Cconnections.




Synchronous Connections________________NOTE: If the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/O boards are used, a modem eliminator/driver

will be required.





BNS-1000


DTE devices

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8 or

SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

C25AS-MOD

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25BModem

Eliminator/ Driver

(See Note 2)

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 1)

To V.35DTE Device

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17I/O board.

FIGURE 2-30. From TSM8 or SDLC8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35DTE Device


BNS-1000________________TABLE 2-28. Ordering Information: From TSM8 or SDLC8 Directly to Host, ClusterController, or V.35 DTE Device


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P


V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via110 Patch Panel

The cabling for the TSM8 or SDLC8 modules differs only in the type of interface module (maincircuit pack) used within the BNS-1000 node.

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DTE device can be connected tothe BNS-1000 node via a 110 patch panel, as follows:















Attach a B25FS-1MOD cable to the appropriate 50-pin connector on the I/O board at the rearof the BNS-1000 node.


A SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable, which splits into four RS-232-C legs, connects to the patchpanel. The 50-pin connector side of the SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable, ifnecessary.




BNS-1000________________See the following figure for an illustration of this configuration.

B25FS-1MOD**

TSM

8 or

SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

BNS-1000

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

J1

J2

110 Patch Panel

NC*


DTE devices

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 2)

RS-232-CIO

SYNC4-F

M25B

SYNC4-M

M25A

M25B

(See Note 1)

6-Pair "D" wire

B25A

*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 2: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/O boards.

FIGURE 2-31. From TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Devicevia 110 Patch Panel


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-29. Ordering Information: From TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, ClusterController, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



BNS-1000________________Cabling from TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTEDevice via Modem, DSU, or FOM

The cabling for the TSM8 or SDLC8 modules differs only in the type of interface module (maincircuit pack) used within the BNS-1000 node.

Using one of the DTE I/O boards listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2, a DCE device (or other equipmentwith a DCE interface) can be connected to the node by a direct connection, as follows:











Attach a B25FS-1MOD shielded cable to the appropriate 50-pin connectors on the I/O boardat the rear of the BNS-1000 node.





The SYNC4 cable then connects directly to the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM. An M25A orM25B cable may be used to extend the RS-232-C connections, if necessary.




Synchronous Connections________________For V.35 connections, a C25AS-MOD cable is connected to Port J2 of the AWJ5 or AWJ6I/O board.





BNS-1000________________

BNS-1000

B25FS-1MOD**

TSM

8 or

SD

LC8

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1


J1

J2


To Modems, DSUs or FOMs



DTE Devices

M25A

M25B

NC*

NC*

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25B


To V.35 DTE Devices

V.35

V.35-MM


*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.

FIGURE 2-32. From TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device viaModem, DSU, or FOM


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-30. Ordering Information: From TSM8 or SDLC8 to Host, ClusterController, or DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31





4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P


V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35-MM 34-pin-M G-220, G-T

34-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



BNS-1000________________BNS-2000

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the synchronous interface modulesinstalled in the BNS-2000 node. The modules are the TSM8 and TSM-T1. Each cablingconfiguration represents the required connections between the module and other equipmentassociated with the communications path, such as terminals, modems, hosts, patch panels,multiplexers, and so forth.

Overview

The cabling for the BNS-2000 node is determined by its supported interface modules and thephysical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

The synchronous interface modules supported by the BNS-2000 node are listed below:


TSM-T1 (Transparent Synchronous Module–T1) is an 8-port interface module forinterfacing synchronous devices operating under SDLC protocol up to an aggregate data rateof 1.536 Mbps.

The TSM8 module can be cabled for low-speed connections up to 19.2 Kbps or for medium-speed connections from 48 to 64 Kbps, depending on the I/O board used.


Medium-speed connections use the CCITT V.35 interface available on certain I/O boards forall three modules. The TSM8 module supports speeds up to 64 Kbps via the V.35 interface.

Cabling for the TSM8 can be somewhat confusing due to the number of feature options providedby different I/O boards. An overview of the various feature options of these particularsynchronous interface modules are addressed in the following sections.

________________



Synchronous Connections________________Physical Characteristics

The TSM8 module is made up of an MC1D088A1 main circuit pack and one of six available I/Oboards.





An AWJ7 I/O board offers eight DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and has two 50-pin connectors; each connectorhandles four DTE ports.





BNS-2000________________The following figure illustrates the TSM8 I/O boards and their various configurations.

MC1D088A1 (TSM8)


I/OBoard

I/OBoard

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232 NRZI

I/OBoard

RS-232

I/OBoard

RS-232

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DCE(3)

V.35DTE(1)


FIGURE 2-33. TSM8 I/O Board Interfaces


Synchronous Connections________________The following table illustrates the I/O boards and the number of ports provided by the TSM8interface module.

TABLE 2-31. Number of Ports Provided by TSM8 I/O Board Interfaces


RS-232-C_ __________________________________________________V.35




The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the BNS-2000 node must be shielded to meetFederal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements.If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after thefirst 25 feet.


BNS-2000________________Cabling from TSM8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Figure 2-34, a DTE device can be directly connected,as follows:









NOTE: If the AWJ5 or AWJ6 is being used, only Port J1 may be used for RS-232-Cconnections.



NOTE: If the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/O boards are used, a modem eliminator/driverwill be required.







BNS-2000


DTE devices

B25FS-1MOD*

TSM

8AW

J5 o

r AW

J6AW

J8 o

r AW

J18

AWJ7

or A

WJ1

7J2

J1

J2

J1

C25AS-MOD

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25BModem

Eliminator/ Driver

(See Note 2)

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 1)

To V.35DTE Device

J1

J2

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17I/O board.

FIGURE 2-34. From TSM8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35DTE Device


BNS-2000________________TABLE 2-32. Ordering Information: From TSM8 Directly to Host, Cluster Controller,or V.35 DTE Device


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P


V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Synchronous Connections________________Cabling from TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device via 110 PatchPanel

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Figure 2-34, a DTE device can be connected to theBNS-2000 node via a 110 patch panel, as follows:








Attach a B25FS-1MOD cable to the appropriate 50-pin connector on the I/O board at the rearof the BNS-2000 node.


A SYNC4-F or SYNC4-M cable, which splits into four RS-232-C legs, connects to the patchpanel. The 50-pin connector side of the SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable, ifnecessary.





BNS-2000________________

B25FS-1MOD**

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ8

or A

WJ1

8AW

J7 o

r AW

J17

J2

J1

J2

J1

J1

J2

110 Patch Panel

NC*


DTE devices

To DTE Device

Modem Eliminator/

Driver

(See Note 2)

RS-232-CIO

SYNC4-F

M25B

SYNC4-M

M25A

M25B

(See Note 1)

6-Pair "D" Wire

B25A

BNS-2000

TSM

8

*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 1: The SYNC4 cable may be extended with a B25A cable.Note 2: The modem eliminator/driver is required with the AWJ6, AWJ7, or AWJ17 I/O boards.

FIGURE 2-35. From TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Devicevia 110 Patch Panel


Synchronous Connections________________TABLE 2-33. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTEDevice via 110 Patch Panel


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F




4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



BNS-2000________________Cabling from TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or V.35 DTE Device viaModem, DSU, or FOM

Using one of the DTE I/O boards listed in Figure 2-34, a DCE device (or other equipment with aDCE interface) can be connected to the node by a direct connection, as follows:






Attach a B25FS-1MOD shielded cable to the appropriate 50-pin connectors on the I/O boardat the rear of the BNS-2000 node.





The SYNC4 cable then connects directly to the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM. An M25A orM25B cable may be used to extend the RS-232-C connections, if necessary.









B25FS-1MOD**AW

J5 o

r AW

J6AW

J8 o

r AW

J18

AWJ7

or A

WJ1

7J2

J1

J2

J1


J1

J2


To Modems, DSUs, or FOMs



DTE Devices

M25A

M25B

NC*

NC*

SYNC4-M

M25A

SYNC4-F

M25B


To V.35 DTE Devices

V.35

V.35-MM


BNS-2000

TSM

8


FIGURE 2-36. From TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTE Device viaModem, DSU, or FOM


BNS-2000________________TABLE 2-34. Ordering Information: From TSM8 to Host, Cluster Controller, or DTEDevice via Modem, DSU, or FOM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31





4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P


V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35-MM 34-pin-M G-220, G-T

34-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Special Connections


Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15 3-4

Overview 3-4

Cabling from E2A to:• Central Office via Modem 3-7

Cabling from SLM to:• Central Office via Modem 3-9


________________Special Connections

This chapter explains how to cable special connections via the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15.


To find cabling information for special connections, refer to this chapter’s table of contents. Thistable of contents has been designed as an easy reference to find the desired configuration and is tobe used in the following manner:

This chapter’s table of contents has one major heading that has been defined at the cabinetlevel as follows:

— Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15

Below this heading, identify the interface module from which the cabling will originate:

— Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15 use E2A and SLM special purposeinterface modules.




Special Connections________________Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7,

and MPC15

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the E2A Module and SLM specialpurpose modules, which can be installed in a Datakit II VCS Modular Cabinet, BNS-2000 SeriesM1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15. Each cabling configuration represents the required connectionsbetween the module and other equipment associated with the special purpose application. Thecabling for the node cabinet or both concentrators is determined by its supported special purposeinterface modules and the physical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

The special purpose interface modules supported by the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-2000 SeriesM1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are listed below:

E2A module is a special purpose asynchronous module used to carry telemetry informationbetween central office (CO) switching equipment and the E2A Telemetry System.

SLM (Synchronous Link Module) is a four-port special purpose (BX.25) interface modulefor use in the Switching Control Center System (SCCS).

The following figure illustrates the association of these interface modules to the Datakit II VCSnode, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Datakit II VCS,

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf,

MPC7, and MPC15

E2A

SLM

FIGURE 3-1. Special Purpose Interface Modules in Cabinets


The physical characteristics and configuration of the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-2000 Series M1Shelf, and MPC15 are presented below:

Datakit II VCS Modular Cabinet

The Datakit II VCS control and port cabinets each have 16 slots.

In a control cabinet, the Control Computer and additional control modules require nine of thecabinet’s 16 numbered slots (numbered 0 through 15). The remaining seven slots areavailable for interface modules that support services, and for the Maintenance andRedundancy Control Module (MRCM) and redundant Eswitch module, if they are selected.

A port cabinet comes with a Repeater module in the highest slot address of the portcabinet. The remaining slots are available for interface modules.

Each circuit pack comprising the special purpose modules resides in an addressable slot in aDatakit II VCS Modular Cabinet and has an associated I/O distribution board mounted at therear of the unit.

BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf

The BNS-2000 Series M1 control and port shelves each have 16 slots.

In a control shelf, the Control Computer and additional control modules require nine of thecabinet’s 16 numbered slots (numbered 0 through 15). The remaining seven slots areavailable for interface modules that support services, and for the MRCM and Clock Trunk


Special Connections________________Repeater Module (CTRM).

A port shelf comes with a CTRM in the highest slot address of the port shelf. The remainingslots are available for interface modules.

Each circuit pack comprising the special purpose modules resides in an addressable slot in aBNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf and has an associated I/O distribution board mounted at the rearof the unit.

Multipurpose Concentrator 7-slot (MPC7)

The MPC7 has 7 slots; 4 of these slots can support interface modules such as the E2A Moduleand SLM. Each circuit pack used in the special purpose modules resides in an addressableslot in the MPC7 and has an associated I/O distribution board mounted at the rear of the unit.

Multipurpose Concentrator 15-slot (MPC15)

The MPC15 has 15 slots; 12 of these slots can support interface modules such as the E2AModule and SLM. Each circuit pack used in the special purpose modules resides in anaddressable slot in the MPC15 and has an associated I/O distribution board mounted at therear of the unit.


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the Datakit II VCS node and MPC15 must beshielded to meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference(EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cablesmay be used after the first 25 feet.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from E2A to Central Office via Modem

The E2A module is a special purpose module that provides E2A telemetry service for theSwitching Control Center System (SCCS). This module has been customized to meet the specificneeds of SCCS and is not utilized in other applications.

Cabling for the E2A special purpose module may be configured as follows:

The E2A module consists of a TN1012 circuit pack and an ED5P074-30, G-1 I/O board.Each E2A module provides four RS-232-C DTE asynchronous ports.

An M25AS cable is used to connect each port on the I/O board to a modem(data set).

The local modem is connected to the remote modem via a private four-wire data facility. Insome applications, the remote location may use more than one modem connected via a four-wire multiport bridge.

NOTE: See the appropriate SCCS documentation for detailed information regarding theE2A connection in the central office.



Special Connections________________

202TData Set(Modem)

M25AS

Private Line 4-Wire

Data Facility 202TData Set(Modem)

Central Office Equipped with E2A Telemetry Remote Circuit

202TData Set(Modem)


202TData Set(Modem)


4-WireMultiportBridge

Datakit II VCSor MPC15 E2

AED

5P07

4-30

, G1

E2A Telemetry System

FIGURE 3-2. From E2A to Central Office via Modem

TABLE 3-1. Ordering Information: From E2A to Central Office via Modem

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________M25AS 25-pin-M G-118, G-L

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from SLM to Central Office via Modem

The Synchronous Link Module (SLM) is a special purpose module that provides BX.25 Issue 2service for the Switching Control Center System (SCCS). This module has been customized tomeet the specific needs of SCCS and is not utilized in other applications.

Cabling for the SLM special purpose module may be configured as follows:

The SLM module is a two-board set consisting of an MC5P025A1 processor board and itsassociated I/O board (ED5P080-30, G-1) and a UN221 SC/DKI interface board and itsassociated I/O board (ED5P077-30, G-1).

The SLM module provides four RS-232-C DTE ports via the ED5P077-30, G-1 I/O board.

An M25AS-MOD cable is used to connect each port of the ED5P077-30, G-1 I/O board to amodem (data set).

The modem is typically connected to a data auxiliary set that is connected to a matching set ata remote DMERT SPCS location. This connection is made over a four-wire private datafacility.

NOTE: See the appropriate SCCS documentation for detailed information regarding theSLM connections at remote locations.



Special Connections________________

Datakit II VCSor MPC15 SL

MED

5P08

0-30

, G1

2024AData Set(Modem)

M25AS-MOD

Private 4-Wire

Data Facility

ED5P

077-

30, G

1

NC*

829BData Aux.

Set

BX.25 Data

829BData Aux.

Set

RemoteDMERT SPCS

Location

*NC = not connected

FIGURE 3-3. From SLM to Central Office via Modem

TABLE 3-2. Ordering Information: From SLM to Central Office via Modem


M25AS-MOD 25-pin-F G-178, G-L

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Standard Connections


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000,and BNS-2000 4-4

Overview 4-4

Cabling from X.25 to:• Host, PDN, DTE Device, or V.35 DTE Device 4-10• Host, PDN, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel 4-13• Host, PDN, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM 4-16

Cabling from X.25P to:• V.35 DTE Access Device 4-20• Host Computer, DTE Device, or RS-232-C DTE Device 4-24• Host Computer or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel 4-27• Host Computer or RS-232-C DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM 4-30

Cabling from X.75 to:• Access Device 4-33


________________Standard Connections

This chapter explains how to cable standard connections via the Datakit II VCS node, 7-slotMultipurpose Concentrator (MPC7), 15-slot Multipurpose Concentrator (MPC15), BNS-1000node, and BNS-2000 node.


To find cabling information for specific standard applications, refer to this chapter’s table ofcontents. This table of contents has been designed as an easy reference to find the desiredconfiguration and is to be used in the following manner:

This chapter’s table of contents has one major heading that has been defined at the cabinetlevel. The major cabinet level heading is as follows:

— Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 node.

Select the interface module from which the cabling will originate:

— Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 node use the X.25or X.25P interface module.

Next, identify the device at the terminating end of the connection (e.g., host, cluster controller,DTE X.25 device, or public data network (PDN)).

Finally, select the path of the connection (e.g., directly wired or via modem, modemeliminator, Fiber Optic Multiplexer (FOM), 110 patch panel, Data Service Unit (DSU), orISDN terminal adapter).




________________Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15,

BNS-1000, and BNS-2000

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for the X.25, X.25P, or X.75 standardinterface module that is installed in the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000 node,and BNS-2000 node. Each cabling configuration represents the required connections between theX.25 module and other equipment associated with the communications path, such as modems,hosts, PDNs, patch panels, DSUs, FOMs, or modem eliminators.

Overview

The cabling for the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 nodeis determined by their supported interface module and its associated physical characteristics andconfiguration.

X.25 Interface Module

The X.25 module is a four-port interface module, supported by the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7,MPC15, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 node that supplies X.25 services (i.e., carries out the1988 CCITT recommendations on the X.25 protocol and the DTE-to-DCE interface between asynchronous host and a packet-switched public data network (PDN)).

The X.25 module can be cabled for low-speed connections up to 19.2 Kbps, or for medium-speedconnections from 48 to 64 Kbps, depending on the I/O board used.


Medium-speed connections use the CCITT V.35 interface available on the I/O boards. TheX.25 module supports speeds up to 64 Kbps via the V.35 interface.

Cabling for the X.25 can be somewhat confusing due to the number of feature options providedby different I/O boards (i.e., six for X.25). Therefore, an overview of the physical characteristicsof this standard interface module are addressed in the following sections.

X.25 Physical Characteristics

The X.25 module consists of an X.25 (TN2094) main circuit pack and one of six available I/Oboards. By using the appropriate I/O board, the module can be configured as DataCommunications Equipment (DCE) or Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). The following optionsare available:

An AWJ5 I/O board offers three DCE RS-232-C connections, for lines operating at speeds upto 19.2 Kbps, and one DTE V.35 connection, for a line operating at a speed up to 64 Kbps.The I/O board has two 50-pin connectors. Use the bottom 50-pin connector to access the


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________V.35 port and the top 50-pin connector to access the RS-232-C ports.

An AWJ6 I/O board offers three DTE RS-232-C connections, for lines operating at speeds upto 19.2 Kbps, and one DTE V.35 connection, for a line operating at a speed up to 64 Kbps.The I/O board has two 50-pin connectors. Use the bottom V.35 connector to access the V.35port and the top 50-pin connector to access the three RS-232-C DTE ports.

An AWJ7 I/O board offers four DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and its upper 50-pin connector (J1) handles fourDTE ports.

An AWJ8 I/O board offers four DCE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. The I/O board uses NRZI encoding and its upper 50-pin connector (J1) handles fourDCE ports.

An AWJ17 I/O board offers four DTE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. Use the upper 50-pin connector (J1) to access ports 1 through 4.

An AWJ18 I/O board offers four DCE RS-232-C ports for lines operating at speeds up to 19.2Kbps. Use the upper 50-pin connector (J1) to access ports 1 through 4.


Standard Connections________________The following figure illustrates the X.25 I/O boards and their various configurations.

TN2094


I/OBoard

I/OBoard

I/OBoardNRZI

I/OBoard

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DCE(3)

V.35DTE(1)

RS-232DTE(3)

RS-232DTE(4)

I/OBoardNRZI

RS-232DCE(4)

RS-232DTE(4)

I/OBoard

RS-232DCE(4)

FIGURE 4-1. X.25 I/O Board Interfaces


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________The following table illustrates the I/O boards and the number of ports provided for each interfacetype.

TABLE 4-1. Number of Ports Provided by X.25 I/O Board Interfaces


RS-232-C_ __________________________________________________V.35



X.25P Interface Module

The X.25P module can be installed to support either V.35 or RS-232-C devices. The AWJ24 I/Odistribution board supports only V.35 devices, while the CSD4 I/O distribution board supportsonly RS-232-C devices.

The X.25P module AWJ24 I/O distribution board has two 50-pin connectors, labeled J2 and J6.Each connector supports two ports, for a total of four V.35 ports for each module. Each port canbe cabled to an external device.

X.25P Physical Characteristics

The X.25P is a single-board interface module that consists of the MC1D153A-1 main circuit packand an AWJ24 I/O distribution board and an RS-232-C CSD4 I/O distribution board. Themodule and its I/O boards can reside in a supported data networking products node, MultipurposeConcentrator 7-slot (MPC7), or Multipurpose Concentrator 15-slot (MPC15).

The AWJ24 I/O board has up to four data terminal equipment (DTE) ports that can be configuredfor V.35 connections. The X.25P uses the same cabling as other modules using this I/O board.The RS-232-C CSD4 I/O board has eight ports that can be configured independently as DTE orDCE. The X.25P, with the CSD4, uses the same cabling as other modules using the AWJ17 andAWJ18 I/O boards. The following figure illustrates the X.25P I/O boards and their variousconfigurations.


Standard Connections________________MC1D153A-1

AWJ24

I/OBoard

V.35DTE(4)

CSD4

I/OBoard

RS-232DCE/DTE(8*)

*X.25P RS-232-C ports can be configured independently as either DCE or DTE.

FIGURE 4-2. X.25P I/O Board Interfaces

The following table illustrates the X.25P I/O boards and the number of ports provided for eachinterface type.

TABLE 4-2. Number of Ports Provided by X.25P I/O Board Interfaces

_ __________________________________________________Number of Ports Provided of Each Interface Type_ ________________________________________

V.35 RS-232-C_ ________________________________________I/O Board

DTE DCE DTE_ ___________________________________________________ __________________________________________________AWJ24 4 — —_ __________________________________________________CSD4

—

8*

8*_ __________________________________________________* X.25P RS-232-C ports can be configured independently as DTE or DCE._ __________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________The following figure illustrates the interfaces of the X.25, X.25P, and X.75 modules.

Datakit II VCS,MPC15,

BNS-1000,or BNS-2000

X.25 andX.25PHost

DTE X.25 Device

X.25 PDN

Cluster Controller

V.25 Device

X.75 X.75 PDN

X.25 andX.25P

X.25 andX.25P

X.25 andX.25P

X.25 andX.25P

FIGURE 4-3. Module Interfaces


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the Datakit II VCS node, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 node must be shielded to meet Federal Communications Commission(FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for agiven configuration, unshielded cables may be used after the first 25 feet.


Standard Connections________________Cabling from X.25 Directly to Host, PDN, DTE Device, or V.35 DTE Device

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Table 4-1, data terminal equipment can be directlyconnected, as follows:

For RS-232-C operation, the X.25 module for this application consists of a TN2094 maincircuit pack and one of the following I/O boards:

— The AWJ5 I/O board provides three RS-232-C DCE ports

— The AWJ8 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DCE ports (with NRZI)

— The AWJ18 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DCE ports

For RS-232-C connections:

— A B25FS-1MOD cable is connected to the upper 50-pin connector (J1) on the AWJ5,AWJ8, or AWJ18 I/O board.

— A SYNC4-M cable is then connected to the B25FS-1MOD. The SYNC4-M has fourmale 25-pin connectors.

— Each of the 25-pin connectors on the SYNC4-M cable may be connected directly to theend device, or they may be extended using an M25A cable.

For V.35 operation, the X.25 module for this application consists of a TN2094 main circuitpack and one of the following I/O boards:

— The AWJ5 I/O board provides one V.35 DTE port


For V.35 connections:

— A C25AS-MOD cable is connected to the lower 50-pin connector (J2) of the AWJ5 orAWJ6 I/O board.

— A modem eliminator/driver must then be used to connect directly to a V.35 DTE device.

— This configuration is used for limited distance cabling (i.e., in the same building).

— A C25AS-MOD 25-pair cable connects the I/O boards to a V.35 connector and aC25ASX-MOD 25-pair cable connects the I/O boards to an RS-449 connector at themodem eliminator. A modem eliminator supplies the timing function necessary forsynchronous operation. From the modem eliminator, CCITT V.35 interface cable isdirect-wired to a V.35 DTE device.



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________



To Host Computers,PDNs, or otherDTE Devices

B25FS-1MOD**

X.25

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ5

or A

WJ1

8

C25AS-MOD

To V.35DTE Device

J1

J2

J2

J1

SYNC4-M

M25A

Modem Eliminator/

DriverV.35

V.35 CCITT V.35

C25ASX-MOD CCITT V.35

NC*

NC*

Modem Eliminator/

DriverRS-

449

V.35


FIGURE 4-4. From X.25 Directly to Host, PDN, DTE Device, or V.35 DTE Device


Standard Connections________________TABLE 4-3. Ordering Information: From X.25 Directly to Host, PDN, DTE Device, orV.35 DTE Device


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25AS-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-202, G-C

V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________CCITT V.35 V.35 M G-121, G-Q

V.35 F_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25ASX-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-203, G-C

RS-449-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Cabling from X.25 to Host, PDN, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel

Using one of the DCE I/O boards listed in Table 4-1, a DTE device can be connected to aDatakit II VCS or BNS-1000 node via a 110 patch panel, as follows:


— The AWJ5 I/O board provides three RS-232-C DCE ports

— The AWJ8 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DCE ports (with NRZI)

— The AWJ18 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DCE ports

A B25FS-1MOD cable is connected to the upper 50-pin connector (J1) on the AWJ5, AWJ8,or AWJ18 I/O board.


An A25U cable extends from the 110 patch panel to the SYNC4-M cable at the other end.

A SYNC4-M cable is then connected to the A25U. The SYNC4-M has four male 25-pinconnectors.

Each of the 25-pin connectors on the SYNC4-M cable may be connected directly to the enddevice, or they may be extended using a M25A cable.

If RS-232-C I/O ports are wired directly from the patch panel via 3- or 4-pair "D" wire, anM25B cable can be used to connect to the DTE device.



Standard Connections________________

B25FS-1MOD**

X.25

AWJ5

or A

WJ1

8J1

NC*J2

To Host Computers,PDNs, or otherDTE Devices

SYNC4-M

M25A

RS-232-CIO

3- or 4-Pair"D" Wire

A25U

M25B

110 Patch Panel***



*NC=no connection**After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.***110 patch panels are available with different interconnects. Before selecting cables, determinewhich interconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 4-5. From X.25 to Host, PDN, or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________TABLE 4-4. Ordering Information: From X.25 to Host, PDN, or DTE Device via 110Patch Panel


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90°-M G-114, G-F


4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Standard Connections________________Cabling from X.25 to Host, PDN, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU, orFOM

Using one of the DTE I/O boards listed in Table 4-1, a DTE device can be connected to aDatakit II VCS, BNS-2000, or BNS-1000 node via modem, DSU, or FOM as follows:


— The AWJ6 I/O board provides three RS-232-C DTE ports

— The AWJ7 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DTE ports (with NRZI)

— The AWJ17 I/O board provides four RS-232-C DTE ports

For RS-232-C connections:

— A B25FS-1MOD cable is connected to the upper 50-pin connector (J1) on the AWJ6,AWJ7 or AWJ17 I/O board.

— A SYNC4-M cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable to provide fourRS-232-C male connections.

— The SYNC4-M cable then connects directly to the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM. AnM25A cable may be used to extend the RS-232-C connections, if necessary.

NOTE: A subrate DSU operates at a speed of 19.2 Kbps or lower.

— At the remote location, the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM is connected to a host, a PDN,or other DTE device using an M25A cable.

For V.35 operation, the X.25 module for this application consists of a TN2094 main circuitpack and one of the following I/O boards:



For V.35 connections:

— Either a C25AS-MOD 25-pair shielded cable or a C25ASX-MOD 25-pair shielded cableis connected to the lower 50-pin connector (J2) of the AWJ5 or AWJ6 I/O board. Use thecable that is compatible with the available DSU. The C25AS-MOD cable provides aV.35 connector while the C25ASX-MOD provides an RS-449 connector at the DSU end.

— From the DSU, a four-wire private line connects to another DSU.

— At the remote DSU, the final connection to a V.35 DTE device is made with a CCITTV.35 cable.




To Modems,DSUs, or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD**

X.25

AWJ5

or A

WJ6

AWJ6

or A

WJ1

7

C25AS-MOD

To V.35Modem or DSU

J1

J2

J2

J1

SYNC4-M

M25A

DSUV.35

C25ASX-MOD

NC*

NC*

DSU

RS-

449



M25A

M25B


To V.35 DTE Devices

CCITT V.35

Private LineTo Host Computers,PDNs, or otherDTE Devices




FIGURE 4-6. From X.25 to Host, PDN, or V.35 DTE Device via Modem, DSU, or FOM


Standard Connections________________TABLE 4-5. Ordering Information: From X.25 to Host, PDN, or V.35 DTE Device viaModem, DSU, or FOM


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25AS-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-202, G-C

V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25ASX-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-203, G-C

RS-449-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________CCITT V.35 V.35 M G-121, G-Q

V.35 F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________General Procedure for Cabling X.25P Module to V.35 DTE Device

The following procedure gives the sequence of steps for cabling the X.25P module’s V.35 ports.These steps can be adapted or expanded as appropriate. Cable and adapter ordering informationfollows the cabling illustrations.

PROCEDURE 4-1. Cabling AWJ24 Ports

Requirements: Installation of AWJ24 I/O board and X.25P module.

1. Determine the connections from each V.35 I/O board port to the terminating device, asfollows:

A. Identify the device type at the terminating end of the connection.

B. Identify the connection path (directly wired or connected via modem or DSU).

C. Select the correct cables and adapters for the device type and path identified above byreferring to the following section, which gives a brief overview of cabling for thesupported configuration, a figure showing interconnections, and a table containingcable/adapter identification and ordering information.

2. Verify that the AWJ24 I/O board and its X.25P module board are correctly installed.

3. Label connectors and cables appropriately for your configuration; for example, label eachcable with the AWJ24 connector port number (1 to 4) to which it connects.

4. Make the connections.


Standard Connections________________Cabling an X.25P Module to a V.35 DTE Access Device

The cabling from an X.25P module in a node, MPC7, or MPC15 to an access device via a dataservice unit (DSU) uses the following:

an X.25P module consisting of an MC1D153A-1 main circuit pack and an AWJ24 I/O board.

an HD-2V.35M cable connected to the J2 or J6 on the AWJ24 I/O board, which determinesthe X.25P port used for this connection. Connector J2 (top) supports ports 1 and 2 (cable legsA and B, respectively); connector J6 (bottom) supports ports 3 and 4 (cable legs A and B,respectively).

a V.35 cable connecting each leg of the HD-2V.35M cable to the appropriate V.35 connectoron a DSU

The maximum cable length that can be used to connect a X.25P module to a modem or DSUis one hundred feet.

NOTE: The overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable cannot exceed 10 feet, and each of thetwo V.35 legs cannot exceed one foot. This cable length must be included as partof the maximum cable length.

At the remote end, the DSU is connected to an access device.



DSU(V.35)

HD-2V.35M

X.25

P

AWJ2

4

J6

J2

HD-2V.35M

DSU(V.35)

V.35

Private Line

A

B

(Port 1)

A

B

AccessDevice

C(s) C(e)

(Port 2)

(Port 3)

(Port 4)

Datakit II VCS,BNS-2000

Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, MPC15

Note: The maximum cable length between points C(s) and C(e) is shown in Table 3-1.

FIGURE 4-7. From X.25P Module via DSU to V.35 DTE Access Device


Standard Connections________________TABLE 4-6. Ordering Information

_ ________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ _________________________________________ ________________________________________

HD-2V.35M 50-pin-M G(222), G(AS)

2 V.35-M_ ________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G(170), G(T)

34-pin-F_ ________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________General Procedure for Cabling X.25P Module to RS-232-C Devices

The following procedure gives the sequence of steps for cabling the module’s RS-232-C ports.These steps can be adapted or expanded as appropriate. Cable and adapter ordering informationfollows the cabling illustrations.

PROCEDURE 4-2. Cabling CSD4 Ports

Requirements: Installation of CSD4 I/O board and X.25P module.

1. Determine the connections from each RS-232-C I/O board port to the terminating device, asfollows:

A. Identify the device type at the terminating end of the connection.

B. Identify the connection path (directly wired or connected via modem or DSU).

C. Select the correct cables and adapters for the device type and path identified above byreferring to the following section, which gives a brief overview of cabling for thesupported configuration, a figure showing interconnections, and a table containingcable/adapter identification and ordering information.

2. Verify that the CSD4 I/O board and its X.25P module board are correctly installed.

3. Label connectors and cables appropriately for your configuration; for example, label eachcable with the CSD4 connector port number (1 to 8) to which it connects.

4. Make the connections.


Standard Connections________________Cabling from X.25P Directly to a Host Computer, DTE Device, orRS-232-C DTE Device

Cabling from an X.25P module in a Datakit II VCS node cabinet, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15 to a host computer or other DTE device, can be configured as follows:

The X.25P module consists of a MC1D153A-1 main circuit pack and a CSD4 I/O distributionboard. See Appendix A and the following related figure for more information on I/Odistribution boards.

When cabling RS-232-C connections to host computers or other DTE devices, a B25FS-1MOD cable connects to the upper 50-pin connector (J2) on the CSD4 distribution board forports 1 through 4 and connects to the lower 50-pin connector (J3) for ports 5 through 8.

A SYNC4-M cable connects to the B25FS-1MOD. The SYNC4-M has four male 25-pinconnectors.

Each 25-pin connector on the SYNC4-M cable connects directly to the end device, or eachconnector can be extended using an M25A cable.






X.25

PC

SD4

J3

J2

To Host Computers,DTE Devices, orRS-232-C Device

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-M

M25A1234

SYNC4-M

M25A5678


FIGURE 4-8. From X.25P Directly to a Host Computer, DTE Device, orRS-232-C DTE Device


Standard Connections________________TABLE 4-7. Ordering Information: From X.25P Directly to a Host Computer, DTEDevice, or RS-232-C DTE Device

_ ____________________________________________________________________________ED5P055-31 Price Element

Cable/Adapter Description Group Number Code (PEC)_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90-M G(106), G(F) 2752-106, 27514

50-pin 90-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25FS-1MOD 50-pin 180-M G(200), G(C) 2752-200, 27512

50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-M 50-pin 90-F G(160), G(R) 2752-160, 27523

4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G(107), G(P) 2752-107, 27521

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________

For plenum cables, see the Ordering Quick Reference.


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Cabling from X.25P to a Host Computer or DTE Device via110 Patch Panel

Cabling from an X.25P module in a Datakit II VCS node cabinet, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15 to host computer or DTE device via a 110 patch panel can be configured asfollows:


A B25FS-1MOD cable connects to the upper 50-pin connector (J2) on the I/O distributionboard for ports 1 through 4 or to the lower 50-pin connector (J3) for ports 5 through 8.


An A25U cable extends from the 110 patch panel to the SYNC4-M cable at the other end.

A SYNC4-M cable connects to the A25U.

The SYNC4-M has four male 25-pin connectors. Each 25-pin connector on the SYNC4-Mcable connects directly to the end device, or each can be extended using an M25A cable.

If RS-232-C I/O ports are wired directly from the patch panel via a 3 or 4-pair "D" wire, anM25B cable connects to the DTE device.






B25FS-1MOD*

X.25

PC

SD4

J2

J3

To Host Computersor other

DTE Devices

SYNC4-M

M25A

RS-232-CIO

3- or 4-Pair"D" Wire

A25U

M25B

110 Patch Panel**

*After the first 25 feet, the B25FS-1MOD cable may be extended with a B25A cable.**110 patch panels are available with different interconnects.Before selecting cables, determine which interconnects are provided by your 110 patch panel.

FIGURE 4-9. From X.25P to a Host Computer or DTE Device via 110 Patch Panel


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________TABLE 4-8. Ordering Information: From X.25P to a Host Computer or DTE Devicevia 110 Patch Panel




50-pin 90-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90-M G(114), G(F) 2752-114, 27514


4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G(107), G(P) 2752-107, 27521

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G(108), G(P) 2752-108, 27521

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Standard Connections________________Cabling from X.25P to a Host Computer or RS-232-C DTE Devicevia Modem, DSU, or FOM

Cabling from an X.25P module in a Datakit II VCS node cabinet, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15 to a host computer or RS-232-C DTE device via a modem, DSU, or fiber opticmultiplexer (FOM) can be configured as follows:


For RS-232-C connections, a B25FS-1MOD cable connects to the upper 50-pin connector(J2) on the CSD4 I/O distribution board for ports 1 through 4 and to the lower 50-pinconnector (J3) for ports 5 through 8.

A SYNC4-M cable connects to the other end of the B25FS-1MOD cable to provide four RS-232-C male connections.

The SYNC4-M cable then connects directly to the modem, subrate DSU (which operates at aspeed of 19.2 Kbps or lower) or FOM. An M25A cable can be used to extend the RS-232-Cconnections, if necessary.

At the remote location, the modem, subrate DSU, or FOM connects to the host computer orother DTE device with an M25A cable.






X.25

PC

SD4

J2

J1


M25A

M25B

Private LineTo Host Computers,PDNs, or otherDTE Devices

To Modems,DSUs, or FOMs

B25FS-1MOD*

SYNC4-M

M25A1234

SYNC4-M

M25A5678


FIGURE 4-10. From X.25P to a Host Computer or RS-232-C Devicevia Modem, DSU, or FOM


Standard Connections________________TABLE 4-9. Ordering Information: From X.25P to a Host Computer or V.35 DTEDevice via Modem, DSU, or FOM





4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G(107), G(P) 2752-107, 27521

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Cabling an X.75 Module to an Access Device

The cabling from an X.75 Module in a node, MPC7, or MPC15 to an access device via a dataservice unit (DSU) uses the following:

an X.75 Module consisting of an MC1D151A-1 main circuit pack and an AWJ24 I/O board.

an HD-2V.35M cable connected to the J2 or J6 on the AWJ24 I/O board, which determinesthe X.75 port used for this connection. Connector J2 (top) supports ports 1 and 2 (cable legsA and B, respectively); connector J6 (bottom) supports ports 3 and 4 (cable legs A and B,respectively).

a V.35 cable connecting each leg of the HD-2V.35M cable to the appropriate V.35 connectoron a DSU

The maximum cable length that can be used to connect a X.75 Module to a modem or DSU isdetermined by the data rate. (See Table 4-5.) The length is measured between points C(s) andC(e) shown in Figure 4-6.

NOTE: The overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable cannot exceed 10 feet, and each of thetwo V.35 legs cannot exceed one foot. This cable length must be included as partof the maximum cable length.

At the remote end, the DSU is connected to an access device.

TABLE 4-10. Cable Length Restrictions

_ ______________________________Maximum

Data Rate Cable Length (ft)_ _______________________________ ______________________________2.0 Mbps 20

1.5 Mbps 40

1.0 Mbps 60

<=500 Kbps 100_ ______________________________



DSU(V.35)

HD-2V.35M

X.75

AWJ2

4

J6

J2

HD-2V.35M

DSU(V.35)

V.35

Private Line

A

B

(Port 1)

A

B

AccessDevice

C(s) C(e)

(Port 2)

(Port 3)

(Port 4)



Note: The maximum cable length between points C(s) and C(e) is shown in Table 4-5.

FIGURE 4-11. Cabling an X.75 Module via a DSU to an Access Device


Datakit II VCS, MPC7, MPC15, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________TABLE 4-11. Ordering Information: Cabling an X.75 Module via a DSU to an AccessDevice

_ ________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ _________________________________________ ________________________________________

HD-2V.35M 50-pin-M G(222), G(AS)

2 V.35-M_ ________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G(170), G(T)

34-pin-F_ ________________________________________


________________Trunk Connections


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 5-4

Overview 5-4

Trunk Cabling Configurations 5-19

Fiber Trunks:• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SFT 5-20• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-HS 5-22

Wire Trunks:• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64:

RS-232-C Interface 5-26• Datakit II VCS or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64: V.35 Interface 5-29• Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-DDS: RS-232-C Interface 5-33• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT:

RS-232-C Interface 5-36• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: V.35 Interface 5-39• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT:

RS-422/449 Interface 5-42• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT:

G.703/G.704/G.706 Interface 5-47• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1:

V.35 Interface 5-50• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1:

RS-422/449 Interface 5-52• Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-PQ:

V.35 Interface 5-55• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3 5-57• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A 5-59• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A via ATM 5-61• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3S 5-63• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3 5-65


________________• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A 5-67• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A via ATM 5-69• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3S 5-71• BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3I 5-73

SAM8, SAM16, or SAM64:• Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM8 or SAM16 with

SAMML or SAMSL: RS-232-C Interface 5-76• Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM64 with SAMML

or SAMSL: RS-232-C Interface 5-78• Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node with SAMML or SAMSL:

V.35 Interface 5-80


________________Trunk Connections

This chapter explains how to cable trunk connections between a Datakit II VCS node, a BNS-1000 node, a BNS-2000 node and:

Datakit II VCS nodes

Multipurpose Concentrators (MPC7 and MPC15)

SAMs (SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, VDM-SAM504)

ISN Concentrators

BNS-1000 nodes

BNS-2000 nodes


Trunk cabling information can be easily found in the following manner:

If you have not selected a trunk module for a given application, see Trunk Recommendations(in the Overview section of this chapter) first. It contains a table of general recommendationsfor selecting the proper trunk to use in each type of connection.

In the Guide to Trunk Connections (in the Overview section of this chapter), refer to thesubsection that covers the type of connection to be cabled (such as BNS-2000 to BNS-1000)to find the trunk modules supported.

Find the trunk interface that best meets your trunking needs (for example, RS-232-C, V.35,RS-449) in the reference table.

Then, refer to this chapter’s table of contents. This table of contents has been designed as aneasy reference to find the desired configuration and should be used in the following way:

1. This chapter’s table of contents is divided into major headings that are defined by theoverall high-level connection. First, identify the heading that shows the type of node(Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000) from which the trunk connection originates.

2. Then, select the specific application by identifying the trunk interface and the connectioncharacteristics (for example, Trunk-64 with an RS-232-C interface).

3. Proceed to the appropriate subsection.

4. Each subsection provides a brief description of the cabling for that application, a pictorialrepresentation of the interconnections, and a table that contains cable (and adapter)ordering information.


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000,

and BNS-2000

Overview

This overview is divided into three sections:

Trunk modules

This section contains a list of the trunk modules available for fiber and wire trunks. Inaddition, figures are presented that illustrate the trunk interfaces between Datakit II VCSnodes, BNS-1000 nodes, BNS-2000 nodes and other cabinets in the network (for example,nodes, concentrators, multiplexers, and so forth).

Trunk recommendations

This section contains a table showing which trunk modules are best suited, based on trunkspeed requirements, for connections between Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000nodes and other Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000 nodes, Multipurpose Concentrators,SAMs, and ISN Concentrators.

Guide to trunk connections

This section contains more detailed information regarding the individual trunk moduleselected (speed ranges, interface types supported, and I/O boards).

Trunk Modules

A Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, or BNS-2000 network is defined as a Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000,or BNS-2000 node connected to one or more of any of the following:

another Datakit II VCS node

another BNS-1000 node

another BNS-2000 node

a Multipurpose Concentrator

a SAM

an ISN Concentrator


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________There are several different trunk modules available. These trunk modules are divided into twomain groups, fiber trunks and wire trunks. The following trunk modules are currently available:

Fiber Trunks

— Trunk-HS (for use in the node)

— HS-Trunk (for use in the SAM)

— SFT (Standard Fiber Trunk)

Wire Trunks

— SWT (Standard Wire Trunk)

— Trunk-64

— Trunk-T1 (for use in the node)

— T1-Trunk (for use in the SAM)

— SAMSL (SAM Single-Link Trunk for use in the SAM)

— SAMSL-N (for use in the node)

— SAMDL (SAM Dual-Link Trunk)

— SAMML (SAM Multiport-Link Trunk)

— Trunk-T3

— Trunk-T3S

— Trunk-T3A

— Trunk-T3I

— Trunk-E3

— Trunk-E3S

— Trunk-E3A

— Trunk-PQ

The fiber trunks provide the highest transmission rates but are limited to about 3Km in length.Wire trunks are used when the transmission distance exceeds 3Km or where installation of fiber isnot practical. Specific trunk recommendations are provided later in this section.


Trunk Connections________________The following figures illustrate the trunk interfaces between various nodes.

KEY:

optical fiber

wire

Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000, or


SFT

SWT

Trunk-T1


SFT

SWT

Trunk-T1

Trunk-64 Trunk-64

Datakit VCS

Trunk-64 Trunk-64

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ

Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

FIGURE 5-1. BNS-2000 Node to BNS-2000 Node, BNS-1000, Datakit II VCS, or Datakit VCS


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Datakit II VCS

SFT

SWT

Trunk-HS

Trunk-T1

Trunk-DDS

Trunk-64

Trunk-PQ

Datakit II VCS

Trunk-HS

Trunk-T1

Trunk-DDS

Trunk-64

SFT

SWT

Trunk-HS

Trunk-T1

Trunk-DDS

Trunk-64

Trunk-PQ

Datakit VCS

Trunk-HS

Trunk-T1

Trunk-DDS

Trunk-64

KEY:

optical fiber

wire

FIGURE 5-2. Datakit II VCS to Datakit II VCS, or Datakit VCS


Trunk Connections________________

Trk-T3/E3



Trk-T3I

Trk-T3S/E3S

Trk-T3/E3

Trk-T3I

Trk-T3S/E3S

FIGURE 5-3. BNS-2000 Node to BNS-2000 Node: Direct Connection

Trunk-T3A/E3A



Trunk-T3A/E3AATMSwitch

FIGURE 5-4. BNS-2000 Node to BNS-2000 Node: ATM Network


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________The following figure illustrates trunk interfaces between a Datakit II VCS node and MultipurposeConcentrators, ISN Concentrators, and SAMs.

TRUNK-HS

SFT

optical fiber

wire

KEY:

MultipurposeConcentrator

MPC7 or MPC15

SWTMultipurposeConcentrator

MPC7 or MPC15

CCOMLocal ISN

Concentrator

TIMRemote ISNConcentrator

SAMML

SAMML*

SAMSL-N

Trunk-T1

HS-Trunk

T1-Trunk

SAMSL

SAMSL

SAMSL

SAM64, SAM504, or VDM-SAM504

ACM

ACM

SAM8

SAM8

Datakit II VCS

SFT

SWT

SFT

SWT

Trunk-HS

SAMML*

SAMSL-N CRA1 orCRA2 SAM16

CRA1 orCRA2 SAM16

CRA1 orCRA2 SAM16

SAMSL-N ACM SAM8

SAMDL SAM64SAMML





* A SAMML can connect up to eight SAMs to the node.

FIGURE 5-5. Trunk Interfaces Between a Datakit II VCS Node, Concentrators, and SAMs


Trunk Connections________________The following figure illustrates trunk interfaces between a BNS-2000 node, SAMs, andMultipurpose Concentrators (MPC7 or MPC15).

KEY:

optical fiber

wire


MPC7 or MPC15SWT

SFT

SWT

SFT

Trunk-HS

Trunk-T1


HS-Trunk

T1-Trunk

SAM64, SAM504, orVDM-SAM504

SAM64, SAM504, orVDM-SAM504


MPC7 or MPC15

FIGURE 5-6. BNS-2000 Node to SAMs and MPCs


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Trunk Recommendations

The following trunks are recommended for the traffic loads and applications indicated. Forfurther information about trunk selection see the Planning Guide.

TABLE 5-1. Datakit II VCS Recommended Trunks

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Trunking from Trunk Speed Requirement_ ________________________________________________________

Datakit II VCS Node to 8.64 M 2.048 M 1.544–2.048 M 56 K–1544 M 64 K < 56 K_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________BNS-2000 Series M1 SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT SWT

Shelf (w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ_ ____________________________________________________________________________Datakit II VCS Node SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT SWT

Trunk-HS (w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ

Trunk-64 Trunk-64

Trunk-DDS Trunk-DDS_ ____________________________________________________________________________Datakit VCS Node Trunk-HS Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-64 Trunk-64

Trunk-DDS Trunk-DDS_ ____________________________________________________________________________BNS-1000 Node SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT SWT

Trunk-HS (w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ

Trunk-64 Trunk-64_ ____________________________________________________________________________MPC7, MPC15, or SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT SWT

ISN Concentrator** (LIM) (LIM) (LIM) (LIM) (LIM) (LIM)

(w/AWJ33)_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM64, SAM504 Trunk-HS — Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1_ ____________________________________________________________________________

** SWT Module with AWJ33 I/O board connects only to MPC7 and MPC15.


Trunk Connections________________TABLE 5-2. Series M1 Shelf Recommended Trunks

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Trunking from Trunk Speed Requirement_ ____________________________________________________________________________

BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf to 8.64 M 2.048 M 1.544–2.048 M 56 K–1544 M 56 K_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________BNS-2000 Series M1 SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT

Shelf (w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ_ ____________________________________________________________________________Datakit II VCS Node SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT

(w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ_ ____________________________________________________________________________Datakit VCS Node Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1_ ____________________________________________________________________________BNS-1000 Node SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT

(w/AWJ33) Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1

Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ Trunk-PQ_ ____________________________________________________________________________MPC7, MPC15 SFT SWT SWT SWT SWT

(LIM) (LIM) (LIM) (LIM) (LIM)

(w/AWJ33)_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM64, SAM504 Trunk-HS — Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1 Trunk-T1_ ____________________________________________________________________________

TABLE 5-3. Series M2 Shelf Recommended Trunks

__________________________________________________________Trunking Between Trunk Speed Requirement

BNS-2000_ _______________________________

Series M2 Shelf and: 44.736 Mbps 34.368 Mbps____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf Trunk-T3/T3S/T3A Trunk-E3/E3S/E3A

Trunk-T3I__________________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Guide to Trunk Connections

This section provides an overview of the trunk modules supported for the various cablingconfigurations. It is organized into subsections by equipment type, as follows:

trunk connections between two Datakit II VCS nodes, two BNS-1000 nodes, or between aDatakit II VCS node and a BNS-1000 node

trunk connections to Multipurpose Concentrators

trunk connections to SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, and VDM-SAM504

trunk connections to ISN Concentrator

trunk connections between a BNS-2000 node and other nodes


Trunk Connections________________Trunk Connections between Two Datakit II VCS Nodes, Two BNS-1000 Nodes, or betweena Datakit II VCS Node and a BNS-1000 Node

The following table lists the trunk connections supported between two Datakit II VCS nodes, twoBNS-1000 nodes, or between a Datakit II VCS node and a BNS-1000 node. The trunk modulename is provided along with the speed, interface type, and the associated I/O board.

TABLE 5-4. Trunk Connections between Two Datakit II VCS Nodes, Two BNS-1000Nodes, or between a Datakit II VCS Node and a BNS-1000 Node

_ ____________________________________________________Interface Type I/O Board Trunk Module Speed (bps)_ _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________

Trunk-64a 1200, 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _______________________________________48K, 56K, 64K V.35 AWJ9_ ____________________________________________________

SWT 2400 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _______________________________________2400 to 2.048M V.35 AWJ9_ _______________________________________2400 to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ10_ _______________________________________2.048M G.703/G.704/G.706 AWJ33_ ____________________________________________________

Trunk-T1 56K to 2.048M V.35 AWJ4_ _______________________________________56K to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ4_ ____________________________________________________

SFT 8M fiber optic AWJ3_ ____________________________________________________Trunk-HS 8M fiber optic AWJ2_ ____________________________________________________Trunk-PQ 56K to 2.048M V.35 AWJ24_ ____________________________________________________

Note:

a The Trunk-64 module is only compatible with a controller softwarerelease of R2.1 or later.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Trunk Connections to Multipurpose Concentrators

The following table lists the trunk connections supported from a Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000node, or BNS-2000 node to a Multipurpose Concentrator. The trunk module name is providedalong with the speed, interface type, and the associated I/O board.

TABLE 5-5. Trunk Connections to Multipurpose Concentrators

_ ____________________________________________________Interface Type I/O Board Trunk Module Speed (bps)_ _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________

SWT 2400 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _______________________________________2400 to 2.048M V.35 AWJ9_ _______________________________________2400 to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ10_ _______________________________________2.048M G.703/G.704/G.706 AWJ33_ ____________________________________________________

SFT 8M fiber optic AWJ3_ ____________________________________________________


Trunk Connections________________Trunk Connections to SAMs

The following table lists the trunk connections supported from a Datakit II VCS node or BNS-1000 node to a SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, or VDM-SAM504. The trunk module nameis provided along with the speed, interface type, and the associated I/O board.

TABLE 5-6. Trunk Connections to SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, VDM-SAM504

_ ______________________________________________________Interface Type I/O Board Trunk Module Speed (bps)_ _______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

SAMMLa 1200 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ17_ _____________________________________56K to 64K V.35 AWJ9_ ______________________________________________________

SAMSLa 1200 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _____________________________________56K to 64K V.35 AWJ9_ ______________________________________________________56K V.35 AWJ4_ _____________________________________

V.35 AWJ4_ _______________________Trunk-T1 to SAM64b,SAM504c, orVDM-SAM504c 64K to 2.048M

RS-449 AWJ4_ ______________________________________________________Trunk-HSb 8M fiber optic AWJ2_ ______________________________________________________SAMDL 9600 to 19200 RS-232-C CEY4_ ______________________________________________________

Notes:

a SAM8 or SAM16 trunk connections are made using SAMML or SAMSLmodules located in the node. The SAMDL used in the SAM64 connectsonly to a SAMML module in the Datakit II VCS node.

b Use only with the SAM64, SAM504, or VDM-SAM504.

c SAM504 and VDM-SAM504 are not supported by BNS-1000.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000________________Trunk Connections to ISN Concentrator

The following table lists the trunk connections supported from a Datakit II VCS node or BNS-1000 node to an ISN Concentrator. The trunk module name is provided along with the speed,interface type, and the associated I/O board.

TABLE 5-7. Trunk Connections to ISN Concentrator

_ __________________________________________________Interface Type I/O Board Trunk Module Speed (bps)_ ___________________________________________________ __________________________________________________

SWT 2400 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _____________________________________2400 to 2.048M V.35 AWJ9_ _____________________________________2400 to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ10_ _____________________________________2400 to 2.048M G.703 AWJ33_ __________________________________________________

SFT 8M fiber optic AWJ3_ __________________________________________________


Trunk Connections________________Trunk Connections between a BNS-2000 Node and other Nodes

The following table lists the trunk connections supported between a BNS-2000 node, a Datakit IIVCS node, a BNS-1000 node, or a BNS-2000 node. The trunk module name is provided alongwith the speed, interface type, and the associated I/O board.

TABLE 5-8. Trunk Connections from BNS-2000 Node

_ _______________________________________________________________Interface Type I/O Board Trunk Module Speed (bps)_ ________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________

Trunk-T1a 56K to 2.048M V.35 AWJ4_ _________________________________________________56K to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ4_ _______________________________________________________________

SWTa 2400 to 19200 RS-232-C AWJ11_ _________________________________________________2400 to 2.048M V.35 AWJ9_ _________________________________________________2400 to 2.048M RS-449 AWJ10_ _________________________________________________2.048 G.703/G.704/G.706 AWJ33_ _______________________________________________________________

SFTa 8M fiber optic AWJ3_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-T3b 44.736M BNC coax CMC3_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-E3b 34M MicroBNC coax CMC13_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-PQa 2.048M V.35 AWJ24_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-HSa 8M fiber optic AWJ2_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-T3Sb 44.736M BNC coax CMC6B_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-T3Ib 44.736M BNC coax CMC6B and CMC14_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-T3Ab 44.736M BNC coax CMC15_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-E3Sb 34M MicroBNC coax CMC13_ _______________________________________________________________Trunk-E3Ab 34M Coax with BT connectors CMC16_ _______________________________________________________________

Notes:

a Connections from BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelves only.

b Connections from BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelves only.


________________Trunk Cabling Configurations

The remaining subsections in this chapter explain cabling configurations in detail, with a figureshowing the configuration and tables depicting ordering information for the cables and adapters.

You can configure a SAM64 or SAM504 from a Datakit II VCS node, a BNS-1000 node, or aBNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf with either fiber or wire trunks. See the appropriate subsections forinstructions on cabling with Trunk-HS and cabling with Trunk-T1.


Trunk Connections________________Configuration Details: Fiber Trunks

The following subsections explain cabling configurations in detail for fiber trunks, with figuresillustrating the configurations, and tables listing ordering information for their cables andadapters.

Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SFT: Fiber Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node or to a concentrator with anSFT module uses the following:

an SFT module consisting of an MC1D085A1 main circuit pack and an AWJ3 I/O board

FL2P-P fiber optic cables connecting the AWJ3 I/O board to the terminating device

The transmit side (T) of the I/O board is connected to the receive side (R) of the opposite end.

Several other methods that can be used for fiber cable distribution are not presented here.Because of building distribution requirements, fiber cross-connect panels, fiber extenders, andother fiber distribution devices might be needed. For more information regarding fiberdistribution products, see AT&T Lightguide Fiber Optic Components and Systems.

The following figures illustrate these configurations.

R

Datakit II VCS SFT

AWJ3

R

T T

ISNConcentrator

CC

OM



SFT

AWJ3

FIGURE 5-7. Datakit II VCS Node with SFT: Fiber Interface


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf SF

T

AWJ3



SFT

AWJ3

R R

T T

FIGURE 5-8. Series M1 Shelf with SFT: Fiber Interface


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-HS: Fiber Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node or to a SAM64, SAM504, orVDM-SAM504, or cabling a Series M1 Shelf to a SAM64, SAM504, or VDM-SAM504, with aTrunk-HS uses the following:

a Trunk-HS consisting of a TN1010 main circuit pack and an AWJ2 I/O board

— FL2P-P fiber optic cables connecting the AWJ2 I/O board to the terminating device

— For SAM64, the FL2P-P cable connects to the CEY1 I/O board.

— For SAM504 and VDM-SAM504, the FL2P-B cable connects to either theED2P471-30,G-1, or the ED1P472-30,G-1.

The ED2P472-30,G-1 module is used for transmitting up to 1 km.

The ED2P472-30,G-1 module is used for transmitting from 1 km to 3 km.

Several other methods that can be used for fiber cable distribution are not presented here.Because of building distribution requirements, fiber cross-connect panels, fiber extenders, andother fiber distribution devices might be needed. For more information regarding fiberdistribution products, see AT&T Lightguide Fiber Optic Components and Systems.




FL2P-P

Datakit II VCS

Trun

k-H

SAW

J2 SAM64

HS-TrunkC

EY1

SAM504 orVDM-SAM504ED

2P471-30, G1

HS-Trunk

ED2P472-30, G

1H

S-TrunkDatakit II VCS,Datakit VCS,

or BNS-1000

Trunk-HS

AWJ2

FL2P-P

FL2P-B

FL2P-B

(See Note)

(See Note)

(See Note)

Note: The AWJ2 and CEY1 I/O distribution boards require ST-type fiber connectors.The ED2P471-30,G1 and ED2P472-30,G1 I/O distribution boards requireBiconic Data Link Connectors.

FIGURE 5-9. Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-HS: Fiber Interface



BNS-2000 Series M1

Shelf Trun

k-H

SAW

J2 SAM64

HS-TrunkC

EY1

SAM504 orVDM-SAM504ED

2P471-30, G1

HS-Trunk

ED2P472-30, G

1H

S-TrunkFL2P-P

FL2P-B

FL2P-B

(See Note)

(See Note)

Note: The CEY1 I/O distribution board requires ST-type fiber connectors.The ED2P471-30,G1 and ED2P472-30,G1 I/O distribution boards requireBiconic Data Link Connectors.

FIGURE 5-10. Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-HS: Fiber Interface

TABLE 5-9. Ordering Information for Fiber Trunks

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________FL2P-P ST See table below

ST_ ____________________________________________________________________________FL2P-B ST See table below

biconic_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________TABLE 5-10. Identification of Standard Length FL2P-P and FL2P-B Cables

_ _______________________________________________FL2P-P Cable FL2P-B Cable

Comcode ComcodeLength (Feet) Length (Feet)_ ________________________________________________ _______________________________________________

2 104266408 2 105259204

4 104266476 4 104244959

6 104266424 8 105259220

8 104266432 10 104244967

10 104266440 15 104244975

15 104266457 20 104244983

20 104266465 25 104244991

25 104266473 30 104245006

30 104266481 35 104245014

35 104266499 40 104245022

40 104266507 50 104245030

50 104266523 75 104245048

75 104266556 100 104245055

100 104266564 125 105259238

200 104266606 150 105259253

500 104266721 175 105259261

1000 104266929 200 105259303

2000 104267323 600 104244999

3000 104267638_ _______________________________________________


Trunk Connections________________Configuration Details: Wire Trunks

The following subsections explain cabling configurations in detail for wire trunks, with figuresillustrating the configurations, and tables listing ordering information for their cables andadapters.

Datakit II VCS Node or BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64:RS-232-C Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf to another node with a Trunk-64and an RS-232-C interface uses the following:

a Trunk-64 module consisting of an MC1D105A1 circuit pack and an AWJ11 I/O board (fortransmission rates of up to 19.2 Kbps)

RS-232-C cabling originating at the I/O board

an M25AS-MOD cable linking the RS-232-C interface to a modem or DSU

an end point device using a Trunk-64 module or a Trunk-DDS module

an M25AS-MOD cable at the terminating end to link the remote modem to the end pointdevice

The following figure illustrates this configuration.



Datakit II VCSM25AS-MOD

Datakit II VCS

TRU

NK-

64AW

J11

Datakit VCS

TRU

NK-

DD

STR

UN

K-D

DS

ED5P

079-

30, G

1ED

5P07

9-30

, G1 A

B

NC*

P1

P2 NC*

A

B

NC*

(See Note)

Modem

Modem

~

Private Line

~

M25AS-MOD

(See Note)

P1

P2 NC*

TRU

NK-

64AW

J11

*NC = no connectionNote: The Trunk-64 module is only compatible with a Datakit II VCS software release of R2.1 or later.

FIGURE 5-11. Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-64: RS-232-C Interface



BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf Trun

k-64

AWJ1

1

P1

P2

M25AS-MOD

NC*

Trun

k-64

AWJ1

1

P1

(See Note)

Modem

Modem~

Private Line

~M25AS-MOD

P2 NC*

optical fiber

wire

KEY:

Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000,

or BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf

FIGURE 5-12. Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64: RS-232-C Interface


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64: V.35 Interface

Cabling a node to another node with a Trunk-64 and a V.35 interface uses the following:

A Trunk-64 module consisting of an MC1D105A1 circuit pack and an AWJ9 I/O board.

Cabling for the Trunk-64 originates at the P1 connector on the I/O board.

A CCITT V.35 cable is used to connect the P1 connector of the Trunk-64 to a DSU.

A CCITT V.35 cable is used to connect the remote DSU to the terminating device.

This trunk circuit may terminate on a Trunk-64 module or on a Trunk-DDS module.

— When terminating on a Trunk-64 circuit, the CCITT V.35 cable connects to Port P1 of theI/O board.

— When terminating on a Trunk-DDS circuit, the CCITT V.35 cable connects to Port B ofthe ED5P076-30, G-1 I/O board.

See the following figures for illustrations of these configurations.



Datakit II VCSCCITT V.35

Datakit II VCS

Trun

k-64

AWJ9

Datakit VCS

Trun

k-D

DS

Trun

k-D

DS

ED5P

079-

30, G

1ED

5P07

9-30

, G1 A

B

NC*

P1

P2 NC*

A

B

NC*

(See Note)

DSU

DSU ~

Private Line

~CCITT V.35

A

B

NC* T

runk

-64

A

WJ9

*NC=no connectionNote 1: The Trunk-64 module is only compatible with a controller software release of R2.1 or later.

FIGURE 5-13. Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-64: V.35 Interface



BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf Trun

k-64

AWJ9

P1

P2

CCITT V.35

NC*

Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000,

or BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf

Trun

k-64

AWJ9

P1

DSU(V.35)

DSU(V.35)

~

Private Line

~CCITT V.35

P2 NC*

(See Note)

FIGURE 5-14. Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-64: V.35 Interface


Trunk Connections________________TABLE 5-11. Ordering Information for Trunk-64


CCITT V.35 V.35 M G-121, G-Q

V.35 F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25AS-MOD 25-pin-F G-178, G-L

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-DDS: RS-232-C Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node to another Datakit II VCS node or to a Datakit VCS node with aTrunk-DDS module and an RS-232-C interface uses the following:

a Trunk-DDS module consisting of an MC5P033A1 circuit pack and an ED5P079-30,G1 I/O board* (for transmission rates of less than 56Kbps)

RS-232-C cabling originating at the ED5P079-30,G1 I/O board

an M25AS-MOD cable linking the RS-232-C interface to a modem

If the end point device is a Datakit VCS, it requires a Trunk-DDS module.

If the end point device is a Datakit II VCS, it can have either a Trunk-DDS or Trunk-64module.

an M25AS-MOD cable at the terminating end linking the remote modem to the end pointdevice


________________

* Although this 56K trunk is a 2-board set consisting of an additional UN221 circuit pack and an ED5P080-30, G1I/O board, the ED5P080-30, G1 I/O board is not cabled with this application.



Datakit II VCSM25AS-MOD

Datakit II VCS

TRU

NK-

64AW

J11

Datakit VCS

TRU

NK-

DD

STR

UN

K-D

DS

ED5P

079-

30, G

1ED

5P07

9-30

, G1 A

B

NC*

P1

P2 NC*

A

B

NC*

(See Note)

Modem

Modem~

Private Line

~M25AS-MOD

A

B

NC*TR

UN

K-D

DS

ED5P

079-

30, G

1

*NC = no connectionNote: The Trunk-64 module is only compatible with a Datakit II VCS software release of R2.1 or later.

FIGURE 5-15. Datakit II VCS Node with Trunk-DDS: RS-232-C Interface


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________TABLE 5-12. Ordering Information for Trunk-DDS

_ __________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ ___________________________________________ __________________________________________

M25AS-MOD 25-pin-F G(178), G(L)

25-pin-M_ __________________________________________



Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: RS-232-C Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node, or to a concentrator, with anSWT module and an RS-232-C interface uses the following:

an SWT module consisting of a TN2092 or a TN2092B circuit pack and an AWJ11 I/O board

RS-232-C cable originating at the P1 connector of the AWJ11 I/O board and connecting to amodem or DSU

At the remote end, the circuit is completed at an SWT module in the terminating device; theRS-232-C cable connects the AWJ11 I/O board P1 connector to the remote modem.

If the circuit connects to a trunk interface module (TIM) in an ISN Concentrator, the remotemodem connects to the 36-pin port of the TIM with an M10R cable.

See the following figures for illustrations of these configurations.



Datakit II VCS

SWT

AWJ1

1

P1

P2

RS-232-C

NC*

SWT

AWJ1

1Modem ~

Private Line

~ISN

Concentrator TIM

36-P

in P

ort

P1

P2 NC*

M10R

Modem

RS-232-CDatakit II VCS,

BNS-1000,BNS-2000


*NC = no connection

FIGURE 5-16. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT: RS-232-C Interface



RS-232-CModem ~

Private Line

~BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf AW

J11

P1

P2 NC*

SWT

RS-232-CModemDatakit II VCS,

BNS-1000,BNS-2000


AWJ1

1

P1

P2 NC*

SWT

*NC = no connection

FIGURE 5-17. Series M1 Shelf with SWT: RS-232-C Interface


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: V.35 Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node or to a concentrator with anSWT module and a V.35 interface uses the following:

an SWT module consisting of a TN2092 or a TN2092B circuit pack and an AWJ9 I/O board

one of three recommended DSUs: the SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, the Phoenix 1536, or theCOASTCOM D/I MUX

The Kentrox T-Serv CSU is recommended.

NOTE: It is important to establish whether the DSU/CSU has slide-lock or screw-lockconnections before ordering cables.

V.35 cable originating at the P1 connector of the AWJ9 I/O board and connecting to the DSU

NOTE: For the COASTCOM DSU, use the V.35-C cable instead of the V.35 cable. Theoverall length of the cable can not exceed 30 feet at 1.344 Mbps, or 15 feet at 1.544Mbps.

The DSU then connects to a CSU with:

— T1-DSU/CSU cable for a slide-lock connection

— T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable for a screw-lock connection

A CSU connects to a private line through one of three different network interfaces (NIs); thecable used to connect the CSU to the NI is dependent on the NI used:

— AT&T NI (8-pin) — T1-CSU/NI1 cable

— FCC NI (8-pin) — T1-CSU/NI2 cable

— 15-pin NI — T1-CSU/NI3 cable

At the remote end, the private line is connected to another NI. Select the appropriate cable(listed above) for the connection to the terminating end CSU.

— For a slide-lock connection, T1-DSU/CSU cable connects the remote DSU and CSU.

— For a screw-lock connection, a T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable connects the remote DSU andCSU.

For a trunk terminating on an SWT module, a V.35 cable connects to the AWJ9 I/O board P1port.

NOTE: For a COASTCOM DSU, use V.35-C cable instead of the V.35 cable. This cablecan not exceed 25 feet.

For a trunk terminating on an ISN Concentrator, the M14K cable connects the DSU to theTIM.




V.35(See Note 1)

T1Data

Service Unit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor

T1-DSU/CSU-SC(See Note 4)

ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

V.35

(See Note 1)Datakit II VCS,

BNS-1000,BNS-2000


SWT

AWJ9

P1

P2NC*

ISNConcentrator

TIM36-Pin Port

M14K

Datakit II VCS

SWT

AWJ9

P1

P2NC*

T1Data

Service Unit

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

*NC = no connectionNote 1: For a COASTCOM DSU, use V.35-C cable instead of V.35 cable.Note 2: Recommended DSUs are SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, and COASTCOM D/I MUX.Note 3: Recommended CSU is Kentrox T-Serv.Note 4: For DSU/CSU slide-lock connection use T1-DSU/CSU cable.

For DSU/CSU screw-lock connection use T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable.

FIGURE 5-18. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT: V.35 Interface



V.35(See Note 1)

T1Data

ServiceUnit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

V.35(See Note 1)

AWJ9

P1

P2NC*

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf AW

J9P1

P2 NC*

T1Data

ServiceUnit

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit



SWT

SWT

*NC = no connection

Note 1: For a COASTCOM DSU, use V.35-C cable instead of V.35 cable.Note 2: Recommended DSUs are SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, and COASTCOM D/I MUX.Note 3: Recommended CSU is Kentrox T-Serv.Note 4: For DSU/CSU slide-lock connection use T1-DSU/CSU cable.

For DSU/CSU screw-lock connection use T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable.

FIGURE 5-19. Series M1 Shelf with SWT: V.35 Interface


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: RS-422/449 Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node or to a concentrator with anSWT and RS-422/449 interface uses the following:

an SWT module consisting of a TN2092 or TN2092B circuit pack and an AWJ10 I/O board

high-speed modems or T1 DSU facilities for transmission to the terminating device

RS-422/449 cable originating at the AWJ10 I/O board P1 connector, and connecting to themodem or DSU. If a COASTCOM DSU is specified, special cable must be connected fromthe RS-422/449 cable to the DSU.

For high-speed modems, RS-422/449 cable connects the remote modem to the terminatingSWT module.

For T1 DSUs:

— Recommended DSUs are the SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, or theCOASTCOM D/I MUX.

— Kentrox T-Serv is the recommended CSU.


— RS-422/449 cable originates at the AWJ10 I/O board P1 connector and connects to theDSU. If a COASTCOM DSU is specified, special cable must be connected from the RS-422/449 cable to the DSU. This cable should not exceed 40 feet.

— The DSU then connects to a CSU with:

T1-DSU/CSU cable for a slide-lock connection

T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable for a screw-lock connection

— All high-speed T1 cabling from the CSU to the NI is dependent on the NI used:

AT&T NI (8-pin) — T1-CSU/NI1 cable

FCC NI (8-pin) — T1-CSU/NI2 cable

15-pin NI — T1-CSU/NI3 cable

— At the remote NI, connections to the DSU are as described above.

For a slide-lock connection, T1-DSU/CSU cable connects the remote DSU to a CSU.

For a screw-lock connection, T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable connects the remote DSU to aCSU.


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: RS-422/449 Interface (continued)

— At the remote end, RS-422/449 cable connects the DSU to the AWJ10 I/O board P1connection. For a COASTCOM DSU, special cable must be connected from the RS-422/449 cable.

— If the terminating device is an ISN Concentrator, the terminating end DSU is connectedwith an M20B cable. For a COASTCOM DSU, special cable must be connected from theRS-422/449 cable.


RS-449

ISNConcentrator TI

M36

-Pin

Con

nect

or

Modem

Modem

SWT

AWJ1

0SW

TAW

J10

P1

P2 NC*

P1

P2 NC*

RS-449

M20B

~


~Datakit II VCS



*NC = no connection

FIGURE 5-20. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT via Modem: RS-422/449 Interface



RS-449Modem ~

Private Line

~BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf AW

J10

P1

P2 NC*

SWT

RS-449ModemDatakit II VCS,

BNS-1000,BNS-2000


AWJ1

0

P1

P2 NC*

SWT

*NC = no connection

FIGURE 5-21. Series M1 Shelf with SWT via Modem: RS-422/449 Interface



RS-449(See Note 1)

T1Data

Service Unit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

RS-449(See Note 4)

SWT

AWJ10

P1

P2NC*

ISNConcentrator

TIM36-Pin C

onnector

M20B J12

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

SWT

AWJ1

0

P1

P2 NC*

Datakit II VCS



T1Data

Service Unit

FIGURE 5-22. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT via DSU: RS-422/449 Interface



RS-449(See Note 1)

T1Data

ServiceUnit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

RS-449(See Note 4)

AWJ10

P1

P2NC*

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf AW

J10

P1

P2 NC*

T1Data

ServiceUnit

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit



SWT

SWT

*NC = no connection

Note 1: For COASTCOM DSU, a special cable must be connected from the RS-422/449 cable to the DSU.Note 2: Recommended T1 DSUs are SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, and COASTCOM D/I MUX.Note 3: Recommended CSU is Kentrox T-Serv.Note 4: For COASTCOM DSU, a special cable must be connected from the DSU to the RS-422/449 cable.Note 5: For a slide-lock DSU/CSU connection, use T1-DSU/CSU cable.

For a screw-lock DSU/CSU connection, use T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable.

FIGURE 5-23. Series M1 Shelf with SWT via DSU: RS-422/449 Interface


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS or Series M1 Shelf with SWT: G.703/G.704/G.706 Interface

Cabling a node to another node or to a concentrator with an SWT module and a G.703/G.704/G.706 interface uses the following:

an SWT module consisting of a TN2092B circuit pack and an AWJ33 I/O board

either G703-75 coaxial cables or G703-120 twisted pair cables

— To use G703-75 cables, set the jumpers JP5 2–3, JP1 2–3, and JP2 1–2, JP7, JP8, JP9,and JP10. Figure 5-24 illustrates this configuration.

— To use G703-120 cables, set the jumpers JP5 1–2, JP3 2–3, JP4 1–2, and remove jumpersJP7, JP8, JP9, and JP10. Figure 5-25 illustrates this configuration.

To connect two trunks with no intervening transmission equipment, TX is always connectedto RX and RX is always connected to TX. Figure 5-26 illustrates this configuration.

SWT

(TN

2092

B)

AWJ3

3

TX

RX

G703-75

G703-75

To Network

G703-75

G703-75

G.703/G.704Transmission

Equipment(e.g., Multiplexer)

To Network

Datakit II VCSor


FIGURE 5-24. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT: G.703/G.704/G.706 Interfaceusing G703-75 Cables



SWT

(TN

2092

B)

AWJ3

3TX

RX

G703-120

To Network

G.703/G.704Transmission

Equipment(e.g., Multiplexer)

G703-120

G703-120

G703-120

To Network

Datakit II VCSor


FIGURE 5-25. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT: G.703/G.704/G.706 Interfaceusing G703-120 Cables

J3Ground

TXJ2

J4Ground

J1

SWT

(TN

2092

B)

AWJ3

3

RX

J3Ground

TXJ2

J4Ground

J1

SWT (TN

2092B)

AWJ33

RX



TX

RX

TX

RX

Datakit II VCSor


Note: J3 designates the 120 Ω RX screw terminal.J4 designates the 120 Ω TX screw terminal.

FIGURE 5-26. Datakit II VCS Node with SWT: G.703/G.704/G.706 Interfaceusing G703-120 Cables (no intervening transmission equipment)


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________TABLE 5-13. Ordering Information for SWT

_ _____________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ ______________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

RS-232-C 25-pin-F G(175), G(Q)

25-pin-M_ _____________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G(170), G(T)

34-pin-F

V.35-C 36-pin-M G(184), G(Q)

25-pin-M_ _____________________________________________________T1-DSU/CSU 15-pin-M G(183), G(AN)

15-pin-M_ _____________________________________________________T1-DSU/CSU-SC 15-pin-M G(227), G(AN)

15-pin-M_ _____________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI1 8-pin mod G(182), G(AE)

8-pin mod_ _____________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI2 8-pin mod G(180), G(AE)

8-pin mod_ _____________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI3 15-pin mod G(181), G(AE)

15-pin mod_ _____________________________________________________RS-449 RS-449 M G(171), G(T)

RS-449 F_ _____________________________________________________M10R 25-pin M Comcode: 25 feet 105164701

36-pin M 50 feet 105164693_ _____________________________________________________M14K 36-pin 90 M Comcode: 20 feet 105164636

V.35 M 40 feet 105164644_ _____________________________________________________M20B 36-pin 90 M Comcode: 20 feet 105164628

RS-449 M 40 feet 105164610_ _____________________________________________________Special cable RS-449 M Comcode: 405575523

RS-449 F_ _____________________________________________________G703-75 DIN 1.6/5.6 M G(226), G(BA)

DIN 1.6/5.6 M_ _____________________________________________________G703-120 butt G(265), G(BC)

butt_ _____________________________________________________



Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1: V.35 Interface

Cabling a node to another node or to a SAM with a Trunk-T1 module and a V.35 interface usesthe following:

a Trunk-T1 module consisting of a TN1015 circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O board(The AWJ4 I/O board has a physical 50-pin connector and a logical V.35 or RS-422/449interface; this section explains cabling for the V.35 interface.)

The recommended DSUs are the SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, the Phoenix 1536, or theCOASTCOM D/I MUX.

The recommended CSU is the Kentrox T-Serv.


A V.35 cable originates at the AWJ4 I/O board P1 connector.

A C25AS-MOD cable (or T1-DSU cable for the COASTCOM DSU) connects the P1connector to the DSU.

NOTE: For the COASTCOM DSU, use the T1-DSU cable instead of the C25AS-MODcable. The overall length of this cable can not exceed 30 feet at 1.344 Mbps, or 15feet at 1.544 Mbps.




All high-speed T1 cabling from the CSU to the NI depends on the NI used:




At the remote NI, connections to the CSU are as described above.

— For a slide-lock connection, the T1-DSU/CSU cable connects the remote DSU to a CSU.

— For a screw-lock connection, the T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable connects the remote DSU to aCSU.

The remote end DSU connection should be made with a C25AS-MOD cable (or T1-DSUcable for COASTCOM DSUs) to the AWJ4 I/O board P1 connector at the Trunk-T1 module.




C25AS-MOD(See Note 1)

T1Data

ServiceUnit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

C25AS-MOD(See Note 4)


Series M1 Shelf,or SAMs

Trunk-T1AW

J4

P1

P2NC*

Datakit II VCSor

BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf Tr

unk-

T1AW

J4

P1

P2 NC*

T1Data

ServiceUnit

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

*NC = no connection

Note 1: For a COASTCOM DSU, use T1-DSU cable instead of C25AS-MOD cable.Note 2: Recommended T1 DSUs are SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, and COASTCOM D/I MUX.Note 3: Recommended CSU is Kentrox T-Serv.Note 4: For COASTCOM DSU, use a T1-DSU cable.Note 5: For a slide-lock DSU/CSU connection, use T1-DSU/CSU cable.


FIGURE 5-27. Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1: V.35 Interface


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1: RS-422/449 Interface

Cabling a node to another node or to a SAM with a Trunk-T1 module and an RS-422/449interface uses the following:

a Trunk-T1 module consisting of a TN1015 circuit pack and an AWJ4 I/O board(The AWJ4 I/O board has a physical 50-pin connector and a logical V.35 or RS-422/449interface; this section explains cabling for an RS-422/449 interface.)

The recommended DSUs are the SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, the Phoenix 1536, and theCOASTCOM D/I MUX.

The recommended CSU is the Kentrox T-Serv.


RS-422/449 cabling originates at the AWJ9 I/O board P1 connector.

A C25ASX-MOD cable (or T1-DSU cable for the COASTCOM DSU) connects from the P1connector to the DSU.

NOTE: For the COASTCOM DSU, use the T1-DSU cable instead of the C25ASX-MODcable. This cable can not exceed 40 feet.




All high-speed T1 cabling from the CSU to the NI depends on the NI used:




At the remote NI, connections to the CSU are as described above:

— For a slide-lock connection, T1-DSU/CSU cable connects the remote DSU to a CSU.

— For a screw-lock connection, a T1-DSU/CSU-SC cable connects the remote DSU to aCSU.

The remote end DSU connection should be made with a C25ASX-MOD cable (or T1-DSUcable for COASTCOM DSUs) to the AWJ4 I/O board P1 connector at the Trunk-T1 module.




C25ASX-MOD(See Note 1)

T1Data

ServiceUnit

(See Note 2)

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit

(See Note 3)

~Private Line

~

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1 AT&TNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI1

FCCNI

8-Pin

T1-CSU/NI2

NI15-Pin

T1-CSU/NI3

C25ASX-MOD(See Note 4)

AWJ4

P1

P2NC*

Datakit II VCSor


AWJ4

P1

P2 NC*

T1Data

ServiceUnit

T1-DSU/CSUor


ChannelService

Unit


Series M1 Shelf,or SAMs

Trunk-T1Tr

unk-

T1

*NC = no connection

Note 1: For a COASTCOM DSU, use T1-DSU cable instead of C25ASX-MOD cable.Note 2: Recommended T1 DSUs are SCITEC Saturn D4/ESF, Phoenix 1536, and COASTCOM D/I MUX.Note 3: Recommended CSU is Kentrox T-Serv.Note 4: For a COASTCOM DSU, use T1-DSU cable.Note 5: For a slide-lock DSU/CSU connection, use T1-DSU/CSU cable.


FIGURE 5-28. Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-T1: RS-422/449Interface


Trunk Connections________________TABLE 5-14. Ordering Information for Trunk-T1 with V.35 Interface


C25AS-MOD 50-pin 180°-M G-202, G-C

V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-DSU/CSU 15-pin-M G-183, G-AN

15-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1 Clock Adapter 50-pin-M G-205

50-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI1 8-pin mod G-182, G-AE

8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI2 8-pin mod G-180, G-AE

8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-CSU/NI3 15-pin mod G-181, G-AE

15-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________C25AS 50-pin 180°-M G-120, G-C

V.35 M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SAM35 RS-449 M G-127, G-N

V.35 M_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-DSU 50-pin 180°-M G-185, G-Q

DB25 M_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-SAM64/DSU RS-449 G-187, G-Q

DB25 M_ ____________________________________________________________________________T1-DSU/CSU-SC 15-pin M G-227, G-AN

15-pin M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Trunk Cabling Configurations________________Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-PQ: V.35 Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or Series M1 Shelf to another node with a Trunk-PQ and a V.35interface uses the following:

a Trunk-PQ consisting of an MC1D152A-1 main circuit pack and an AWJ24 I/O board

an HD-V.35M cable connected to the J2 (top) V.35 port on the AWJ24 I/O board

The AWJ24 I/O board has two 50-pin connectors, labeled J2 and J6. Only the J2 connector isused for the Trunk-PQ. The HD-V.35M cable provides one V.35 port to be connected to a V.35DSU. The following figure illustrates this configuration.

NOTE: The overall length of the HD-V.35M cable cannot exceed 10 feet.

J2

Trun

k-PQ

AWJ2

4

HD-V.35 M DSUV.35

DSUV.35

J2

Trun

k-PQ

AWJ2

4

HD-V.35 M

Datakit II VCSor


Datakit II VCSBNS-1000,

orBNS-2000

Series M1 Shelf

FIGURE 5-29. Datakit II VCS Node or Series M1 Shelf with Trunk-PQ: V.35 Interface


Trunk Connections________________TABLE 5-15. Ordering Information for Trunk-PQ

_ _______________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ ________________________________________ _______________________________________

HD-V.35M 50-pin-M G(251)

V.35 M_ _______________________________________



Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with a Trunk-T3 uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-T3 module consisting of a CMA9 or CMA9B circuit pack and a CMC6 or CMC6BI/O board

DDM-1000 unit(s) for transmission via private line to the terminating device

a pair of 728B coaxial cables originating on the J2 and J3 connectors of the I/O board andconnecting to a DDM-1000

NOTE: 728B-90 coaxial cable is used if a 90° connector is required.

One coaxial cable of the pair is the transmit side, J2 (T); the other coaxial cable is the receiveside, J3 (R).

at the remote end, a pair of 728B coaxial cables connecting the terminating DDM-1000 to theI/O board J2 and J3 ports


— The DDM-1000 facility provides the crossover end-to-end transmit and receive.

— With no DDM-1000 and a straight connection, each transmit coaxial cable must beconnected with the receive connector for the opposite end.




728B

DDM-1000

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC6/CMC6B

J3 J2

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J3 J2

DS3 Facility

Trunk-T3

R T

R T

CMC6/CMC6B

Trunk-T3

728B

728B

728BDDM-1000 ~ ~

FIGURE 5-30. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-T3A module consisting of a CMA18 circuit pack and a CMC15 I/O board


a pair of 728B coaxial cables originating on the J3 and J4 connectors of the I/O board andconnecting to a DDM-1000


One coaxial cable of the pair is the transmit side, J4 (TX); the other coaxial cable is thereceive side, J3 (RX).








728B

DDM-1000

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC15

J3 J4

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J3 J4

DS3 Facility

Trunk-T3A

RX TX

RX TX

CMC15

Trunk-T3A

728B

728B

728BDDM-1000 ~ ~

FIGURE 5-31. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A via ATM

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A through anATM switch uses the following:

a Trunk-T3A module consisting of a CMA18 circuit pack and a CMC15 I/O board

an ATM switch with a DS3 line card (LC) for transmission via the ATM network to theterminating device

a pair of 728B coaxial cables originating on the J3 and J4 connectors of the I/O board andconnecting to the DS3 LC on the ATM switch



at the remote end, a pair of 728B coaxial cables connecting the DS3 LC on the ATM switch tothe terminating I/O board J3 and J4 ports





728B

ATMSwitch

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC15

J3 J4

DS3 Facility

Trunk-T3A

RX TX

728B

~ ~

DS3 Line C

ard

728B

ATMSwitch

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC15

J3 J4

Trunk-T3A

RX TX

728B

DS3 Line C

ard

FIGURE 5-32. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3A via ATM


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3S

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3S uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-T3S module consisting of a CMA13 circuit pack and a CMC6 or CMC6B I/O board


a pair of 728B coaxial cables originating on the J2 and J3 connectors of the I/O board andconnecting to the DDM-1000










728B

DDM-1000

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC6/CMC6B

J3 J2

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J3 J2

DS3 Facility

Trunk-T3S

R T

R T

CMC6/CMC6B

Trunk-T3S

728B

728B

728BDDM-1000 ~ ~

FIGURE 5-33. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3S


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3 uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-E3 module consisting of a CMA9B circuit pack and a CMC13 I/O board

distribution frame (DF)

a pair of 75 Ω micro-coaxial cables originating on the J2 and J3 connectors of the I/O boardand connecting to the DF

One micro-coaxial cable of the pair is the transmit side, J2 (TX); the other micro-coaxial cableis the receive side, J3 (RX).

at the remote end, a pair of 75 Ω micro-coaxial cables connecting the terminating DF to theI/O board J2 and J3 ports




75 Ω

DF

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC13

J3 J2

DF

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J3 J2

E3 Facility

Trunk-E3

RX TX

RX TX

~~

CMC13

Trunk-E3

75 Ω

75 Ω

75 Ω

FIGURE 5-34. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-E3A module consisting of a CMA18 circuit pack and a CMC16 I/O board

distribution frame (DF)

a pair of ATM-E3-S coaxial cables originating on the J5 and J6 connectors of the I/O boardand connecting to the DF


at the remote end, a pair of ATM-E3-S coaxial cables connecting the terminating DF to theI/O board J5 and J6 ports




DF

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC16

J5 J6

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J5 J6

E3 Facility

Trunk-E3A

RX TX

RX TX

CMC16

Trunk-E3A

DF ~ ~

ATM-E3-S

ATM-E3-S

ATM-E3-S

ATM-E3-S

FIGURE 5-35. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A via ATM

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A through anATM switch uses the following:

a Trunk-E3A module consisting of a CMA18 circuit pack and a CMC16 I/O board

an ATM switch with an E3 line card (LC) for transmission via the ATM network to theterminating device

a pair of ATM-E3-S or ATM-E3-BNC coaxial cables originating on the J5 and J6 connectorsof the I/O board and connecting to the E3 LC on the ATM switch


at the remote end, a pair of ATM-E3-S or ATM-E3-BNC coaxial cables connecting the E3 LCon the ATM switch to the terminating I/O board J5 and J6 ports




ATMSwitch

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC16

J5 J6

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J5 J6

E3 Facility

Trunk-E3A

RX TX

RX TX

~~

CMC16

Trunk-E3A

ATM-E3-S or ATM-E3-BNC

ATM-E3-S or ATM-E3-BNCE3 Line C

ard

ATMSwitch

E3 Line Card



FIGURE 5-36. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3A via ATM


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3S

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3S uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-E3S module consisting of a CMA13 circuit pack and a CMC13 I/O board

a distribution frame (DF)

a pair of 75 Ω micro-coaxial cables originating on the J2 and J3 connectors of the I/O boardand connected via a DF, or directly to the network.

One micro-coaxial cable of the pair is the transmit side, J2 (TX); the other micro-coaxial cableis the receive side, J3 (RX).

at the remote end, a pair of 75 Ω micro-coaxial cables connecting the terminating DF to theI/O board J2 and J3 ports




75 Ω

DF

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

CMC13

J3 J2

DF

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J3 J2

E3 Facility

Trunk-E3S

RX TX

RX TX

~~

CMC13

Trunk-E3S

75 Ω

75 Ω

75 Ω

FIGURE 5-37. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-E3S


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3I

Cabling a BNS-2000 Series M2 Shelf to another Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3I uses thefollowing:

a Trunk-T3I module consisting of

— a CMA14 (egress) circuit pack with a CMC6B (egress) I/O board

— a CMA16 (ingress) circuit pack with a CMC14 (ingress) I/O board

— ribbon cable connecting the egress I/O board to the ingress I/O board

DDM-1000 units for transmission via private line to the terminating device

a pair of 728B coaxial cables originating on the J2 and J3 connectors of the I/O board andconnecting to the DDM 1000

NOTE: 728B-90 coaxial cable is used if a 90° connector is required



NOTE: 728B-90 coaxial cable is used if a 90° connector is required






BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J2(T)

CMA14

CMC6B

CMA16

CMC14J3(R)

P1 P1

Ribbon Cable728B

728B

DDM-1000

BNS-2000Series M2

Shelf

J2(T)

DS3 Facility

CMA14

~~

CMC6B

CMA16

CMC14J3(R)

P1 P1

Ribbon Cable

DDM-1000

728B

728B

FIGURE 5-38. Series M2 Shelf with Trunk-T3I


Trunk Cabling Configurations________________TABLE 5-16. Ordering Information for E3 and T3 Trunks

_ ____________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

Trunk Type DescriptionAdapter Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________

Trunk-E3/E3S 75 Ω Micro-coaxial cable N11221-S35-B20_ ____________________________________________________________________Trunk-E3A ATM-E3-BNC Coaxial cable with G(268),G(BD)

one BT connector and

one BNC connector_ ____________________________________________ATM-E3-S Coaxial cable with G(267),G(BD)

BT connectors_ ____________________________________________________________________Trunk-T3/T3A/T3S/T3I 728B Coaxial cable G(233),G(AV)_ ____________________________________________

728B-90 90° Coaxial cable G(261),G(AV)_ ____________________________________________________________________


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM8 or SAM16 with SAMML orSAMSL: RS-232-C Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or BNS-1000 node to a SAM8 or SAM16 with a SAMML orSAMSL and an RS-232-C interface uses the following:

A SAMSL module consisting of an MC1D090A1B circuit pack and an AWJ11 I/O board.This combination provides one RS-232 circuit.

A SAMML module consisting of an MC1D091A1 circuit pack and an AWJ17 I/O board.This combination provides eight RS-232-C circuits.

For the SAMSL, cabling originates at the P1 connector on the I/O board. An RS-232-C cableconnects the SAMSL to a modem.

For the SAMML, cabling originates at the J1 and J2 connectors on the I/O board.

B25FS-1MOD cables connect each of the SAMML’s I/O board ports to SYNC4-M cables.Each of the 25-pin connectors on the SYNC4-M cable may then be connected to a modem.

The SAM8 or SAM16 at the terminating end is connected to a modem or DSU with anRS-232-C cable. Use the RS-232-C connector at the rear of the SAM8 or SAM16 for theconnection.





SAM

ML

AWJ1

7SA

MSL

AWJ1

1

J1

J2

P1

P2 NC*

SYNC4-M

B25FS-1MOD**

RS-232-C

SAM8

EXAC

M

RS-232-C

V.35 NC*

Modem

Modem

~

Private Line

~SAM16

CR

A2

optical fiber

wire

KEY:

RS-232-C

RS-232-C


FIGURE 5-39. Cabling Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM8 or SAM16 UsingSAMML or SAMSL with RS-232-C Interface


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM64 with SAMML or SAMSL:RS-232-C Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or BNS-1000 node to a SAM64 with a SAMML or SAMSL andan RS-232-C interface uses the following:

A SAMSL module consisting of an MC1D090A1B circuit pack and an AWJ11 I/O board.This combination provides one RS-232-C circuit.

A SAMML module consisting of an MC1D091A1 circuit pack and an AWJ17 I/O board.This combination provides eight RS-232-C circuits.

For the SAMSL, cabling originates at the P1 connector on the I/O board. An RS-232-C cableconnects the SAMSL to a modem.

For the SAMML, cabling originates at the J1 and J2 connectors on the I/O board.

A B25FS-1MOD cable connects each of the SAMML’s I/O board ports to SYNC4-M cables.Each of the 25-pin connectors on the SYNC4-M cable may then be connected to a modem.

The SAM64 at the terminating end may use a SAMSL or SAMDL trunk module.

— If the SAM64 uses a SAMSL module, the remote modem may be connected using anM25BS cable.

— If the SAM64 uses a SAMDL module, an M25XS cable connects to the SAM64’s I/Oboard. Each of the 25-pin connectors on the M25XS cable then may be connected tomodems sequentially as shown in the following figure.

— RS-232-C cables can be used to extend from the M25XS to the modems.



Trunk Cabling Configurations________________SA

MM

LAW

J17

SAM

SLAW

J11

J1

J2

P1

P2 NC*

SYNC4-M

B25FS-1MOD**

RS-232-C

SAM64

~

Private Line

~

SAM

DL

CEY

4SA

MSL

CEY

3 J1

J1

M25BS

M25XS

RS-232-C


RS-232-C

Modem2

Modem1

Modem4

Modem3

1234

Modem2

Modem1

SAMDL

SAM

DL

CEY

4SA

MSL

CEY

3 J1

J1

M25BS

M25XS

RS-232-C

RS-232-C Modem4

Modem3

1

2

1

2


FIGURE 5-40. Cabling Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node to SAM64 Using SAMMLor SAMSL with RS-232-C Interface


Trunk Connections________________Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node with SAMML or SAMSL: V.35 Interface

Cabling a Datakit II VCS node or a BNS-1000 node to a SAM8, SAM16, SAM64, SAM504, orVDM-SAM504 with a SAMSL or SAMML module and a V.35 interface uses the following:

A SAMSL module consisting of an MC1D090A1B circuit pack and an AWJ9 I/O board.

A SAMML module consisting of an MC1D091A1 circuit pack and an AWJ32 I/O board.

With the AWJ9 module, cabling originates at the P1 connector on the I/O board and connectsto a V.35 interface on a DSU with a V.35 cable.

With the AWJ32 module, cabling originates at the P1 and P2 connectors on the I/O board andconnects to a V.35 interface on a DSU with a V.35 cable.

At the remote end, the DSU may connect to a SAMSL module in a SAM64, SAM504, orVDM-SAM504. The SAMSL function is integrated into the SAM8 via the EXACM and intothe SAM16 via the CRA1.

— If the trunk terminates on a SAM8, the remote modem connects to the V.35 port on theEXACM panel at the rear of the unit with a V.35 cable.

— If the trunk terminates on a SAM16, the remote modem connects to the V.35 port on theCRA1 panel at the rear of the unit with a V.35 cable.

— If the trunk terminates on a SAM64, the remote modem or DSU connects to Port J1 on theCEY2 I/O board of the SAM64 with a V.35-MM cable.

— If the trunk terminates on a SAM504 or VDM-SAM504, the remote DSU connects to theV.35 port on the panel of the SAMSL with a V.35-MM cable.





SAM

ML

AWJ3

2

V.35

SAM504 orVDM-SAM504** SA

MSL

EAA2

DSU(V.35) ~

Private Line

~SAM64

SAM

SLC

EY2

V.35 V.35-MM

SAM8

EXAC

M

P1

P2

SAM

SLAW

J9

P1

P2 NC*

DSU(V.35)

J1 V.35-MM

V.35 V.35

RS-232-CNC*

SAM16

CR

A1 V.35 V.35

*NC=no connection**Not supported by BNS-1000

FIGURE 5-41. Cabling Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000 Node with SAMML or SAMSL:V.35 Interface


Trunk Connections________________TABLE 5-17. Ordering Information for SAMML or SAMSL


B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F



4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________RS-232-C 25-pin-F G-175, G-Q

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25BS 25-pin-M G-119, G-L

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25XS 25-pin-M G-219, G-AL

2 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35-MM 34-pin-M G-220, G-T

34-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Host Computer Connections


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7,and MPC15 6-5

Overview 6-5

Cabling from CPM-HS to:• Currently Supported Host 6-7


________________Host Computer Connections

This chapter explains how to cable host computers to the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node,BNS-2000 node, MPC7, or MPC15.

The following multiplexed interface is currently available for connection to host computers:

CPM-HS (Computer Port Module-High Speed) is an interface module that uses opticalfiber.

Cable Ordering Codes

The optical fiber cables used with the CPM-HS module are the FL2P-P and the FL2P-B. Thesecables are available in standard lengths as listed in the following table.

TABLE 6-1. Order Codes for Standard Length FL2P-P and FL2P-B Fiber OpticCables

_ ________________________________________________Cable Length (ft) FL2P-P Comcode FL2P-B Comcode_ _________________________________________________ ________________________________________________

2 104266408 105259204_ ________________________________________________4 104266476 104244959_ ________________________________________________6 104266424_ ________________________________________________8 104266432 105259220_ ________________________________________________

10 104266440 104244967_ ________________________________________________15 104266457 104244975_ ________________________________________________20 104266465 104244983_ ________________________________________________25 104266473 104244991_ ________________________________________________30 104266481 104245006_ ________________________________________________35 104266499 104245014_ ________________________________________________40 104266507 104245022_ ________________________________________________50 104266523 104245030_ ________________________________________________75 104266556 104245048_ ________________________________________________

100 104266564 104245055_ ________________________________________________Cable Length (ft) FL2P-P Comcode FL2P-B Comcode_ _________________________________________________ ________________________________________________

200 104266606 105259303_ ________________________________________________500 104266721_ ________________________________________________600 104244999_ ________________________________________________


Host Computer Connections________________TABLE 6-1. Order Codes for Standard Length FL2P-P and FL2P-B Fiber OpticCables (continued)

_ ________________________________________________1000 104266929_ ________________________________________________2000 104267323_ ________________________________________________3000 104267638_ ________________________________________________


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000,

BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15

The following section presents cabling configurations for host computers. This cablingconfiguration represents the required connections between the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000node, BNS-2000 node, MPC7, or MPC15 and the particular host computer.

Overview

The cabling for the hosts is determined by the specific host to be connected.

Interface Modules

The following interface modules are available for multiplexed host connections:

The CPM-HS module consists of a TN1009 or TN1009B main circuit pack and an AWJ2 I/Oboard that provides a fiber-optic connection to an AT&T host computer or other supportedvendor host. It is a high-speed computer port module—available for Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 nodes—that provides multiplexed host channels over optical fibercables.


The physical characteristics and configuration of the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node,BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 are presented below:

Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf

The Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, and BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf each have 15addressable slots.

MPC7

The MPC7 supports the same modules and I/O boards as the node. It supports a maximum offour interface modules.

MPC15

The MPC15 supports the same modules and I/O boards as the node. It supports a maximumof 12 interface modules.

Each of the CPM modules consists of one circuit pack which is installed in a slot in the front ofthe node and an associated I/O board mounted at the rear of the unit. Each module requires oneaddressable slot in the node.

For an illustration of the rear view of the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000


Host Computer Connections________________Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15, see Datakit II VCS, MPC7, and MPC15 in Chapter 1.


The first 25 feet of data cabling (wire cabling only) connected to the node must be shielded tomeet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI)requirements. If longer cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cables may beused after the first 25 feet.


Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, BNS-2000, MPC7, and MPC15________________Cabling from CPM-HS to Currently Supported Host

This section shows how to cable an currently supported host to the node cabinet, MPC7, orMPC15 using the CPM-HS.

Cabling for the CPM-HS may be configured as follows:

The CPM-HS for this application consists of a TN1009 or TN1009B circuit pack and anAWJ2 I/O distribution board.

Cabling originates at the two ST-type fiber-optic connectors on the I/O distribution board.An FL2P-P cable is connected to the I/O distribution board.

The other end of the FL2P-P cable may then be connected directly to the particular host.

As an alternative to the direct connection described above, the FL2P-P cable may beconnected to a fiber interconnect panel or fiber cross-connect panel for distribution.

A number of methods may be used for fiber cable distribution that are not presented here. Dueto building distribution requirements, fiber cross-connect panels, fiber extenders, and otherfiber distribution devices may be needed. For more information regarding fiber distributionproducts, see AT&T Lightguide Fiber Optic Components and Systems.

Final connection into the host must be made with ST-type connectors.

For more information regarding building distribution for fiber cables, refer to Chapter 8.



Host Computer Connections________________AW

J2



FiberInter-

ConnectPanel

CPM

FL2P-P

FiberInter-

ConnectPanel

FiberCross-

ConnectPanel

FL2P-P

FL2P-P

CurrentlySupported

Host

Appr

opria

te In

terfa

ce

FL2P-P FL2P-P

FIGURE 6-1. From CPM-HS to Currently Supported Host

TABLE 6-2. Ordering Information: CPM-HS to Currently Supported Host

_ ____________________________________________________________________________

ED5P055-31 Group NumberCable/Adapter Description or COMCODE_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

FL2P-P ST See Table 3-1.

ST_ ____________________________________________________________________________


________________LAN Interconnect Services and

ISN Bridging Connections


LAN Interconnect Services 7-4

Overview 7-4

Cabling from CPMML to:• DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100 7-8

Cabling from CPMML-HS to:• DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100 7-11

Cabling from FRM (V.35) to:• V.35 Access Device via DSU 7-14

Cabling from FRM (chT1) to:• CSU, DSX-1 Cross-Connect Device, or T1 MUX 7-19

Cabling from FRM (ChE1) to:• CSU, DSX-1 Device, or E1 MUX 7-22

Cabling from LPM to:• 10BASE-T Hub 7-28

Cabling from AI-T1 to:• DTF (SMDS Network) via CSU or DSX-1 Cross-Connect 7-29

Cabling from AI-T3 to:• DTF (SMDS Network) 7-31

Cabling from AI-E1 to:• DTF 7-32


________________Cabling from AI-E3 to:

• DTF 7-34

Cabling from AI-T3P to:• DTF 7-35

ISN Bridging Connections 7-37

Overview 7-37

Cabling from EBIM to:• Ethernet Network 7-39

Cabling from SLIM-B to:• StarLAN Network 7-40• StarLAN Network via 110 Patch Panel 7-42


________________LAN Interconnect Services

and ISN Bridging Connections

This chapter explains cabling for LAN Interconnect Services and ISN bridging connections via:

Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, 7-slot MultipurposeConcentrator (MPC7), and 15-slot Multipurpose Concentrator (MPC15)

ISN Concentrators


To find cabling information for specific LAN Interconnect Services and ISN bridgingconnections, refer to this chapter’s table of contents. This table of contents has been designed asan easy reference to find the desired configuration and is to be used in the following manner:

This chapter’s table of contents is divided into three major headings that have been defined atthe functional level. First, identify the heading that addresses the major function of yourapplication. The major functional level headings are as follows:

— LAN Interconnect Services

— ISN Bridging Connections

Then, identify the interface module from which the cabling will originate:

— LAN Interconnect Services, provided in the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node MPC7,and MPC15, use CPMML, CPMML-HS, FRM, and LPM interface modules

— ISN Bridging connections, provided in the ISN Concentrators, use EBIM and SLIM-Binterface modules

— BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf Frame Relay connections use the FRM.

— BNS-2000 Series M2 SMDS connections use the AI-T1 or AI-T3 module

Next, identify the device at the terminating end of the connection (e.g., a LANCommunications System (LCS) or a network)




LAN Interconnect Services and ISN Bridging Connections________________LAN Interconnect Services

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for each of the interface modules thatprovide LAN Interconnect Services. Each cabling configuration represents the requiredconnections between the module and other interfaces.

Overview

The cabling for the LAN Interconnect Services connections is determined by their supportedinterface modules and the physical characteristics and configurations that apply to each.

Interface Modules

LAN Interconnect Services are provided by modules that reside in a node, MPC7, or MPC15.

The following modules are supported:

CPMML (Computer Port Module Multi-Link) provides a multiplexed interface andnetwork access for LCS100 and other hosts/servers connected to its eight ports. TheLCS100, in turn, communicates to devices connected to various LANs.

CPMML ports support speeds of 1.2 to 64 Kbps. The CPMML supports simultaneousconfigurations of eight ports at 9.6 Kbps or less, three ports at 19.2 Kbps or less, and a singleport at speeds greater than 19.2 Kbps. Aggregate throughput of the CPMML may be less thanthe sum of the speeds configured for the CPMML ports.

CPMML-HS (Computer Port Module Multi-Link—High Speed) provides a multiplexedinterface and network access for LCS100 and other hosts/servers.

The CPMML-HS supports speeds of up to 128 Kbps simultaneously on all four ports. Thefollowing speeds can be administered for CPMML-HS ports: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 48, 56, 64,and 128 Kbps.

FRM (Frame Relay Module) is a module that can be used in the Datakit II VCS node,BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, and MPC15 to provide frame relayservice via predefined destination (PDD) service at speeds up to 1.544 Mbps. It providesthree options, FRM (V.35), FRM (chT1), and FRM (chE1), depending on which I/O board isused with the main circuit pack.

FRM (V.35) provides V.35 connections for customer-based bridges and routers. It wrapsincoming messages from these devices in a transport protocol, breaking the message into shortfixed-length packets for high-speed transport across the network to another frame relay endpoint. The frames are relayed through the network based on the data link connection identifier(DLCI) and the predefined destination.

FRM (chT1) provides a single DSX-1 connection for channelized T1 frame relay service. The


LAN Interconnect Services________________data can be partitioned into logical channels with an aggregate data rate or 1.536 Mbps fullduplex.

FRM (chE1) provides a single DSX-1 connection for channelized T1 frame relay service. Thedata can be partitioned into logical channels with an aggregate data rate or 2.048 Mbps fullduplex.

LPM (LAN Protocol Module) is a module that can be used in a Datakit II VCS node, aBNS-2000 node, an MPC7, or an MPC15. The LPM provides IP router functionality overframe relay via two to four 802.3 10Base-T ports. The LPM routes IP packets to and fromthese ports, equipment connected to frame relay ports, and ports on other LPMs.

The LPM supports up to 27 independent virtual frame relay ports with up to 507 virtualcircuits. The LPM software is downloadable.

AI-T1 (Access Interface-T1) is an interface module that can be used in a BNS-2000 SeriesM2 Shelf to provide SMDS at speeds up to 1.544 Mbps.

AI-T1 provides 4 DSX-1 connections each supporting a data rate of 1.536 Mbps.

AI-E1 (Access Interface-E1) is an interface module that can be used in a BNS-2000 SeriesM2 Shelf to provide SMDS at speeds up to 2.048 Mbps.

AI-E1 provides 3 connections each supporting a data rate of 2.048 Mbps.

AI-T3 (Access Interface-T3) is an interface module that can be used in a BNS-2000 SeriesM2 Shelf to provide SMDS at speeds up to 44.736 Mbps.

AI-T3 provides 2 BNC coax connectors (transmit and receive) which support a data rate of upto 10 Mbps.

AI-E3 (Access Interface-E3) is an interface module that can be used in a BNS-2000 SeriesM2 Shelf to provide SMDS access to node services for international applications. The AI-E3supports CEPT E3 data signals at Class 1 (4 Mbps) and Class 2 (10 Mbps) rates.

AI-E3 provides 2 BNC coax connectors (transmit and receive) which support a data rate of upto 34 Mbps.

AI-T3P (Access Interface–T3P) is a high-performance, double-board module with one portthat provides IEEE 802.6 SMDS access to node services. The AI-T3P has one boarddedicated to ingress traffic and one board dedicated to egress traffic. This allows the AI-T3Pto achieve a level of performance for full duplex (simultaneous ingress and egress) traffic thatis comparable to that of the AI-T3 for one direction only.

The egress board is a CMA17 circuit pack that uses a CMC6B I/O board. The ingress boardis a CMA17 circuit pack that uses a CMC14 I/O board. It supports DQDB and the PLCP.

The following figure illustrates the association of these modules to the appropriate cabinet:


LAN Interconnect Services________________MPC7

FRM (V.35)

Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000,or MPC15

CPMML

CPMML-HS

FRM (ChE1) CPMML

CPMML-HS

BNS-2000 SeriesM1 Shelf

FRM (chT1)

FRM (V.35)

FRM (ChT1)

FRM (V.35)

BNS-2000 SeriesM2 Shelf

AI-T1

AI-E1

AI-E3

AI-T3

AI-T3PFRM (ChE1)

LPM

LPM LPM

FIGURE 7-1. LAN Interconnect Interface Modules in Cabinets


The physical characteristics and configuration of each of the modules are presented below:

The CPMML module consists of an MC1D117A1 main circuit pack and one of two availableI/O boards. The following options are available:

— The AWJ9 I/O board provides for one V.35 DTE connection operating at speeds up to 64Kbps.

— The AWJ17 I/O board provides for eight RS-232-C DTE connections operating at speedsup to 19.2 Kbps.

The CPMML-HS module consists of an MC1D139A1 main circuit pack and an I/O board.The following option is available:

— The AWJ24 I/O board provides for four V.35 DTE connections operating at speeds up to2.048 Mbps.

The FRM consists of an MC1D143A1 main circuit pack and an I/O board. The followingoptions are available:

— The AWJ24 I/O board provides for four V.35 DTE connections operating at speeds up to2.048 Mbps.

— The CSD1 I/O board provides 1 DSX-1 connection for channelized frame relay service atspeeds up to 1.536 Mbps.


LAN Interconnect Services________________— The CSD2 I/O board provides a 75-ohm E1 connection for channelized frame relay

service at speeds up to 2.048 Mbps.

— The CSD3 I/O board provides a 120-ohm E1 connection for channelized frame relayservice at speeds up to 2.048 Mbps.

The AI-T1 module consists of a CMA5 main circuit pack and an I/O board. The followingoption is available:

— The CMC5 or CMC5B I/O board provides 4 DB15 connectors for connection to SMDSnetworks.

The AI-T3 module consists of a CMA11 main circuit pack and an I/O board. The followingoption is available:

— The CMC6 I/O board provides 2 BNC coax connectors for a single connection to SMDSnetworks.

The AI-E1 module has three ports that provide IEEE 802.6 SMDS access to node services forinternational applications. The AI-E1 supports CEPT E1 data signals at 2.048 Mbps. Eachport on the AI-E1 can function independently. The following option is available:

— The CMC8 I/O board provides a built-in data service unit (DSU) function; it supports theDistributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB) and the Physical Layer Convergence Procedure(PLCP).

The AI-E3 module has one port that provides IEEE 802.6 SMDS access to node services forinternational applications. The AI-E3 supports CEPT E3 data signals at Class 1 (4Mbps) andClass 2 (10 Mbps) rates. The following option is available:

— The CMC13 I/O board supports DQDB and the PLCP.

The AI-T3P module has one port that provides IEEE 802.6 SMDS access to node services.The following options are available:

— The egress board is a CMA17 circuit pack that uses a CMC6B I/O board. The ingressboard is a CMA17 circuit pack that uses a CMC14 I/O board. It supports DQDB and thePLCP.


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15 must be shielded to meet Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements. If longer cable runs areneeded for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after the first 25 feet.


LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from CPMML to DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100

The cabling from CPMML modules to DCE and DTE devices via a modem or Data Service Unit(DSU) and a LCS100 can be configured as follows:

The CPMML module for this application consists of an MC1D117A1 main circuit pack andone of the following I/O boards:

— AWJ9 provides one port for V.35 operation

— AWJ17 provides eight ports for RS-232-C operation

For V.35 operation, a V.35 cable is connected to Port J1 of the AWJ9 I/O board.

The other end of the V.35 cable connects to a V.35 DSU.

At the remote DSU, an Eicon V.35 cable is used to connect the DSU to the DPNA interface ofan LCS100.

For RS-232-C connections, B25FS-1MOD cables are connected to Ports J1 and J2 on theAWJ17 I/O board.

Each B25FS-1MOD cable connects to a SYNC4-M cable to provide a total of eight RS-232-Cconnections. Each RS-232-C leg may be connected to a modem or DSU.

At the remote modem or DSU, use an Eicon RS-232-C cable to connect the modem or DSUto a DPNA interface in the LCS100.

From the DKCA (Datakit II VCS Concentrator Adapter Card) interface in the LCS100, use anM78-4X25M adapter. This adapter provides four RS-232-C legs.

For connections into DCE devices, the legs of the M78-4X25M adapter may be connecteddirectly to the device, or they may be extended using M25A cables.

For connections into DTE devices, a DTE/DTE adapter must be connected to theM78-4X25M adapter. Final connections into the DTE device may then be made with M25Aor M25B cables. Use an M25A cable if the end device has a male connector and use anM25B cable if the end device has a female connector.



LAN Interconnect Services________________

B25FS-1MOD**


CPM

ML

AWJ1

7

J2

J1

B25FS-1MOD**

Modemor DSU

SYNC4-M

Modemor DSU

Eicon RS-232-CLCS

DKC

A

DPN

A

DTE/DTE

AdapterM78-

4X25MAdapter

M25A

DTEDevice

DTEDevice

DCEDevice

M25A

M25B


BNS-1000,BNS-2000



FIGURE 7-2. From CPMML to DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-1. Ordering Information: From CPMML to DCE/DTE Devices viaModem/DSU and LCS100


V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________B25A 50-pin 90°-M G-106, G-F


50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________Eicon V.35 V.35-M CC 406240663

DB26_ ____________________________________________________________________________Eicon RS-232-C RS-232-C-M CC 406240689

DB26_ ____________________________________________________________________________SYNC4-M 50-pin 90°-F G-160, G-R

4 25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M78-4X25M adapter 78-pin M G-224

4 25-pin M_ ____________________________________________________________________________DTE/DTE adapter 25-pin-F G-223

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from CPMML-HS to DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100

The cabling from CPMML-HS modules to DCE and DTE devices via a modem or DSU and aLCS100 can be configured as follows:

The CPMML-HS module for this application consists of an MC1D139A1 main circuit packand an AWJ24 I/O board providing four V.35 DTE connections.

An HD-2V.35M cable is connected to each port (J2 and J6) of the AWJ24 I/O board. Each ofthese cables provides two V.35 connections.

The overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable cannot exceed 10 feet. In addition, each of thetwo V.35 legs cannot exceed one foot in length.

A V.35 cable then connects each leg of the HD-2V.35M cable to a V.35 DSU.

At the remote DSU, an Eicon V.35 cable is used to connect the DSU to the DPNA interface ofan LCS100.

From the DKCA (Datakit II VCS Concentrator Adapter Card) interface in the LCS100, anM78-4X25M adapter is used to provide four RS-232-C legs.

For connections into DCE devices, the legs of the M78-4X25M adapter may be connecteddirectly to the device, or they may be extended using M25A cables.

For connections into DTE devices, a DTE/DTE adapter must be connected to theM78-4X25M adapter. Final connections into the DTE device may then be made with M25Aor M25B cables. Use an M25A cable if the end device has a male connector and use anM25B cable if the end device has a female connector.




HD-2V.35M*

CPM

ML-

HS

AWJ2

4

Private Line

J6

DSU(V.35)

Eicon V.35LCS

DKC

A

DPN

A

DTE/DTE

AdapterM78-

4X25MAdapter

M25A

DTEDevice

DTEDevice

DCEDevice

M25A

M25B

J2

HD-2V.35M*

DSU(V.35)

V.35


BNS-1000,BNS-2000


*The maximum overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable is 10 feet.

FIGURE 7-3. From CPMML-HS to DCE/DTE Devices via Modem/DSU and LCS100


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-2. Ordering Information: From CPMML-HS to DCE/DTE Devices viaModem/DSU and LCS100



2 V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________Eicon V.35 V.35-M CC 406240663

DB26_ ____________________________________________________________________________M78-4X25M adapter 78-pin M G-224

4 25-pin M_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________DTE/DTE adapter 25-pin-F G-223

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________



LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from FRM (V.35) to V.35 Access Device via DSU

The cabling from a FRM in a Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15 to V.35 frame relay access devices via a DSU can be configured as follows:

The FRM for this application consists of an MC1D143A1 main circuit pack and an AWJ24I/O board.

An HD-2V.35M or HD-DB25M-SPEC cable is connected to either port (J2 and J6) of theAWJ24 I/O board. The HD-DB25M-SPEC cable is used for connections via a Spectron patchpanel. Each of these cables provides for two V.35 connections.

— Connector J2 (top) supports ports 1 and 2 (cable legs A and B, respectively)

— Connector J6 (bottom) supports ports 3 and 4 (cable legs A and B, respectively)

A V.35 cable connects each leg of the HD-2V.35M cable to the appropriate connector on theV.35 DSU. The following special cabling is required for GDC Datacomm 500 and UDSFT100S DSUs:

— If the local DSU is a GDC Datacomm 500 DSU, a FRM-GDC cable is used, instead ofthe V.35 cable, to connect each leg to the appropriate connector on the DSU.

— If the local DSU is a UDS FT100S DSU, a standard 34-pin to 25-pin adapter (providedwith the DSU) must be connected to the DSU before the V.35 cable can be connected.

Each leg of the HD-DB25M-SPEC cable is connected to the Spectron patch panel via 25-pinconnectors.

— If the local DSU is a GDC Datacomm 500 DSU, a SPEC-GDC cable connects from thepatch panel to the DSU.

— If the local DSU is a UDS FT100S DSU, a SPEC-UDS cable connects from the patchpanel to the DSU.

At the remote end, the remote DSU is connected to a V.35 access device.

Short cable lengths are recommended for these configurations. The overall length of the HD-2V.35M or HD-DB25M-SPEC cable cannot exceed 10 feet and each of the two V.35 legscannot exceed one foot in length. The width of the patch panel (if used) should also beincluded when calculating distance limitations.

The maximum cable length that can be used to connect the FRM to a V.35 modem or DSU isdetermined by the data rate as shown in the following table.


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-3. Cable Length Restrictions for the FRM V.35 Connections

_ _________________________Maximum

Data Rate Cable Length (ft)_ __________________________ _________________________2.0 Mbps 20_ _________________________1.5 Mbps 40_ _________________________1.0 Mbps 60_ _________________________≤500 Kbps 100_ _________________________

Measure the length as shown in the following figures which illustrate these configurations.

Figure 7-4 shows a direct connection to a DSU, and Figure 7-5 shows a connection using aSpectron patch panel.



Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000, BNS-2000


AWJ2

4

FRM

J6

J2 HD-2V.35M*A

B

(Port 1)

(Port 2)

HD-2V.35M*A

B

(Port 3)

(Port 4)

GDCDatacomm500 DSU

Measurement forMaximum Cable Length

DSU(V.35)

PrivateLine

PrivateLine

AccessDevice

DSU(V.35)

GDCDatacomm500 DSU

FRM-GDC

V.35

*The maximum overall length of the HD-2V.35M cable is 10 feet.

FIGURE 7-4. From FRM (V.35) to V.35 Access Device via DSU



GDCDatacomm500 DSU

DSU

PrivateLine

PrivateLine

AccessDevice

UDSFT100S

DSU

SPEC-GDC

SPEC-UDS



AWJ2

4

FRM

HD-DB25M-SPECA

B

(Port 1)

(Port 2)

A

B

(Port 3)

(Port 4)

Measurement forMaximum Cable Length

HD-DB25M-SPEC

SpectronPatchPanel

DSU

*The maximum overall length of the HD-DB25M-SPEC cable is 10 feet.

FIGURE 7-5. From FRM (V.35) to V.35 Access Device via DSU using Spectron Patch Panel


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-4. Ordering Information: From FRM (V.35) to V.35 Access Device via DSUusing Spectron Patch Panel



2 V.35-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________V.35 34-pin-M G-170, G-T

34-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________FRM-GDC 34-pin-F G-232, G-Q

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________SPEC-GDC 25-pin-M G-237, G-Q, G-AA

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________HD-DB25M-SPEC 50-pin-M G-236, G-AS

2 25-pin-M special wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________SPEC-UDS 25-pin-M G-244, G-Q, G-AA

25-pin-M special wiring_ ____________________________________________________________________________



LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from FRM (chT1) to CSU, DSX-1 Cross-Connect Device, or T1 MUX

The cabling from the FRM in a Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 Series M1Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15 to a CSU or DSX-1 cross-connect device can be configured as follows:

The FRM for this application consists of an MC1D143A1 main circuit pack and a CSD1 I/Oboard.

The DATA port on the CSD1 I/O board has a DB15 connector.

— If the CSD1 I/O board is connected to a CSU, the connection is made with anAU1.5-CSU or a CHIO-MOD-S cable.

Use the AU1.5-CSU cable when the CSU requires a DB15 connector.

Use the CHIO-MOD-S cable when the CSU requires a RJ45 connector.

— If the CSD1 I/O board is connected to a DSX-1 cross-connect device, the connection ismade with an AU1.5-CSU or an AU1.5-PD cable.

Use the AU1.5-CSU cable when the connection requires a DB15 connector to connect tothe DSX-1 cross-connect.

Use the AU1.5-PD cable when the connection requires no connector (raw wire for wirewrap or punch down) to connect to the DSX-1 cross-connect.

— If the CSD1 I/O board is connected to a T1 MUX, the connection is made with aCHIO-CROSS or a CHIO-MOD cable.

Use the CHIO-MOD cable when the T1-MUX requires a RJ45 connector.

Use the CHIO-CROSS cable when the T1-MUX requires a 15-pin-M connector.

The CLOCK port on the CSD1 I/O board has a DB15 connector. If the port is used, theconnection is made using an AU1.5-CSU (for DB15 connections) or AU1.5-PD cable (for rawwire connections) as shown in the following figure.

The tip signal for the CLOCK port is on pin 3 and the ring signal is on pin 11.

The cable length for a DSX-1 connection must be less than 655 feet.






CSD

1

FRM

Clock

Data

AU1.5-PD

AU1.5-CSUExternal

Clock

655 Feet (Max. Length)

AU1.5-CSU

CHIO-MOD-S

AU1.5-PD

AU1.5-CSU

CHIO-MOD

CHIO-CROSS

CSU

DSX-1Cross-Connect

Block

T1MUX

655 Feet (Max. Length)

FIGURE 7-6. Cabling from FRM (chT1) to CSU, DSX-1 Cross-Connect Device,or T1 MUX


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-5. Ordering Information: Cabling from FRM (chT1) to CSU, DSX-1 Cross-Connect Device, or T1 MUX


AU1.5-PD 15-pin-M G-230, G-AN

butt_ ____________________________________________________________________________AU1.5-CSU 15-pin-M G-227, G-AN

15-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________CHIO-CROSS 15-pin-M G-246, G-AN

15-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________CHIO-MOD 15-pin-M G-247, G-AE

RJ45_ ____________________________________________________________________________CHIO-MOD-S 15-pin-M G-250, G-AE

RJ45_ ____________________________________________________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling Requirements for FRM (ChE1) via CSU, DSX-1 Device, or E1 MUX

The cabling from an FRM (ChE1) in a node, MPC7, or MPC15 via a CSU, DSX-1 device, or E1MUX uses the following:

an FRM (ChE1) consisting of an MC1D143A1 main circuit pack and either a 75-ohm CSD2I/O board to support coaxial connections or a 120-ohm CSD3 I/O board to support twistedpair connections

the Data port originating at the DB-15 connector on the CSD2 or CSD3 I/O board

— For a CSD2 I/O board connected to a CSU, an FRM-E1-75 or FRM-E1-75M cable is used(see Figure 7-7).

— For a CSD2 I/O board connected to a DSX-1 device, an FRM-E1-75 or an FRM-E1-75Mcable is used (see Figure 7-8).

— For a CSD2 I/O board connected to a E1 MUX, an FRM-E1-75 or an FRM-E1-75M cableis used (see Figure 7-9).

— For a CSD3 I/O board connected to a CSU, an AU1.5-CSU cable is used (seeFigure 7-10).

— For a CSD3 I/O board connected to a DSX-1 device, an AU1.5-CSU cable is used (seeFigure 7-11).

— For a CSD3 I/O board connected to a E1 MUX, a CHIO-CROSS cable is used (see Figure7-12).

the Clock port, if used, terminating at the DB-15 connector on the CSD2 or CSD3 I/Oboard. For a CSD2 I/O board, an FRM-E1-75 or FRM-E1-75M cable can be used for theconnection (see Figures 7-7 through 7-9). For a CSD3 I/O board, an AU1.5-CSU cablecan be used for the connection (see Figures 7-10 through 7-12). The tip and ring signalsfor the Clock port come in on pins 3 and 11, respectively.

The cable length for a DSX-1 connection must be less than 655 feet for a CSD3 and less than820 feet for a CSD2.

For the CSD2 I/O board, the FRM-E1-75 or FRM-E1-75M cable is used for both cross-overand straight-through connections. When used with a CSU, the cable is manually connected ina straight-through fashion (the transmit leads of one connector are connected to the transmitleads of the other connector). For cross-connect devices, such as a DSX-1 or E1 MUX, thecable is connected manually in cross-over fashion (the transmit leads of one connector areconnected to the receive leads of the other connector).

For the CSD3 I/O board, the CHIO-CROSS is a cross-over cable, connecting the transmitleads at one connector to the receive leads of the other connector. The AU1.5-CSU is astraight-through cable, connecting the transmit leads at one connector to the transmit leads ofthe other connector.



FRM-E1-75

CSD

2Clock

820 ft.

Data

ExternalClock

Source(Optional)

FRM-E1-75

CSU

FRM

Maximum

820 ft.Maximum

FRM-E1-75M

FRM-E1-75M


BNS-1000,BNS-2000

Series M1 Shelf, MPC7, or MPC15

FIGURE 7-7. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD2 I/O Board to CSU

FRM-E1-75

CSD

2

Clock

820 ft.

Data

ExternalClock

Source(Optional)

FRM-E1-75DSX-1Block

FRM

Maximum

820 ft.Maximum

FRM-E1-75M

FRM-E1-75M


BNS-1000,BNS-2000


FIGURE 7-8. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD2 I/O Board to DSX-1 Device



FRM-E1-75

CSD

2

Clock

820 ft.

Data

ExternalClock

Source(Optional)

FRM-E1-75E1

Mux

FRM

Maximum

820 ft.Maximum

FRM-E1-75M

FRM-E1-75M


BNS-1000,BNS-2000


FIGURE 7-9. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD2 I/O Board to E1 MUX

CSD

3

Clock

655 ft.

Data

AU1.5-CSUExternal

ClockSource

(Optional)

AU1.5-CSU CSU

FRM

Maximum

655 ft.Maximum


BNS-1000,BNS-2000,

Series M1 Shelf MPC7, or MPC15

FIGURE 7-10. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD3 I/O Board to CSU



CSD

3

Clock

655 ft.

Data

AU1.5-CSUExternal

ClockSource

(Optional)

AU1.5-CSU DSX-1Block

FRM

Maximum

655 ft.Maximum


BNS-1000,BNS-2000


FIGURE 7-11. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD3 I/O Board to DSX-1 Device

Clock

655 ft.

Data

AU1.5-CSUExternal

ClockSource

(Optional)

CHIO-CROSS

655 ft.

E1Mux

FRM

CSD

3

Maximum

Maximum


BNS-1000,BNS-2000


FIGURE 7-12. Cabling FRM (ChE1) CSD3 I/O Board to E1 MUX


LAN Interconnect Services________________TABLE 7-6. Ordering Information for FRM (ChE1)

____________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31

DescriptionAdapter Group Number________________________________________________________________________________________

AU1.5-CSU 15-pin-M G(227), G(AN)

15-pin-M

straight-through____________________________________________CHIO-CROSS 15-pin-M G(246), G(AN)

15-pin-M

cross-over____________________________________________FRM-E1-75 15-pin-M G(252), G(AY)

BNC____________________________________________FRM-E1-75M 15-pin-M G(253), G(AZ)

micro-BNC____________________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services________________General Procedure for Cabling the LPM

The following procedure gives a sequence of steps for cabling LPM LAN ports, which can beadapted or expanded as appropriate. Information necessary for ordering cables is given followingthe cabling configuration illustration.

PROCEDURE 7-1. Cabling CSD6 Ports

Requirements: Installation of CSD6 I/O board and LPM.

1. Determine the connections from each I/O board LAN port to the 10BASE-T hub, as follows:

a. Identify the 10BASE-T hub terminating the end of the connection.

b. Select the cable type for connecting to a 10BASE-T hub. The ordering information isspecified in Table 7-7.

2. Verify that the CSD6 I/O board and its LPM are correctly installed.

3. Connect the end of the cable marked Data Switch to the CSD6 I/O board. Connect the endof the cable marked LAN to the 10BASE-T hub.

4. Link integrity must be turned ON (enabled) on any hub port connected to the LPM.

5. When an LPM LAN port (lanport) is restored to service, the Link Integrity/Receive (green)LED on the CSD6 I/O board is lit if the LAN port has been cabled correctly to the hub.


LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling Requirements for an LPM to a 10BASE-T Hub

The cabling from an LPM in a node, MPC7, or MPC15 to a 10BASE-T hub uses the following:

an LPM consisting of an TN2229 main circuit pack and a CSD6 I/O board

an SH8-MOD (shielded twist pair) cable connected to the port labeled 1 or 2 on the CSD6 I/Oboard

a 10BASE-T hub


LPM

CSD

6

SH8-MOD


BNS-2000Series M1 Shelf,MPC7, or MPC15

10Base-THub

SH8-MOD 10Base-THub

FIGURE 7-13. Cabling the LPM to the 10BASE-T Hub

TABLE 7-7. Ordering Information: Cabling from LPM to the 10BASE-T Hub

_ _______________________________________ED5P055-31

Cable DescriptionGroup Number_ ________________________________________ _______________________________________

SH8-MOD RJ-45-M G(263), G(BB)

RJ-45-M_ _______________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from AI-T1 to DTF (SMDS Network) via CSU or DSX-1 Cross-Connect

The cabling configuration for the AI-T1 module to the digital transmission facility (DTF) in anSMDS network can be configured as follows:

The AI-T1 module for this application consists of a CMA5 circuit pack and a CMC5 orCMC5B I/O board.

The cabling originates on the 15-pin connector of the AI-T1 I/O board and is connected to thenetwork via a CSU or DSX-1 cross-connect.

— If connecting via a CSU, use an AU1.5-CSU cable to connect one of the DB15 connectorson the CMC5 or CMC5B I/O board to the CSU.

— If connecting via a DSX-1 cross-connect, use an AU1.5-PD cable to connect one of theDB15 connectors on the CMC5 or CMC5B I/O board to the cross-connect, or all 4 DB15connectors can be connected using an AI-T1/4 cable.




BNS-2000Series M2 Shelf AI

-T1

CM

C5/

CM

C5B

AU1.5-CSU

AI-T1/4

AU1.5-PD

DS1Cross-Connect

DTF to SMDSNetwork

CSUDTF to SMDS

Network

FIGURE 7-14. Cabling from AI-T1 to DTF (SMDS Network) via CSU or DSX-1Cross-Connect

TABLE 7-8. Ordering Information: Cabling from AI-T1 to DTF (SMDS Network) viaCSU or DSX-1 Cross-Connect


AI-T1/4 4 15-pin M G-238, G-AW

butt_ ____________________________________________________________________________AU1.5-CSU 15-pin M G-227, G-AN

15-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________AU1.5-PD 15-pin-M G-230, G-AN

butt_ ____________________________________________________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services________________Cabling from AI-T3 to DTF (SMDS Network)

The cabling configuration for the AI-T3 module to the digital transmission facility (DTF) in anSMDS network can be configured as follows:

The AI-T3 module for this application consists of a CMA11 circuit pack and a CMC6 orCMC6B I/O board.

This application uses DDM-1000 units for transmission via private line to the terminatingdevice.

The cabling originates on the J2 (transmit) and J3 (receive) connectors of the AI-T3 I/O boardand is connected to the digital transmission facility of the SMDS network with a pair of 728Bcoaxial cables.


728B

AI-T

3C

MC

6/C

MC

6B

J3

~Private Line

~BNS-2000Series M1

Shelf728BJ2

DDM-1000 To DTF

FIGURE 7-15. Cabling from AI-T3 to DTF (SMDS Network)

TABLE 7-9. Ordering Information: Cabling from AI-T3 to DTF (SMDS Network)

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________728B coaxial cable G-258, G-AV_ ____________________________________________________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services and ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling From AI-E1 to DTF

The cabling configuration for the AI-E1 module to the digital transmission facility (DTF) uses thefollowing:

an AI-E1 module, consisting of a CMA5 circuit pack and a CMC8 I/O distribution board

cabling that originates on the 9-pin or micro-BNC connectors of the AI-E1 I/O board and isconnected via a distribution frame or directly to the network.

The CMC8 I/O board has 3 E1 ports. Port 1 is at the left of the board when looking at itinserted in the backplane and port 3 is at the right. The relation between port numbers,connector designations, and LED labels (LED labels are on the faceplate of the CMA5) are asfollows:

_ _____________________________Port number Connector LED_ ______________________________ _____________________________Port 1 J3 L1

Port 2 J4 L2

Port 3 J5 L3_ _____________________________



ISN Bridging Connections________________

DF = distribution frame

75 OHM

75 OHM

120 OHM

RX+

RX-

TX+

TX-75 OHM

75 OHM

DF

DTF

BNS-2000

CMC8

TX RXTX RX

FIGURE 7-16. Cabling From AI-E1 to DTF

TABLE 7-10. AI-E1 Ordering Information

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or Description ED-5P055-31Adapter Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

AI-E1 75 Ω 1.0/2.3 LEMO N11211-S35-B20

SAA_ ____________________________________________________________________________AI-E1 120 Ω CANNON —

DB9_ ____________________________________________________________________________


LAN Interconnect Services and ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling From AI-E3 to DTF

The cabling configuration for the AI-E3 module to the digital transmission facility (DTF) uses thefollowing:

an AI-E3 module, consisting of a CMA11 circuit pack and a CMC13 I/O distribution board

cabling that originates on the J2 (receive) and J3 (transmit) connectors of the CMC13 I/Oboard and is connected via a distribution frame or directly to the network.


DF = distribution frame

BNS-2000

CMC13

J3 J2

75 OHM

DF DTF

TX RX

75 OHM

FIGURE 7-17. Cabling From AI-E3 to DTF

TABLE 7-11. AI-E3 Ordering Information_ ____________________________________________________________________________

Cable or Description ED-5P055-31Adapter Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________AI-E3 1.0/2.3 LEMO N11221-S35-B20

SAA_ ____________________________________________________________________________


ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling From AI-T3P to DTF

The cabling configuration for the AI-T3P module to the digital transmission facility (DTF) usesthe following:

an AI-T3P module, consisting of a CMA17 circuit pack with a CMC6B I/O board for egresstraffic and a CMA17 circuit pack with a CMC14 I/O board for ingress traffic. The CMC6Bhas a ribbon cable connected to the CMC14 in an adjacent slot for bussing the ingress datapath. The ingress data path on the CMC6B is logically connected to both CMA17 circuitpacks on the AI-T3P through the backplane connector (for the egress circuit pack) and aribbon connector (for the ingress circuit pack).

routing equipment used for SMDS data transmission to the subscriber’s LAN at DS3 rates.

cabling that originates on the J2 (transmit) and J3 (receive) connectors of the CMC6B I/Oboard and is connected to the DTF with a pair of 728B coaxial cables.


CMC6B

J2 J3

CMC14Ribbon Cable

728B

DDM-1000728B

DDM-1000

PrivateLine

To SMDSNetwork


FIGURE 7-18. Cabling From AI-T3P to DTF


LAN Interconnect Services and ISN Bridging Connections________________TABLE 7-12. AI-T3P Ordering Information_ ____________________________________________________________________________

Cable or Description ED5P055-31Adapter Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________728B Coaxial Cable G(258), G(AV)_ ____________________________________________________________________________728B-90 Coaxial Cable G(261), G(AV)_ ____________________________________________________________________________


________________ISN Bridging Connections

The sections that follow present cabling configurations for each of the interface modules thatprovide ISN bridging connections. Each cabling configuration represents the requiredconnections between the module and other interfaces.

Overview

The cabling for the ISN bridging connections is determined by their supported interface modulesand the physical characteristics and configuration that apply to each.

Interface Modules

ISN bridging connections are provided by modules that reside in ISN Concentrators.

The following modules are supported:

EBIM (Ethernet Bridge Interface Module) provides the interface to a StarLAN 10Network, an Ethernet LAN, or any other local area network compatible with IEEE 802.3standards. Bridge services are provided to the LANs via the Datakit II VCS or BNS-1000network at 10 Mbps throughput. Each LAN must connect to the node via an individual EBIMlocated in an ISN Concentrator and use the same version of one of the following higher levelprotocols: StarLAN 10 Networks using International Standards Organization (ISO) protocols,Xerox Network System (XNS), Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol(TCP/IP), or AT&T 3B Network Protocol (3Bnet).

SLIM-B (StarLAN Network Interface Module—Bridge) provides the interface to AT&TStarLAN networks. The SLIM-B modules are located in ISN Concentrators. Each SLIM-Bprovides the StarLAN network segment to which it is connected with an interface to theDatakit II VCS or BNS-1000 network. Through administered predefined destinations, aSLIM-B can connect to eight other SLIM-Bs. A maximum of nine SLIM-Bs can beinterconnected; the interconnected StarLAN networks make up an extended network. Fiveextended networks can be interconnected by a common network hub unit and a dedicatedSLIM-B from each network. This arrangement allows up to 40 StarLAN networks tocommunicate with each other.


ISN Bridging Connections________________Physical Characteristics

Both the EBIM and SLIM-B modules reside in ISN Concentrators. The following figureillustrates the association of these interface modules to the ISN Concentrator.

ISN Concentrator

Local or Remote

EBIM SLIM-B

FIGURE 7-19. EBIM and SLIM-B Interface Modules in ISN Concentrators


The first 25 feet of data cabling connected to the ISN Concentrator must be shielded to meetFederal Communications Commission (FCC) electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements. Iflonger cable runs are needed for a given configuration, unshielded cables may be used after thefirst 25 feet.


ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling from EBIM to Ethernet Network

The ISN Concentrator supports connection to the Ethernet network using the Ethernet BridgeInterface Module (EBIM). An Ethernet connection cannot be routed via a patch panel. All of thewiring for an Ethernet network is customer-supplied. Transceivers link to the EBIM module via astandard IEEE 802.3 or Ethernet Attachment Interface Unit (AIU) cable. This cable is customer-supplied, and has a female MIL-C-24308 15-pin connector to attach it to the EBIM.

The EBIM module supports the following transceivers:

Excelan IEEE 802.3

Digital Equipment Corp. DELNI-AA

3COM 3C100 N-Connector (version 1)

MICOM-Interlan NT10 (version 2)

MICOM-Interlan NT100 U1 Non-Intrusive (version 2)

MICOM-Interlan NT100 U2 N-Connector (802.3)

TCL 2010 EB (Ethernet version 2)

TCL 2010 IS Non-Intrusive (802.3)

TCL 2010 Multiport Transceiver Multiplexer

TCL 2010 EB Non-Intrusive (version 2)


ISNConcentrator EB

IMEt

hern

et In

terfa

ce

Customer-Supplied EthernetTransceiver Cable To Ethernet

Transceiver~

FIGURE 7-20. From EBIM to Ethernet Network


ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling from SLIM-B Directly to StarLAN Network

The ISN Concentrator supports connection to a StarLAN network using the SLIM-B. Cablingfrom a ISN Concentrator to a StarLAN network can be made directly, if the distance between theISN Concentrator and the StarLAN Network Access Unit (NAU) or Network Extension Unit(NEU) is less than 100 feet. If the distance is greater than 100 feet, the connection must gothrough the building distribution wiring.

Cabling to a StarLAN network uses one or two D8W modular cables to make the connection.The maximum length of each cable is 100 feet.

For a star-configured StarLAN network, one cable plugs into the OUT jack at the rear of theSLIM-B module. The opposite end of this cable plugs into the IN jack of the StarLANNetwork NAU or NEU.

For a daisy-chained StarLAN network, connect a second cable from the IN jack of the SLIM-B to the OUT jack of the StarLAN Network NAU or NEU.




OU

T

D8W

ISNConcentrator SL

IM-B

IN

D8W

OU

TStarLANNetwork

NEU or NAUIN

FIGURE 7-21. From SLIM-B to StarLAN Network

TABLE 7-13. Ordering Information: From SLIM-B to StarLAN Network

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________



ISN Bridging Connections________________Cabling from SLIM-B to StarLAN Network via 110 Patch Panel

If the distance from the ISN Concentrator to the StarLAN NAU or NEU is greater than 100 feet,the connection must go through the building distribution wiring. The cabling from a SLIM-Bmodule to a StarLAN Network via a 110 patch panel can be configured as follows:

Connect a D8W modular cable from the modular connector on the SLIM-B (OUT jack) to amodular socket on a 356A adapter.

Connect the 356A adapter to a A25U cable.

Connect the A25U cable to the 110 patch panel.

Connect the A25U cable from the 110 patch panel to the 356A adapter.

Connect the D8W modular cable from the 356A adapter to the IN jacks of the StarLANNetwork (NEU or NAU).




110 Patch Panel

ISNConcentrator SL

IM-B

IN NC*

OU

T

D8W A25U356AAdapter

D8W A25UStarLANNetwork

NAU or NEU

356AAdapter

*NC=no connection

FIGURE 7-22. Cabling from SLIM-B to StarLAN Network via 110 Patch Panel


ISN Bridging Connections________________TABLE 7-14. Ordering Information: Cabling from SLIM-B to StarLAN Network via 110Patch Panel


D8W mod plug G-137, G-G

mod plug, straight through_ ____________________________________________________________________________356A adapter 8 mod sockets Comcode: 104158829

50-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________A25U 50-pin 90°-M G-114, G-F

50-pin 90°-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Building Distribution

Connections

Wire Backbone Cables 8-5

Fiber Optic Building Distribution 8-7


________________Building Distribution

Connections

Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 equipment can use existing SYSTIMAX PremisesDistribution System (PDS) wiring or run cables directly to end-user equipment. This chaptercovers cabling for connections between the node and the backbone subsystem, using SYSTIMAXPDS 110P patch panels.


The backbone subsystem (also called the riser subsystem) consists of the cables between the wireor fiber cross-connects located in the equipment room and those located in serving closets or userrooms on other floors. Backbone cables can be wire or fiber optic, and you have a considerableamount of flexibility in your choice of components in both media.

The following figure shows the overall breakdown of distribution subsystems into equipmentroom cables, backbone cables, and horizontal cables.


Building Distribution Connections________________


BNS-2000 Node

Equipment Room

Purple

White

110Cross-

Connect

Fiber OpticCross-Connect

BackboneDistribution


Multiplexeror

Concentrator

Serving Closet

White

Blue

110Cross-

Connect

Horizontal Distribution

End-User Equipment

FIGURE 8-1. Distribution Subsystems


Building Distribution Connections________________Wire Backbone Cables

Circuits can be routed through cables running directly from Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, andBNS-2000 node cabinets to end-user or network equipment, and through 110 cross-connects toSYSTIMAX PDS wire backbone cables. SYSTIMAX PDS backbone (or riser) cables are made upof 24 gauge copper wires in twisted pairs and contain from 100 to 1800 pairs per cable. Thefollowing figure shows an example of how the backbone subsystem connects the followingelements of a network:

user interface modules (such as TY12, TSM8, X.25)

SYSTIMAX PDS 110 cross-connects

room terminations (adapters and cords for user devices)


Building Distribution Connections________________


BNS-2000 Node

Purple White

CopperBackbone

Cables

Blue

White

Floor 3

Floor 2

End-UserTerminal

Floor 1

Purple

White

Multiplexeror

Concentrator

To End-UserEquipment

Serving Closet

Equipment Room

FIGURE 8-2. Wire Cable Backbone Subsystem

Information on connections to 110 cross-connects is provided throughout this guide. Forinformation about connecting backbone cables between cross-connects, refer to The AT&TSYSTIMAX Premises Distribution System.


Building Distribution Connections________________Fiber Optic Building Distribution

Fiber optic systems provide high-capacity, low-cost data transmission. In addition, optical fiberis immune to electromagnetic interference. This quality eliminates the potential for distortion thatis associated with copper wire cable systems. Using fiber optic modems or multiplexers, fiberbackbone cables can carry signals from devices designed for wire interfaces, such as TY12s andTSM8s. The path of such a circuit might be as follows:

Connect the I/O board of the interface module to a fiber optic modem or multiplexer (FOM).

Run fiber optic cables from the FOM to a fiber cross-connect.

From the fiber cross-connect, fiber cable pairs lead to a fiber interconnect.

Each fiber cable terminates at a second FOM.

Complete each connection to the remote end (terminal, computer or modem) with copperwiring.

The TY12 interface module is arranged for asynchronous operation only and is wired with thefollowing EIA RS-232-C signal leads:

transmit data (TD)

receive data (RD)

data terminal ready (DTR)

data carrier detect (DCD)

signal ground (SG)

request to send (RTS)

clear to send (CTS)

Hardware flow control via the RTS and CTS leads is supported in the TY12 module.

In the SAM64 or SAM504, the TERM32 supports synchronous and asynchronous operation, andis wired with the following EIA RS-232-C signal leads:

transmit data (TD)

receive data (RD)

data terminal ready (DTR)

data carrier detect (DCD)

signal ground (SG)

request to send (RTS)

clear to send (CTS)

Hardware flow control via the RTS and CTS leads is supported in the TERM32.


Building Distribution Connections________________Fiber optic modems and multiplexers must provide at least the minimum number of control leadsrequired and should be capable of operating at 19.2 Kbps on the terminal ports.

There are several ways to connect the node or SAM cabinet to the modem or multiplexer cabinet.For example, 25-pair feeder cables equipped with adapters can connect the cabinets. It willsimplify the administration of the terminal wiring if this connection is direct rather than routedthrough a 110 patch panel. The 110 patch panel should be used in the wire closet at theterminating end multiplexer. The fiber optic cables between the node or SAM end modems ormultiplexers and the terminal end modems or multiplexers can be run directly between the twopieces of equipment or they can be run via fiber optic cross-connect panels. At the terminatingmodem or multiplexer, standard copper wire distribution methods are used to connect to the userterminals.

The following figure shows how this approach might be configured and also shows fiber opticdistribution for trunk and host connections through the backbone subsystem.


Building Distribution Connections________________Equipment Room

Fiber OpticBackbone

Cable

Floor 3

Floor 2

Floor 1

Serving Closet

Multiplexeror

Concentrator

To End-UserEquipment




Fiber-Connected

Host


BNS-2000 Node

FIGURE 8-3. Fiber Optic Backbone Subsystem


________________A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling

Equipment Descriptions

Cable Types A-3

Wire Cables A-3• Cable Size and Sheathing A-3• Connectors A-4• Interfaces A-5

Fiber Optic Cables A-6• Cable Types A-7• Cable Connectors A-7

Cabling Equipment, Cable, and Adapter Terms A-8• Cabling Equipment A-8• Cables and Adapters A-15


________________B. Cable and Adapter Ordering

Information

How to Organize an Order Using the Correct Format B-4• How to Organize an Order by ED Codes B-7• How to Organize an Order by Comcodes B-9

How to Place an Order B-10• How to Place an Engineered Order B-10• How to Place Orders Using the FAX Routine B-10• How to Place Orders Using the National Parts Sales Center

(NPSC) B-13

Cable and Adapter Order Codes B-14• Adapter Ordering Information B-14• Cable Ordering Information with ED Codes B-17• Stocked High-Volume Cables Available Through the National

Parts Sales Center (NPSC) B-26• A25D Double-Ended Cable Ordering Information B-28• Fiber Optic Cable Ordering Information B-29


________________C. Remote-VDM Connections

Cabling R-VDMs in Single-Line Applications C-5• Connections for Model 045R VDM C-5• Connections for VDM Stand-Alone Shelf C-7

Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications C-9• Using Two Spare Pairs in Existing Cabling C-9• Using Two New Pairs in New Cabling C-11• Using One Spare Pair in Existing Cabling C-13• Using One New Pair in New Cabling C-15

Cabling R-VDMs in Merlin Key Set Applications C-17


________________D. VDM Physical Interface

Pictorials

VDM Cabinet Shelf D-3

VDM Stand-Alone Shelf D-4

Model 045CS VDM D-5

R-VDM D-5


________________E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview

SYSTIMAX PDS Subsystems E-3

Wire Cables E-4• Four-Pair Cables E-4• EIA Cables E-4• 25-Pair Cables E-4• Multipair Cables E-5

Fiber Optic Cables E-6Fiber Optic Cable Types E-6Fiber Optic Connectors E-7

Signaling E-8• EIA Compatible Signals E-8• LADC-II Compatible Signals E-9

Cross-Connect Devices E-10• Wire Cross-connects E-10• Fiber Cross-connect and Interconnect Modules E-11


________________Appendix A.

Cable, Adapter, and CablingEquipment Descriptions

Appendix A describes cable types and gives brief descriptions of selected cables, adapters, andcabling equipment.

Cable Types

A wide variety of cables and adapters may be used in a Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, or BNS-2000configuration. Selecting cables is easy if you understand how cables are designed. Select cablesbased on the specific characteristics of each type of connection. This section explains theelements of each type of cable (wire and fiber) used to connect equipment to a network.

Wire Cables

Copper (wire) cables are required when using 110 patch panel modules to field terminate cableconductors. 25-pair building distribution cables are recommended only where existing cables areto be reused. Single terminal port 4-pair unconnectorized station cable is the standard cable typeused for workstation cabling.

The basic elements of wire cables are the cable size and sheathing, connectors, and interfaces.

Cable Size and Sheathing

The cabling material for wire cables consists of bundles of twisted pairs of copper wire, generally26 gauge or larger. The cables are classified according to the number of wires in each cable, useof shielding, and the type of covering used for the outside surface.

Number of Wires. Wire cables range from six-conductor (three-pair) to 50-conductor (25-pair)cables.

Shielding. Certain cables, such as those connected directly to I/O boards inside Datakit II VCS,BNS-1000, or BNS-2000 nodes, are shielded to minimize electromagnetic interference (EMI).Shielding is not always required along the entire length of a cable run, so many types of cablesare available with or without EMI shielding.

Fire Protective Sheathing. Due to fire code requirements, any cable that runs through an airplenum must be sheathed in a special material. Ordinary cable sheathing emits highly toxicfumes when it burns and cannot be used for cables that pass through air duct or plenumlocations.

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 A-3

Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Connectors

Connectors are generally classified by the number of pins (corresponding to the number ofconductors in the cable) and gender.

Number of Pins. Six connector types are generally used:

50-pin Amphenol connectors are normally used for connections to I/O boards. Two typesare available:

— The 90° connector has the row of pins arrayed at a right angle to the cable and isdesigned for connections between two cables.

— The 180° connector has the pins arrayed along the same line as the cable and isdesigned for connections to equipment cabinets (such as I/O boards).

50-pin Amplimite .050 Series connectors offer a high-density D-type interface. Theirconstruction offers exceptional shielding effectiveness and electrostatic discharge (ESD)protection (i.e., any discharge that occurs is through the shield to ground). The straight exitconnector has the pins arrayed along the same line as the cable.

34-pin V.35 connectors are designed to meet the requirements for V.35 interfaces and areused for connection to V.35 devices (see Interfaces below for more information).

37-pin RS-449 connectors are designed to meet the requirements for EIA RS-449 interfacesand are used for connection to RS-449 devices (see Interfaces below for moreinformation).

25-pin (DB25) connectors are normally used for RS-232-C connections, although this typeof connector is commonly used for many other types of interfaces. Generally, DB25connectors are used for low-speed modems, terminals, and other end-user devices.

Modular connectors are six-pin and eight-pin modular connectors for three- or four-pairlines to terminals and similar devices, although other types of modular cables andconnectors may exist.

Gender. All six types of connectors are available in male or female configurations. The femaleconnector has receptacles for the protruding plugs or pins of the male connector.

A-4 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Interfaces

Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 cables are available for the following interface typeswhich cover all connections needed for the configurations now supported:

RS-232-C Interface. EIA RS-232-C is the standard interface that uses binary data interchangebetween DTE and DCE.

The RS-232-C interface uses a 25-pin (DB25) connector and up to 21 signal leads, and operatesat data rates from 75 to 19200 bits per second (bps). The mechanical, electrical, functional, andprocedural characteristics of the interface are defined by the EIA RS-232-C standard.

RS-449 Interface. EIA RS-449 is a standard interface used for interface and trunk modulessuch as the TSM8 and Trunk-T1 modules.

The RS-449 interface uses a 37-pin connector, operates at data rates up to 2 Mbps, and utilizesbalanced signals. The characteristics of this interface are defined by the EIA RS-449 standard.

V.35 Interface. CCITT V.35 is a standard interface used for interface and trunk modules suchas the TSM8 and Trunk-64 modules.

The V.35 interface uses a 34-pin connector and operates at data rates up to 2 Mbps. It is themost common interface for speeds above 56 Kbps. The characteristics of this interface aredefined by the CCITT V.35 recommendation.


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Fiber Optic Cables

Fiber optics is the technology of passive guidance of light by multiple reflections along channelsinside optical fibers. Optical fibers are thin, flexible thread made from plastic or glass. One ormore optical fibers can be combined in a fiber optic cable to make installation more convenientand to protect the individual fibers.

The following figure shows the structure of fiber optic cables.

Central StrengthMember

KEVLARSheathing

CoatedFiber

BufferedFiber (0.035")

PVC(0.175" OD)

Quad Fiber Cable

CoatedFiber

PVCBuffer

PVC

KEVLARSheathing

Dual Fiber cable

Coated Fiber(0.005" OD)

PVC Buffer(0.035" OD)

PVC(0.095" OD)

KEVLARSheathing

Single Fiber Cable

FIGURE A-1. Fiber Optic Cable

Fiber optic cables make connections within the network or between two FOMs or modems fromthe node end. The AT&T 1860A or 1801B interconnection or the Lightguide Building Cabling(LGBC) series of cable is recommended.

The basic elements of fiber cables are the cable type and the cable connector.


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Cable Types

Fiber optic cables come in four basic designs:

single fiber cables used as patch cords

dual or quad fiber cables (containing two or four fibers per cable) for connection to opticalequipment

Lightpack cable (containing from two to 36 fibers per cable) used for cabling between floorsof a building

ribbon fiber cable (containing from two to 144 fibers per cable) used for cabling betweenfloors or between buildings

Cable Connectors

There are two types of fiber optic connectors used with Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 cabling: a 1005B biconic connector and an ST type connector. The biconic cable connectoris required at the cable ends that connect to high-speed trunk modules in the node and AT&TLTDM-32 multiplexers.

The following figure shows a sample fiber optic cable connector.

FIGURE A-2. Fiber Optic Biconic Cable Connector


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Cabling Equipment, Cable, and Adapter Terms

This section contains brief descriptions and illustrations of cables, adapters, and cablingequipment used in Datakit II VCS, BNS-1000, and BNS-2000 configurations, for generalinformation only. For specific ordering information, see Appendix B.

Cabling Equipment

The following are descriptions and illustrations of some common cabling equipment:

Building Distribution Cable Installation. Building distribution cable, such as AT&T B25A orB25AP cables, should be installed in cable trays, cable ducts, or under the floor. Cablesgenerally enter a room through a hole in the bottom of a wall post cap or via a drop pole.

Fiber Cable Work Station Outlets. When terminating fiber cabling at a work station, useoutlet hardware to protect the building cabling harness and for neatness and versatility. Theseoutlets terminate fibers or cables using brackets or plates on which fiber optic couplers areinstalled. Units are available for wall mounting (BS-1000A series) and floor mounting(PF-1000A series).

Fiber Optic Couplers. Fiber optic couplers align and hold connectors or fiber optic cablesterminated with connectors.

Fiber Optic Modem. A typical fiber optic modem is an AT&T fiber optic modem (LTDM-1).It uses time-division multiplexing and an asynchronous sampling scheme to multiplex six inputsignal lines (data and control) for transmission over fiber optic cable. LTDM-1 fiber cablecouplers are compatible with 1005B connectors on AT&T cables.

Fiber Optic Multiplexer (FOM). A typical fiber optic multiplexer (FOM) is the 32-channelAT&T Lightwave Time Division Multiplexer (LTDM-32). The LTDM-32 multiplexes up to32 EIA RS-232-C channels onto a fiber optic cable and provides both synchronous andasynchronous operation. The LTDM-32 fiber cable couplers are compatible with 1005Bconnectors on AT&T cables.

FOM or Modem Cabinets. Use cabinets or racks to mount fiber optic multiplexers or modems.A suitable cabinet is the KS-20018 cabinet (DATAPHONE cabinet). Several different sizecabinets are available in the KS-20018 series family. Use large-size cabinets at the node endand smaller-size cabinets at the terminating end of the configuration.

Input/Output Distribution Boards. Input/Output (I/O) distribution boards are circuit boardsinstalled at the rear of the Datakit II VCS node, BNS-1000 node, BNS-2000 node, MPC7cabinet, or MPC15 cabinet. The I/O board physically connects cables to the interface module.

Optical Cross-Connection Panel. The optical cross-connection panel is assembled with 100ALightguide interconnect equipment in a double-ended cross-connection arrangement. Twocable couplers are connected by a jumper cable for each connection through the patch panel.ST couplers (P-2020A-C-125) are preferred for use with the cross-connect module.

The following figure illustrates the cross-connect arrangement.


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________

Door

StrandedFiber Cable 100A LG

InterconnectionUnit P-2020A-C-125*

Connectors onFiber Cable

1A4 LGCable Trough

10A LG* ConnectorPanel with Six

C-2000A Couplers forST (P-2020A-C-125)

Connectors

CableBracket

CableClamps (9)

*Preferred

A. Two cross-connect modules with doors open showing internal cabling.

B. A 48 x 48 ( 48 fibers in and 48 fibers out) configuration example. Modules can be stacked 6 high vertically and 12 wide horizontally. To build this 48 x 48 cross-connect panel, order eight 100A LG interconnection units, sixteen connector panels, eight 1A4 LG troughs, two 1A6 LG troughs, and 96 couplers.

FeederCable

Modules

DistributionCable

Modules

1A6 LG Express TroughJumper Cables

FIGURE A-3. Optical Cross-Connection Modules


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Optical Interconnection Panel. The interconnection panel is assembled with 100A Lightguide

interconnect equipment and is a single-ended patching arrangement that provides a single-cablecoupler for each fiber. ST couplers (P-2020A-C-125) are preferred for use with theinterconnect module.

The following figure illustrates the interconnection panel arrangement.

FeederCables

Doors

CableBracket

100A LGInterconnection

UnitDistribution

Cables

P-2020A-C125*Connectorson Cable

10A LG Connector Panelwith Six C-2000A-2 Couplers

for ST (P-2020A-C-125)Connectors

* Preferred

FIGURE A-4. Optical Interconnection Panel


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Patch Cords (110 series). Patch cords are double-ended, 8-wire cords used at the 110 patch

panel to allow connection on a per-interface port basis between any incoming and outgoingport on the patch panel. The patch cords have special connectors that fit on the 110 terminalblocks. With certain restrictions, you can also use 6-wire patch cords.

The following figure shows a sample 110 series patch cord.

Connector for 110 Terminal Block

FIGURE A-5. Patch Cord


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Special Fiber Jumper Cables. Special jumper cables connect non-AT&T FOMs or modems to

a building cabling harness with AT&T fiber optic couplers on the fiber cable or interconnectionhardware. Special jumper cables are necessary because connectors from other manufacturersare not compatible with AT&T connectors.

The following figure shows a sample special fiber jumper cable.

AT&T Fiber Optic Couplers

FIGURE A-6. Special Fiber Jumper Cable

Universal Lightguide Closure. This closure is used as a splice box for connecting ribbonbackbone cables to stranded distribution cables. It contains four-cable entry ports and iscompatible with all AT&T fiber optic cable sheaths.

Wire Closet. Also called a telephone or satellite closet, it is located between the switchequipment room and the work locations it serves. The closet is a point of cross-connection forthe building cabling.


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________103A Modular Jack Connecting Block. Also referred to as an information outlet, this device

provides a modular jack and quick-connect terminals for terminating 4-pair distribution cablesat the workstation. Other available jacks provide for outlet box mounting and for two modularjacks.

The following figure shows a sample modular jack connecting block.

FIGURE A-7. Modular Jack Connecting Block


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________110 Patch Panel. A 110 patch panel system permits maximum flexibility of interface modules

(e.g., TY12) by supplying connections only to the wired terminal circuits to be used. It reducesthe amount of work done within the node cabinet and the possibility of node failure and wiringcongestion within the network. The 110 connecting block accommodates both patch cords andconventional jumper wires. Unconnectorized panels are available for field termination ofcables.

The following figure shows a diagram of the 110 patch panel terminal block frames.

HorizontalPatch CordTrough

TerminalBlock

Terminal Block Row(Each horizontal rowhas 50 wire terminals.)

Vertical PatchCord Trough

Field TerminationTerminal Block Frame

FIGURE A-8. 110 Patch Panel Terminal Block Frames


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________Cables and Adapters

The following are descriptions and illustrations of some common cables and adapters:

A25RX Cable. The A25RX 50-wire cable connects the VDM cabinet to the Main DistributingFrame (MDF) in the central office (CO). Each cable handles 12 voice/data circuits.

FIGURE A-9. A25RX Cable

Adapter Plug. Adapter plugs are used to convert the straight-through wiring of the D8W(modular plug to modular plug) to other wiring schemes and is attached to the back of theterminal. This allows a building to be pre-wired with the straight through wirings so individualterminals can be connected at a later time using adapter plugs.

FIGURE A-10. Adapter Plug


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________B25A, B25AP, B25AS, and B25ASP Cables. An AT&T B25A (male-female) cable extends

from a patch panel and attaches to fiber-optic multiplexers (FOMs), modems, terminals, orcomputers. The B25A can also be used to extend a shielded cable with unshielded cable.These cables contain 25-pair wires with a plug on the patch panel end and a receptacle at theterminating end of the configuration. The B25A cable is offered with plenum (B25AP),shielded (B25AS), or plenum/shielded (B25ASP) cable.

FIGURE A-11. B25A Cable

B25FS-1MOD Cable. The AT&T B25FS-1MOD (male-male) shielded cable connects thenode to patch panels, FOMs, or multiplexers. The B25FS-1MOD cables are 25-pair cables thatprovide for six 8-wire interface ports.

FIGURE A-12. B25FS-1MOD Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________C25AS Cable. The AT&T C25AS cable is a 50-wire shielded cable with a male 50-pin

connector on one end and a male V.35 connector on the other end.

FIGURE A-13. C25AS Cable

D8AG Cable. The D8AG modular terminal cable has a 25-pin EIA RS-232-C connector(female) at one end for connections to terminals or computers and an 8-wire modular plug(male) at the information outlet end of the configuration.

FIGURE A-14. D8AG Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________D8AH Cable. The D8AH cable has a subminiature 25-pin EIA RS-232-C connector plug

(male) at one end for connections to data sets and fiber optic modems or multiplexers and an8-wire (male) modular plug (male) at the other end.

FIGURE A-15. D8AH Cable

D8W Cable. The D8W cable is a modular plug to modular plug cable with straight-throughwiring. This cable is used with terminal adapters.

FIGURE A-16. D8W Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________HD-2V.35M Cable. The HD-2V.35M cable is a Y cable used in CPMML-HS, TSM-T1, and

FRM (V.35) applications. The HD-2V.35M contains one 50-pin subminiature RS-232-Cconnector (male) and two V.35 (male) connectors on the other end. The maximum length forthis cable is 10 feet, however a V.35 cable can be used as an extension.

FIGURE A-17. HD-2V.35M Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________M25A and M25B Cables. M25A and M25B cables are used to connect RS-232-C connectors

from I/O boards to terminating equipment. The M25A cable is also used to extend SYNC-4Fadapter cords to connect to subrate DSUs, modems, or multiplexers. The M25A cable has onemale connector and one female connector. The M25B cable has two male connectors.

FIGURE A-18. M25A Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________M8AC Cable. The M8AC cable is used as a patching system to connect only the desired

terminal ports. One end of the cable is attached to a FOM or modem and the other end(terminating end) of the cable is plugged into an adapter. Connections extend to a patch panel,terminals, or computers. Each cable has an 8-wire modular plug (male) on one end—which fitsinto the modular jack of an adapter—and an RS-232-C connector (female) on the other end.

FIGURE A-19. M8AC Cable

M48D Cable. The M48D cable connects an AT&T B25FS or B25FS1 cable extending from thenode to a FOM or modem. This cable converts the 25-pair jack (female) of the cable to sixlegs; one leg is for each of the terminal ports provided in the cable. Each leg terminates with a25-pin EIA RS-232-C plug (male).

FIGURE A-20. M48D Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________M48E Cable. The M48E cable provides a connection from a FOM or modem to a patch panel

through an an AT&T B25A or B25AP cable. The M48E cable converts the 25-pair plug (male)of the cable to six legs; one leg is for each of the terminal ports provided in the cable. Each legterminates with a 25-pin EIA RS-232-C plug (male).

FIGURE A-21. M48E Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________SYNC4-M, SYNC4-F, SYNC6-M, and SYNC6-F Cables. The SYNC4-M and SYNC4-F

connector cables provide a connection from a B25FS (or B25FS1) cable to a modem or directlyto a computer or terminal. The SYNC4-M cord converts a 25-pair cable into four male RS-232-C legs; the SYNC4-F cord converts a 25-pair into four female RS-232-C legs. This cableis also available with six legs as the SYNC6-M and SYNC6-F cables.

FIGURE A-22. SYNC4-F Cable

FIGURE A-23. SYNC6-F Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________V.35 Cable. The V.35 cable is frequently used to extend the length of cabling in V.35

applications. This cable has a male V.35 connector on one end and a female V.35 connector onthe other end.

FIGURE A-24. V.35 Cable

V.35-DSU Cable. The V.35-DSU cable connects an SWT module to a COASTCOM DSU.This cable has a 25-pin RS-232-C (male) connector on one end and a V.35 (female) connectoron the other end.

FIGURE A-25. V.35-DSU Cable


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________258A, 258AF, 258B, 258BF, 258C, and 258CF Adapters. The 258 series adapters are

multicontact miniature connectors consisting of six 8-conductor modular jacks on one side ofthe adapter, and a 50-pin connector on the other side which connects 25-pair cables to FOMs,modems, terminals, or computers. The 258A, 258B, and 258C adapters have male 50-pinconnectors, and the 258AF, 258BF, and 258CF have female 50-pin connectors. The 258A and258AF adapters are designed with the 50-pin connector at a right angle to the modular plugs,and the 258B, 258C, 258BF, and 258CF adapters have the 50-pin connector at a 180° angle tothe modular plugs.

FIGURE A-26. 258A Adapter


Appendix A. Cable, Adapter, and Cabling Equipment Descriptions________________451A Adapter. The 451A adapter is an in-line double-ended modular jack that accepts four or

eight conductor modular plugs. This adapter is used where plug inversion is required tomaintain correct modularity.

103AConnecting

Block

8-PinModular

Jack

Press on wire connection caps for

terminating wires on 103A.

FIGURE A-27. 451A Adapter


________________Appendix B.

Cable and AdapterOrdering Information

Appendix B contains details on ordering cables and adapters. It includes sections on:

how to organize an order using the correct format

— how to organize an order by Engineering Drawing Codes (ED codes)

— how to organize an order by Comcodes

how to place an order

— how to place an engineered order

— how to place an order using the fax routine

— how to place an order using the National Parts Sales Center (NPSC)

cable and adapter ordering information

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 B-3

Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________How to Organize an Order Using the Correct Format

After you determine the cabling requirements for the network, you are ready to organize the cableand adapter ordering information into an order using the correct format.

Since the cabling requirements for most networks involve large quantities of cables and numerousadapters, it is essential that this data collection process be organized. This section explains astep-by-step approach on how to consolidate the cabling information collected from Chapter 1through Chapter 8 and how to organize this information and prepare an order.

PROCEDURE B-1. Organizing the Cable Order

Before you begin this procedure, you should have identified the type and the length of each cableand adapter to be ordered for all the network interfaces. Detailed cable layouts showing the cableruns for all applications are a prerequisite in determining the types, quantities, and lengths for allthe cables.

1. Prepare a list of the adapters that are needed. Show each adapter name, such as 258BF, thequantity of each of the adapters, and the appropriate ordering information (i.e., ED codes).Keep this information until you are ready to prepare the order and then refer to ProcedureB-2, Ordering by ED Codes.

2. Prepare a list of the cables that are needed. Show each cable name, such as B25FS-1MOD,and the quantity of each of the cables. Write down the appropriate ordering information (i.e.,ED codes) for each cable. The ordering codes are listed following the cable configurationfigures throughout this guide in Chapter 1 through Chapter 8 and are also listed in thetables in this appendix. Show the number of cables and the length in feet as illustratedbelow by cable name.

_ ______________________Cable name ED codes_ _______________________ ______________________B25FS-1MOD G-200,G-C_ _______________________ ______________________

Quantity Length (ft)_ _______________________ ______________________1 25′_ ______________________1 22′_ ______________________

15 30′_ ______________________1 14′_ ______________________2 22′_ ______________________3 25′_ ______________________

B-4 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________PROCEDURE B-1. Organizing the Cable Order (continued)

3. For spider cables (i.e., cables that split into six branches) you need to list two lengths: theoverall length of the cable in feet and the length of the branches in feet.

_ ____________________________Cable name ED codes_ _____________________________ ____________________________

M48D G-109, G-E_ _____________________________ ____________________________Length (ft)_ ________________

Quantity Overall Branch_ _____________________________ ____________________________1 25′ 5′_ ____________________________1 22′ 5′_ ____________________________5 15′ 5′_ ____________________________3 25′ 5′_ ____________________________2 15′ 5′_ ____________________________

4. Consolidate the list for each cable type to group together cables with the same length._ ______________________

Cable name ED codes_ _______________________ ______________________B25FS-1MOD G-200,G-C_ _______________________ ______________________

Quantity Length (ft)_ _______________________ ______________________15 30′_ ______________________4 25′_ ______________________3 22′_ ______________________1 14′_ ______________________

_ ____________________________Cable name ED codes_ _____________________________ ____________________________

M48D G-109, G-E_ _____________________________ ____________________________Length (ft)_ ________________

Quantity Overall Branch_ _____________________________ ____________________________4 25′ 5′_ ____________________________1 22′ 5′_ ____________________________7 15′ 5′_ ____________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________PROCEDURE B-1. Organizing the Cable Order (continued)

5. Multiply the overall cable lengths by the quantity of cables for each length to calculate thetotal length of cable required. Note the total on the same line as the other information forthat group of cables.

_ ___________________________________Cable name ED codes_ ____________________________________ ___________________________________B25FS-1MOD G-200, G-C_ ____________________________________ ___________________________________

Quantity Length (ft) Total length_ ____________________________________ ___________________________________15 30′ 450′_ ___________________________________4 25′ 100′_ ___________________________________3 22′ 66′_ ___________________________________1 14′ 14′_ ___________________________________

_ _________________________________________Cable name ED codes_ __________________________________________ _________________________________________

M48D G-109, G-E_ __________________________________________ _________________________________________Length (ft)_ _____________________________

Quantity Overall Branch Total Length_ __________________________________________ _________________________________________7 15′ 5′ 105′_ _________________________________________4 25′ 5′ 100′_ _________________________________________1 22′ 5′ 22′_ _________________________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________How to Organize an Order by ED Codes

This section explains how to organize the cable and adapter information (obtained by followingProcedure B-1) into the correct format using ED codes. In order to ensure proper orderprocessing, you must follow these instructions exactly as specified.

Description of ED Codes

The ED code consists of an ED number (e.g., ED5P055-31) followed by either one or two codes,illustrated as follows:

ED5P055-31, G-150ED5P055-31, G-200, G-C

The first code (i.e., numeric group number) specifies the connectors of the cables or individualadapters.

The second code (i.e., alpha group number) specifies the cable type (e.g., standard, shielded,plenum, and so forth) to be used to form a cable with the connectors.

PROCEDURE B-2. Ordering by ED Codes

1. Adapters are ordered by a single numeric code that identifies the adapter. Write the quantityof the adapters required along with the engineering drawing (ED) number and the specifiedgroup number. Enter a comment on the next line to describe what is being ordered. Use thefollowing format:

15 ED5P055-31, G-15215 adapters

The preceding example illustrates an order for fifteen (15) 258AF adapters. See Table B-1,Adapter Ordering Information, later in this appendix for a complete listing of adapters.

2. Cables are ordered by a numeric and an alpha group number since all cables are of variablelengths. Write the quantity of the cables required along with the engineering drawing (ED)number and the specified numeric group number. On the next line, write F/E (i.e., FurnishEquipped). Then, write the total length* of the cable on the next line, followed by the alphagroup number. Enter a comment on the next line to describe what is being ordered. Use thefollowing format:

15 ED5P055-31, G-200F/E

450 G-C15 cables, 30 feet each

________________

* The total length can be obtained from the calculations you previously performed in Procedure B-1.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________PROCEDURE B-2. Ordering by ED Codes (continued)

The preceding example illustrates an order for fifteen (15) B25FS-1MOD cables. Each cableis 30 feet in length. See Cable Ordering Information with ED Codes, later in this appendix,for a complete listing of cables along with their associated ED codes.

3. If you are ordering a spider cable, add a note describing the length of the legs. Use thefollowing format:

7 ED5P055-31, G-109F/E

105 G-E7 cables, 15 feet each, 5 feet each branch

The preceding example illustrates an order for seven (7) M48D spider cables. Each cable is15 feet in length, with each of its legs five feet in length. See Cable Ordering Informationwith ED Codes, later in this appendix, for a complete listing of cables along with theirassociated ED codes.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________How to Organize an Order by Comcodes

This section describes Comcodes and explains how to organize the cable and adapter information(obtained by following Procedure B-1) into the correct format using Comcodes. In order toensure proper order processing, you must follow these instructions exactly as specified.

Description of Comcodes

Unlike ED codes, a Comcode indicates a specific fixed length cable or an adapter of a specifictype. The cables and adapters that are available to be ordered only by Comcodes are as follows:

several adapters—listed in Table B-1

stocked high-volume cables available through the NPSC—listed in Table B-2

A25D double-ended cables—listed in Table B-3

FL2P-P and FL2P-B fiber optic cables—listed in Table B-4

Comcodes are 9-digit codes. A few examples follow:

105012637100963990104244975

The Comcode shown on the first line above specifies a 355A adapter. The second Comcodespecifies an A25D double-ended cable (15 feet in length), and the last Comcode specifies anFL2P-B fiber optic cable (15 feet in length).

PROCEDURE B-3. Ordering by Comcodes

1. Enter the quantity of adapters required, followed by the Comcode assigned for that specificadapter. Use the following format:

3 104270723

The preceding example illustrates an order for three (3) 355B adapters. See Table B-1(Adapter Ordering Information) for a complete listing of the several adapters that areavailable to be ordered with Comcodes.

2. Enter the quantity of cables required, followed by the Comcode assigned for that specificlength of cable. Use the following format:

10 104266523

The preceding example illustrates an order for ten (10) FL2P-P cables (ST connectors onboth ends). Each cable is 50 feet in length. See Table B-4, FL2P-P and FL2P-B Fiber OpticCable Ordering Information, later in this appendix for a complete listing of fiber optic cablesalong with their associated Comcodes.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________How to Place an Order

You can place an order by contacting your AT&T Line Engineer or Technical Consultant or usingan interactive on-line system (DKNC), by using the fax routine, or by calling the 800 number ofthe National Parts Sales Center (NPSC).

How to Place an Engineered Order

AT&T offers the following assistance in placing cable orders.

AT&T Line Engineers and Technical Consultants have been assigned to your particularregion. These AT&T technical personnel can assist in developing detailed cable layouts foryour network and offer suggestions regarding cabling options. After reviewing the materialwith you, AT&T will place the order.

The Datakit II VCS Node Configuration (DKNC) is also available for your use. DKNC is aninteractive on-line system used to configure nodes. It provides a subsystem called DKable toassist you in organizing and formatting your cable order.

For more information regarding assistance in ordering cables and adapters, please contact yourlocal AT&T Account Executive.

How to Place Orders Using the Fax Routine

When you place an order for cables and adapters, you can expect to receive your order within fourweeks. We know that, at times, it is necessary for you to receive your order more quickly to meetlast minute installation needs. Therefore, we have established a routine that allows you to receivea small amount (i.e., less than twenty items) of cables and adapters within one to three days.

On the next page you will find the Fax Cable Order Form (Expedited Service) that allows you toorder cables, spider cables, and adapters via the expedited fax routine. Do not write directly onthis form, but make as many copies of it as you require.

Contact your AT&T Account Executive to obtain the fax information required in the next to thelast section on the form (i.e.,To:______, Location:_______, Telephone Voice:______,Telephone Fax:______, etc.) for the AT&T Regional Office serving your area.

After receiving this information, fax the form and purchase requisition to the AT&T RegionalOffice. The order management group at the AT&T Regional Office will identify the order asSVM, assign an AT&T order number, and then fax to order to the manufacturing location.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________

Order No: Spec/Req:

Mfg Location: CB Fax No: (614) 555-1234

Contact: Eileen Burchett Phone: (614) 555-1234

From Region: House ID: Func Acct Code:

Today's Date:

Prepared by Contact:

Mode of Shipment: Premium (Air Express) Standard (UPS)

DATA NETWORKING PRODUCTSFAX CABLE ORDER

(EXPEDITED SERVICE)

ShipTo

Info

OrderInfo

FaxInfo

ForAT&TUseOnly

Ship To Mark Package

Hold For:

Expedite To:

Office Phone:

Home Phone:

Cables (All Cables Except Spider Cables - See Below)

ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION

ED5P055-31 G

F/E

G

Cables FT Each

Spider Cables


ED5P055-31 G

F/E

G

Cables FT Each,

FT Each Branch

Adapters


ED5P055-31 G

To:

Telephone Voice:

Comments:

Location:Telephone Fax:

Page_____ Of_____

Required Job Date:

Tel. No.:

Order Format Example

QTY

15

150

DESCRIPTION

ED5P055-31 G-120

F/E

G-C

15 Cables 10 FT Each




Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________How to Place Orders Using the National Parts Sales Center (NPSC)

You can order certain frequently used cables through the National Parts Sales Center (NPSC).These particular cables represent the most commonly ordered cable types and associated cablelengths that are pre-built and stocked for off-the-shelf delivery.

Ordering from the NPSC provides:

a catalog sales-type service

a toll-free 800 number (1 800 222-PART)

credit card billing

charge account capability

short delivery interval (e.g., two to three days)

See Table B-2 later in this appendix for a list of the high-volume cables that are available to beordered through the NPSC.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________Cable and Adapter Order Codes

The following tables contain the ordering information for cables and adapters used in connectingequipment for Datakit II VCS configurations.

Table B-1 (Adapter Ordering Information) contains adapter ordering information. It listsdescriptions for each adapter, the adapter name, and the associated ED code and Comcode.

Cable Ordering Information with ED Codes contains cable ordering information. It listsdescriptions for each cable, cable names according to cable types (i.e., standard, shielded,plenum, and shielded/plenum), and the associated ED codes.

Table B-2 (Stocked High-Volume Cables Available Through NPSC) contains cable orderinginformation for stocked high-volume cables that are available through NPSC. It lists thenames of these cables, their most commonly ordered lengths, and the associated Comcodes.

Table B-3, A25D Double-Ended Cables, contains Comcodes for ordering A25D cables instandard lengths.

Table B-4, Fiber Optic Cable Ordering Information, contains Comcodes for ordering AT&TFL2P-P and FL2P-B fiber optic cables in standard lengths.

Adapter Ordering Information

Table B-1 contains adapter ordering information. It lists descriptions for each adapter, the adaptername, and the associated ED code, and, where applicable, an associated Comcode.

Most adapters only have an ED code, but several several adapters (e.g., 355A, 355AF, 355B, andso forth) can only be ordered with Comcodes. These adapters do not have an ED code.

For instructions on how to organize your order using the correct format, see How to Organize anOrder by ED Codes or How to Organize an Order by Comcodes earlier in this appendix.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________TABLE B-1. Adapter Ordering Information

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Description Adapter Name ED5P055-31 Comcode_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

50-pin-M6 8-pin modular socket(side entry)

258A G-153

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-F6 8-pin modular socket(side entry)

258AF G-152

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-M6 8-pin modular socket(rear entry)

258B G-154

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-F6 8-pin modular socketrear entry

258BF G-155

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-M6 8-pin modular socket(side entry)

258C G-209

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-F6 8-pin modular socket(side entry)

258CF G-210

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-M8-pin modular socket

355A 105012637

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-F8-pin modular socket

355AF 105012645


355B 104270723


355BF 104270731

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-F8 8-pin-F

356A 104158829

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-M50-pin-F

Controller Interface G-215

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-M25-pin-M(null terminal)

DCE to DCE G-208

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-F25-pin-F

DTE to DTE G-223

_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________TABLE B-1. Adapter Ordering Information (continued)_ ____________________________________________________________________________

Description Adapter Name ED5P055-31 Comcode_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-F8-pin modular socket

RS-232-C(F) Loopback G-212

_ ____________________________________________________________________________78-pin-M4 25-pin-M

M78-4X25M G-224

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-F8-pin modular socket(null modem wiring)

D8AG G-138


D8AH-F G-147


D8AH-M G-139

_ ____________________________________________________________________________25-pin-M8-pin modular socket(null modem wiring)

D8AN G-140

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin 90°-M8 25-pin-M

M48F 104258157


RS-232-C(M) Loopback G-211


SAM/DSU-M G-158

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin 180°-M50-pin 180°-F

SAM T1 846384923

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-M50-pin-F

SAM to VDM G-201


SYNC DCE-F G-150


SYNC DCE-M G-148


SYNC DTE-F G-151


SYNC DTE-M G-149

_ ____________________________________________________________________________50-pin-M50-pin-F

T1 Clock G-205

_ ____________________________________________________________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________Cable Ordering Information with ED Codes

The following table contains cable ordering information. It lists descriptions for each cable, cablenames according to cable types (i.e., standard, shielded, plenum, and shielded/plenum), and theassociated ED codes.

For instructions on how to organize your order using the correct format, see How to Organize anOrder by ED Codes earlier in this appendix.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information_________________ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__S

tan

dar

d

Sh

ield

ed

Ple

nu

m

Sh

ield

ed-P

len

um

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 80-

M, 1

80-M

B

25F

G(1

00),

G(F

) B

25FS

G

(117

), G

(K)

B25

FP

G(1

00),

G(B

) B

25FS

P G

(117

), G

(Y)

(BA

IL S

LO

T)

_ ___

____

____

__F2

5FS-

1 G

(101

), G

(C)

____

____

____

____

____

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

00),

G(A

B

25FS

P-1

G(1

01),

G(Y

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

SPE

CIA

L S

CR

EW

/ST

AN

DO

FFB

25FS

-LS

G(2

18),

G(X

) B

25FS

-LSP

G

(218

), G

(Y)

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 9

0-M

, 180

-M (

MO

D)

(BA

IL S

LO

T)

B25

FS-1

MO

D

G(2

00),

G(C

) B

25FS

P-1M

OD

G

(200

), G

(Y)

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 9

0-M

, 90-

F B

25A

G

(108

), G

(F)

B25

AS

G(1

23),

G(C

) B

25A

P G

(113

), G

(B)

B25

ASP

G

(123

), G

(Y)

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

08),

G(A

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

B

25FX

G

(116

), G

(F)

B25

FSX

G

(129

), G

(K)

B25

FXP

G(1

16),

G(B

) B

25FS

XP

G(1

29),

G(Y

)(B

AIL

SL

OT

)_ _

____

____

____

__

____

____

____

____

___ _

____

____

____

G(1

16),

G(A

) B

25FS

X-1

G

(162

), G

(C)

B25

FSX

P-1

G(1

62),

G(Y

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

(M

OD

) B

25FS

X-1

MO

D

G(2

04),

G(C

) B

25FS

XP-

1MO

D

G(2

04),

G(Y

)

(BA

IL S

LO

TS)

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 180

-F

B25

AX

G

(122

), G

(F)

B25

AX

P G

(122

), G

(B)

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

22),

G(A

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 90-

F, 9

0-F

A25

R-D

E G

(102

), G

(F)

A25

BP-

DE

G

(104

), G

(B)

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

02),

G(A

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 90-

F, B

UT

T

A25

R-S

E

G(1

03),

G(A

) A

25B

P-SE

G

(105

), G

(B)

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

03),

G(F

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 90-

M, 9

0-M

A

25U

G

(114

), G

(F)

A25

US

G(1

24),

G(C

) A

25U

P G

(114

), G

(B)

A25

USP

G

(124

), G

(Y)

_ ___

____

____

__

G(1

14),

G(A

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information_________________ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

Sta

nd

ard

S

hie

lded

P

len

um

S

hie

lded

-Ple

nu

m_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 90-

M, 9

0-M

C

PM-4

22B

(G

165)

, G(A

K)

SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

G_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 1

80-F

, BU

TT

A

25R

X

G(1

15),

G(A

) A

25R

XP

G(1

15),

G(B

)__

____

____

____

__

G(1

15),

G(F

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, BU

TT

A

25R

XM

G

(167

), G

(A)

A25

RX

MP

G(1

67),

G(B

)__

____

____

____

__

G(1

67),

G(F

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 9

0-M

, BU

TT

A

25W

G

(126

), G

(A)

____

____

____

____

G(1

26),

G(F

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 180

-F

M25

A

G(1

07),

G(P

) M

25A

S G

(118

), G

(L)

M25

AP

G(1

07),

G(A

B)

M25

ASP

G

(118

), G

(Z)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

M

25B

G

(108

), G

(P)

M25

BS

G(1

19),

G(L

) M

25B

P G

(108

), G

(AB

) M

25B

SP

G(1

19),

G(Z

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 180

-F(M

OD

) M

25A

S-M

OD

G

(178

), G

(L)

M25

ASP

-MO

D

G(1

78),

G(Z

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 180

-M(M

OD

) M

25B

S-M

OD

G

(179

), G

(L)

M25

BSP

-MO

D

G(1

79),

G(Z

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 180

-F

M25

AS-

NH

G

(180

), G

(L)

M25

ASP

-NH

G

(190

), G

(Z)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

(MO

D)

M25

BS-

MO

D

G(1

79),

G(L

) M

25B

SP-M

OD

G

(178

), G

(Z)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-F

NA

RR

OW

HO

OD

M25

AS-

NH

G

(190

), G

(L)

M25

ASP

-NH

G

(190

), G

(Z)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

, 180

-M, 1

80-M

NA

RR

OW

HO

OD

M25

BS-

NH

G

(191

), G

(L)

M25

BSP

-NH

G

(191

), G

(Z)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-M, 2

5-PI

N-H

SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

GM

25B

-DSU

G(1

88),

G(A

M)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, 2

5-PI

N-M

SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

GM

25A

S-D

SU

G(1

89),

G(A

L)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-M, 2

25-

PIN

-MSA

M/8

4 C

EY

4M

25X

S G

(218

), G

(AL

)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_



____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

Sta

nd

ard

S

hie

lded

P

len

um

S

hie

lded

-Ple

nu

m_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 90-

F, 6

25-

PIN

-M

M48

D

G(1

09),

G(E

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 9

0-M

, 6 2

5-PI

N-M

M

48E

G

(110

), G

(E)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 90-

F, 6

25-

PIN

-F

M48

EX

G

(168

), G

(E)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 80-

M, 6

25-

PIN

-F

M48

DX

G

(111

), G

(E)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 180

-F, 6

25-

PIN

-F

SYN

C6-

F G

(112

), G

(E)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 180

-M, 6

8-P

IN

ASY

NC

G

(189

), G

(S)

MO

D P

LU

GS

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

HD

-M, 2

V.3

5-M

H

D-2

V.3

5M

G(2

22),

AS

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 180

-M, V

.35-

M

C25

AS

G(1

20),

G(C

) C

25A

SP

G(1

20),

G(Y

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, V.3

5-M

(MO

D)

C25

AS-

MO

D

G(2

02),

G(C

) C

25A

SP-M

OD

G

(202

), G

(Y)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_V

.35-

M, V

.35-

F C

CIT

T V

.35

G(1

21),

G(Q

) C

CIT

T V

.35(

SP)

G(1

21),

G(A

A)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 180

-M, R

S-44

9-M

C

25A

SX

G(1

25),

G(C

) C

25A

SXP

G(1

25),

G(Y

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, RS-

449-

M

C25

ASX

-MO

D

G(2

03),

G(C

) C

25A

SXP-

MO

D

G(2

03),

G(Y

)(M

OD

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 87-

PIN

C

25A

SX-N

H

G(1

82),

G(C

) C

25A

SXP-

NH

G

(192

), G

(Y)

180-

M, N

AR

RO

W H

OO

D_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

RS-

449-

M, V

.35-

M

SAM

35

G(1

27),

G(N

) SA

M35

(SP)

G

(127

), G

(AA

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

RS-

448-

M, R

S-44

9-M

SA

M44

9 G

(128

), G

(N)

SAM

449(

SP)

G(1

28),

G(A

A)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_R

S-44

9-F,

25

PIN

-M

BS-

449-

F G

(221

), G

(T)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, M

OD

PL

UG

, NM

W

D8A

G

G(1

30),

G(G

) D

8AG

P G

(130

), G

(AC

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___



____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_S

tan

dar

d

Sh

ield

ed

Ple

nu

m

Sh

ield

ed-P

len

um

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, M

OD

PL

UG

D

8AH

G

(131

), G

(G)

D8A

HP

G(1

31),

G(A

C)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN-M

, MO

D P

LU

G

D8A

HX

G

(133

), G

(G)

D8A

HX

P G

(133

), G

(AC

)SP

EC

IAL

WIR

ING

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN-M

, MO

D P

LU

G, N

MW

D

8AN

G

(132

), G

(G)

D8A

NP

G(1

32),

G(A

C)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN-M

, MO

D P

LU

G N

MW

D

8AN

X

G(1

34),

G(G

) D

8AN

XP

G(1

34),

G(A

C)

SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

G_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-M, M

OD

PL

UG

, D

6AU

X

G(1

38),

G(H

)6-

WIR

E_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_M

OD

PL

UG

BO

TH

EN

DS

D8A

A

G(1

34),

G(G

) D

8AA

P G

(134

), G

(AC

)(R

EV

WIR

ING

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-M, M

OD

PL

UG

M

8AC

G

(135

), G

(G)

M8A

CP

G(1

35),

G(A

C)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

25-P

IN-M

, 25-

PIN

-F

M6B

D

G(1

36),

G(J

) M

6BD

S G

(186

), G

(AE

) M

6BD

P G

(136

), G

(AC

)6

WIR

E_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_M

OD

PL

UG

S B

OT

H E

ND

S,

D8W

G

(137

), G

(G)

DW

8AP

G(1

37),

G(A

C)

STR

TH

RO

UG

H_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, M

OD

PL

UG

M

8AF

G(1

42),

G(G

) M

8AFP

G

(142

), G

(AC

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_8-

PIN

MO

D P

LU

G,

Y-C

AB

LE

G

(143

), G

(G)

Y-C

AB

LE

(P)

G(1

43),

G(A

C)

TW

O 8

-PIN

MO

D P

LU

G_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_M

OD

PL

UG

, MO

D P

LU

G,

D6A

M

G(1

44),

G(H

)6-

WIR

E_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, M

OD

PL

UG

D

6AW

X

G(1

45),

G(H

)6-

WIR

E_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-M, M

OD

PL

UG

, D

6AY

X

G(1

46),

G(H

)6-

WIR

E_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 80-

F, 4

RS-

282-

M

SYN

C4-

M

G(1

60),

G(R

) SY

NC

4-M

(P)

G(1

60),

G(A

H)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information_________________ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__S

tan

dar

d

Sh

ield

ed

Ple

nu

m

Sh

ield

ed-P

len

um

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

Des

crip

tio

nN

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 9

0-F,

4 R

S-28

2-F

SYN

C4-

F G

(161

), G

(R)

SYN

C4-

F(P)

G

(161

), G

(AH

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 90-

F, 4

RS-

282-

M

SYN

C4-

MX

G

(217

), G

(R)

SYN

C4-

MX

(P)

G(2

17),

G(A

H)

SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

G T

SM-V

DM

ASY

NC

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-F

, 6 R

S-28

2-F

SYN

C8-

FB

G(1

68),

G(8

) SY

NC

E-F

SP

G(1

82),

G(A

J)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-F, 8

RS-

282-

F SY

NC

E-F

B-N

H

G(1

68),

G(8

)N

AR

RO

W H

OO

D_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-F, 6

25-

PIN

-M

SYN

C8-

FX

G(1

86),

G(E

)SP

EC

IAL

WIR

ING

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 6 R

S-28

2-F

SYN

C8-

M

G(1

84),

G(E

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__M

OD

PL

UG

, MO

D P

LU

G

T1-

CSU

-N1-

2 G

(180

), G

(AE

) T

1-C

SU/

G(1

80),

G(A

P)FC

C 3

-PIN

N1

N1-

2P_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__M

OD

PL

UG

, MO

D P

LU

G,

T1-

CSU

/N1-

3 G

(181

), G

(AE

) T

1-C

SU/

G(1

31),

G(A

P)15

-PIN

N1

N1-

1P_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__M

OD

PL

UG

, MO

D P

LU

G,

T1-

CSU

/N1-

1 G

(182

), G

(AE

) T

1-C

SU/

G(1

32),

G(A

P)A

TT

8-P

IN N

1 N

1-1P

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

15-P

IN-M

, 18-

PIN

-M,

T1-

DSU

/CSU

G

(183

), G

(AN

) T

1-D

SU/

G(1

83),

G(A

Q)

D C

ON

NE

CT

OR

C

SU-P

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

V.3

5-F,

RS-

282-

M

V.3

5-D

SU

G(1

84),

G(Q

) C

OA

STC

OM

G

(184

), G

(AA

)15

-PIN

NI

CA

BL

E-P

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____



____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__S

tan

dar

d

Sh

ield

ed

Ple

nu

m

Sh

ield

ed-P

len

um

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__50

-PIN

, 180

-M, R

S-28

2-M

T

1-D

SU

G(1

85),

G(G

) T

1-D

SU(P

) G

(185

), G

(AA

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__R

S-44

8-M

, RS-

282-

M

T1-

SAM

B4/

G

(187

), G

(T)

T1-

SAM

B4/

G

(187

), G

(AA

)D

SU

DSU

(P)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

V.3

5M, V

.35F

V

.35

G(1

70),

G(T

) V

.35-

BP

G(1

70),

G(A

A)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

V.3

5M, V

.36M

V

.35-

MM

G

(220

), G

(T)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

87-P

IN, 1

20-M

, 180

F R

S449

G

(171

), G

(T)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN, M

-F

RS2

82C

G

(175

), G

(Q)

(SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

G)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 90-

F M

20P

G(1

76),

G(A

N)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

, 90-

F M

42P

G(1

77),

G(A

R)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-M

, V.3

5 E

IA

V.3

5 IN

T

G(2

06),

G(Q

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__25

-PIN

-M D

-SU

B

G(2

07),

G(T

)37

-PIN

-F D

-SU

B

60-4

60X

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-F

, MO

D P

LU

G

D8A

G-S

P G

(216

), G

(G)

D8A

C-S

P-P

G(2

16),

G(A

C)

(SPE

CIA

L W

IRIN

G)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

8-PI

N-M

, MO

D P

LU

G

DB

9RJ4

5 G

(229

), G

(AE

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__15

-PIN

-M, 1

5-PI

N-M

A

U1.

5-C

SU

G(2

27),

G(A

N)

AU

1.5-

G

(227

), G

(AQ

)C

SU-S

P_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__15

-PIN

-M, B

UT

T-E

ND

ED

A

U1.

5-PD

G

(230

), G

(AN

) A

U1.

5-

G(2

30),

G(A

Q)

PD-S

P_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__



_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__S

tan

dar

d

Sh

ield

ed

Ple

nu

m

Sh

ield

ed-P

len

um

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

Des

crip

tio

nN

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

N

ame

ED

5P05

5-31

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN, 1

80-M

C

PM-M

OD

G

(231

), G

(AT

) C

PM-M

OD

-SP

(G23

1), G

(AU

)50

-PIN

, 80-

M(S

PEC

IAL

WIR

ING

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-M

, V.3

5-F

FRM

-GD

C

G(2

32),

G(Q

) FR

M-G

DC

-SP

G(2

32),

G(A

A)

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__C

OA

X-M

, CO

AX

-M

728B

G

(233

), G

(AV

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-M

, 25-

PIN

-M

M25

B-N

M

G(2

34),

G(A

Y)

M25

BB

-NM

G

(243

), G

(AL

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-F

, 25-

PIN

-M

M25

A-N

M

G(2

35),

G(A

M)

M25

AS-

NM

G

(241

), G

(AL

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

50-P

IN-M

, (2)

25-

PIN

-M

HD

-2D

B25

M

G(2

36),

G(A

S)SP

EC

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__26

-PIN

-M, 2

6-PI

N-M

SP

EC

-GD

C

G(2

37),

G(Q

) SP

EC

-ED

C-S

P G

(237

), G

(AA

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

(4)

16-P

IN-M

, BU

TT

- A

1-T

1/4

G(2

38),

G(A

W)

EN

DE

D_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

2-PI

N-M

, 3-P

IN-M

D

X8

G(2

88),

G(J

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

25-P

IN-F

, BU

TT

-EN

DE

D,

NM

U-9

E

G(2

42),

G(J

) N

MU

-9E

-P

G(2

42),

G(A

C)

8 W

IRE

_ ___

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__26

-PIN

-M, 2

6-PI

N-M

SP

EC

-UD

S G

(244

), G

(Q)

SPE

C-U

DSP

G

(244

), G

(AA

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

(4)

60-P

IN-M

, (8)

60-

PIN

-F

TY

-AIM

G

(240

), G

(AX

)_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____



____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

Sta

nd

ard

S

hie

lded

P

len

um

S

hie

lded

-Ple

nu

m_ _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

__D

escr

ipti

on

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31

Nam

e E

D5P

055-

31_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_16

-PIN

-M, 1

6-PI

N-M

C

H10

-CR

OSS

G

(246

), G

(AN

) C

H10

-CR

OSS

-P

G(2

48),

G(A

Q)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_16

-PIN

-M, 8

-PIN

MO

D P

LU

G

CH

10-M

OD

G

(247

), G

(AE

) C

H10

-MO

D-P

G

(247

), G

(AP)

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_25

-PIN

-F, 2

5-PI

N-M

M

28FT

G

(243

), G

(AL

)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

16-P

IN-M

, 8-P

IN M

OD

PL

UG

C

H10

-MO

D-B

G

(250

), G

(AE

) C

H10

-MO

D-S

-P

G(2

50),

G(A

P)_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

50-P

IN H

D-M

T

RK

-PQ

HD

-V.3

5M

G(2

51),

G(A

S)T

O V

.35-

M_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

DB

-15-

M T

O

FRM

-E1-

75

G(2

52),

G(A

Y)

(2)

75 O

HM

CO

AX

BN

C-M

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_50

-PIN

, 90-

M T

O

B25

FS-1

MO

DF

G(2

54),

G(C

) B

25FS

P-1M

OD

F G

(254

), G

(C)

50-P

IN, 1

80-F

G

(Y)

BA

IL S

LO

T_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

734A

CO

AX

, 73

4 G

(255

), G

(AZ

)ST

RA

IGH

T B

NC

-MB

OT

H E

ND

S_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

734A

CO

AX

, 73

4-90

STR

AIG

HT

BN

C-M

G

(256

), G

(AZ

)T

O 9

0 B

NC

-M_ __

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

728B

CO

AX

, 72

8B-9

0ST

RA

IGH

T B

NC

-M

G(2

57),

G(A

V)

TO

90

BN

C-M

_ ____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________Stocked High-Volume Cables Available Through the National Parts SalesCenter (NPSC)

Table B-2 contains cable ordering information for stocked high-volume cables that are availablethrough the National Parts Sales Center (NPSC). It lists the names of these cables, their mostcommonly ordered lengths, and their associated Comcodes.

For information about using the NPSC to order frequently used cables, see How to Place OrdersUsing the National Parts Sales Center (NPSC) earlier in this appendix.


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________TABLE B-2. Stocked High Volume Cables Available Through NPSC

_ _________________________________Name Length (ft) Comcode_ __________________________________ _________________________________B25F 5 601313471

30 601313489_ _________________________________B25FS1 25 601313497

50 601313505_ _________________________________M25A 10 601313513

25 601313521

40 601313539_ _________________________________M25B 25 601313547_ _________________________________A25RX 45 601313554_ _________________________________B25FX 25 601313562_ _________________________________B25FS 25 601313570

50 601313588_ _________________________________M25AS 30 601313596

50 601313604_ _________________________________M25BS 25 601313612_ _________________________________C25AS 25 601313620_ _________________________________CCITT V.35 25 601313638

50 601313646_ _________________________________B25FSX 30 601313661

50 601313679_ _________________________________D8AG 10 601313687

25 601313695_ _________________________________D8AH 10 601313711

25 601313729

50 601313737_ _________________________________D8AN 25 601313745_ _________________________________D8W 10 601313752

30 601313760

50 601313778_ _________________________________SYNC4-M 10 601313794_ _________________________________SYNC4-F 10 601313802_ _________________________________B25FS-1MOD 25 601313810_ _________________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________A25D Double-Ended Cable Ordering Information

Table B-3 contains Comcodes for ordering A25D double-ended cables in standard lengths.

For instructions on how to organize your order using the correct format, see How to Organize anOrder by Comcodes earlier in this appendix.

TABLE B-3. A25D Double-Ended Cables

_ ___________________________________________________Product Number Connector Type Length (ft) Comcode_ ____________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 5 101136067_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 10 100963982_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 15 100963990_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 20 100983899_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 25 100959972_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 30 100985563_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 40 101506749_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 50 100985571_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 60 100016880_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 70 101507028_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 75 101507077_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 80 100964022_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 90 101507218_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 100 100960046_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 150 101507796_ ___________________________________________________A25D Male/Male 200 101508281_ ___________________________________________________


Appendix B. Cable and Adapter Ordering Information________________Fiber Optic Cable Ordering Information

Table B-4 contains a list of Comcodes for ordering standard lengths of fiber optic cables withconnectors. There are two types of cable listed: FL2P-P and FL2P-B. FL2P-P cables haveAT&T ST connectors at both ends, while FL2P-B cables have ST connectors at one end andAT&T Biconic connectors at the other end.

For instructions on how to organize your order using the correct format, see How to Organize anOrder by Comcodes earlier in this appendix.

TABLE B-4. FL2P-P and FL2P-B Fiber Optic Cable Ordering Information

_ ________________________________________________Cable Length (ft) FL2P-P Comcode FL2P-B Comcode_ _________________________________________________ ________________________________________________

2 104266408 105259204_ ________________________________________________4 104266476 104244959_ ________________________________________________6 104266424_ ________________________________________________8 104266432 105259220_ ________________________________________________

10 104266440 104244967_ ________________________________________________15 104266457 104244975_ ________________________________________________20 104266465 104244983_ ________________________________________________25 104266473 104244991_ ________________________________________________30 104266481 104245006_ ________________________________________________35 104266499 104245014_ ________________________________________________40 104266507 104245022_ ________________________________________________50 104266523 104245030_ ________________________________________________75 104266556 104245048_ ________________________________________________

100 104266564 104245055_ ________________________________________________200 104266606 105259303_ ________________________________________________500 104266721_ ________________________________________________600 104244999_ ________________________________________________

1000 104266929_ ________________________________________________2000 104266323_ ________________________________________________3000 104266638_ ________________________________________________


________________Appendix C.

Remote-VDM Connections

Appendix C provides cabling information for Remote Voice/Data Multiplexers (R-VDMs) usedin Data Networking Product applications. Three basic configurations are addressed:

R-VDMs used in single-line applications

R-VDMs used in multi-line key set applications

R-VDMs used in Merlin key set applications

Remote VDM applications may use the Model 045R VDM which provides one voice/data circuitor the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf which provides up to eighteen voice/data circuits.

The following figure illustrates the rear panel of the Model 045R VDM.

LINE TEL PWRNORM

DIGLOOP

SELFTEST

DTE

FIGURE C-1. Model 045R VDM Rear Panel

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 C-3

Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________The following figure illustrates the backplane of the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

J124 J122 J120 J118 J116 J114 J112 J110 J108

J123 J121 J119 J117 J115 J113 J111 J109 J107J126 J125

5 4 3 2 1

TB102

N.C.ARMN.O.

4 3 2 1

TB101

-48VGND

P101

Data Connectors

Voice andVoice/Data Connectors

FIGURE C-2. VDM Stand-Alone Shelf Backplane

C-4 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Cabling R-VDMs in Single-Line Applications

For single-line applications, the Model 045R VDM or VDM Stand-Alone Shelf may be used.Cabling information for each of these VDMs is described in the following sections.

Connections for Model 045R VDM

Cabling to the Model 045R VDM used in single line applications may be configured as follows:

A voice/data circuit is wired from the originating VDM into the remote wiring distributionsystem and then into an information outlet (IO) near the Model 045R VDM.

A D6AM cable is connected from the IO receptacle to the LINE receptacle of the Model 045RVDM.

Using D6AM cable, the telephone set is connected to the TEL receptacle of the Model 045RVDM.

The terminal is connected to the DTE port on the Model 045R VDM with an M25A cable ifthe terminal has a male connector. An M25B cable is used if the terminal has a femaleconnector.



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________

Telephone Line from CO

D6AM

D6AM

To Terminals

IOLINE

TEL To Telephone

Set

M25A

Telephone Connecting

Block

DTE

M25B

Model 045RVDM

FIGURE C-3. Single-Line Applications Using Model 045R VDM

TABLE C-1. Ordering Information: Single-Line Applications Using Model 045R VDM

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________D6AM 6-pin mod G-144, G-H

6-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Connections for VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

Cabling to the remote VDM Stand-Alone Shelf used in single line applications may be configuredas follows:

A voice/data circuit is wired from the originating VDM into the remote wiring distributionsystem and then into a telephone connecting block.

An A25RXM cable is wired to the connecting block and is connected to the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf. If all eighteen VDM circuits are used, two A25RXM cables will be required.These cables connect to the J125 and J126 connectors on the VDM Stand-Alone Shelf.

All twelve circuits on J125 may be wired and only the first six circuits on J126 may be wired.

Terminals are connected to ports J107 through J124 with an M25A cable if the terminal has amale connector. An M25B cable is used if the terminal has a female connector.




To Terminals

M25A

Telephone Line from CO

A25RXMTelephone Connecting

Block

J107

VDMStand-Alone

Shelf

(See Note 1) J124

J125

J126

M25B


FIGURE C-4. Single-Line Applications Using VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

TABLE C-2. Ordering Information: Single-Line Applications Using VDM Stand-AloneShelf

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________A25RXM 50-pin 180-M G-167, G-A

single-ended_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications

The Model 045R VDM is used in the multi-line key set application.

Depending on the availability of spare wire pairs in the existing wiring system and localpreferences, there are four recommended methods for cabling the R-VDM.

In each method described in the following sections, a voice/data circuit is wired from theoriginating VDM into the remote wiring distribution system terminating in a patch panel.

Using Two Spare Pairs in Existing Cabling

If two spare pairs are to be used in cabling the R-VDM:

An existing 25-pair cable from the patch panel connects to a break-out device. A Y-cable thenconnects the break-out device to the LINE and TEL receptacles of the Model 045R VDM.

An M25A or M25B cable will connect from the DTE port of the Model 045R VDM to theterminal. The M25A will be required if the terminal has a male connector and the M25B willbe required if the terminal has a female connector.




Y-cable

To Key Set

Existing

25-pairTo

Terminals

M25A

M25B

Break-out

Device

Telephone Line

from CO

LINE

TEL

Model 045RVDM

DTE

Patch Panel

Key Service Unit

FIGURE C-5. Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications Using TwoSpare Pairs in Existing Cabling

TABLE C-3. Ordering Information: Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key SetApplications Using Two Spare Pairs in Existing Cabling

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________Y-cable 8-pin mod G-143, G-G

two 8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Using Two New Pairs in New Cabling

If two new pairs are to be used in cabling the R-VDM:

The new pairs should be wired from the patch panel to a 635B connecting block. A Y-cablethen connects the 635B connecting block to the LINE and TEL receptacles of the Model 045RVDM.





Y-cablePatch Panel

To Terminals

M25A

M25B

Telephone Line

from CO

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

Existing

25-pair

Added

2-pair

To Key Set

LINE

TEL

Model 045RVDM

DTE

Key Service Unit

FIGURE C-6. Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications Using TwoNew Pairs in New Cabling

TABLE C-4. Ordering Information: Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key SetApplications Using Two New Pairs in New Cabling

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________Y-cable 8-pin mod G-143, G-G

two 8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25A 25-pin-M G-107, G-P

25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Using One Spare Pair in Existing Cabling

If one spare pair is to be used in cabling the R-VDM:

An existing 25-pair cable from the patch panel connects to a break-out device. A D6AM cablethen connects the break-out device to the LINE receptacle of the Model 045R VDM.





LINE

To Key Set

Existing

25-pair

Break-out

DeviceTelephone

Line from CO

Patch Panel

Isolation Filter

To Terminals

M25A

M25B

TEL

DTE

Model 045RVDM

NC*

D6AM

Key Service Unit

*NC=no connection

FIGURE C-7. Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications Using OneSpare Pair in Existing Cabling

TABLE C-5. Ordering Information: Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key SetApplications Using One Spare Pair in Existing Cabling



25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Using One New Pair in New Cabling

If one new pair is to be used in cabling the R-VDM:

The new pair should be wired from the patch panel to a 635B connecting block. A D6AMcable then connects the 635B connecting block to the LINE receptacle of the Model 045RVDM.





Telephone Line

from CO

635BConn.Block

635BConn.Block

Existing

25-pair

Added

2-pair

To Key Set

Patch Panel

Isolation Filter

Key Service Unit

LINE To Terminals

M25A

M25B

TEL

DTE

Model 045RVDM

NC*

D6AM

*NC=no connection

FIGURE C-8. Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key Set Applications Using OneNew Pair in New Cabling

TABLE C-6. Ordering Information: Cabling R-VDMs in Multi-Line Key SetApplications Using One New Pair in New Cabling



25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________Cabling R-VDMs in Merlin Key Set Applications

The Merlin key set application uses the the Model 045R VDM. Cabling information for thisconfiguration is described as follows:

A voice/data circuit is wired from the originating VDM into the remote wiring distributionsystem and then into an information outlet (IO).

A D4BU cable is connected from the IO receptacle to an ED1P933-30, G-16 filter card.

The filter card is connected to the LINE receptacle of the Model 045R VDM with a D8Wcable.

The telephone is connected to the TEL receptacle on the Model 045R VDM with a D8AAcable.





D4BUIO

Telephone Connecting

Block

ED1P933-30 G(16)

Filter Card

D8AA

To Terminals

TELTo Telephone

Set

M25A

DTE

Model 045RVDM

M25B

D4BUTo Merlin Line Module

D8W To Merlin Voice Terminal Module

LINE

D8W

FIGURE C-9. Cabling R-VDMs in Merlin Key Set Applications


Appendix C. Remote-VDM Connections________________TABLE C-7. Ordering Information: Cabling R-VDMs in Merlin Key Set Applications

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable or ED5P055-31Adapter Description Group Number_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________D4BU 4-pin mod See AT&T SYSTIMAX PDS

4-pin mod Component Guide_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8W 8-pin mod G-137, G-G

8-pin mod_ ____________________________________________________________________________D8AA 8-pin mod G-134 G-G


25-pin-F_ ____________________________________________________________________________M25B 25-pin-M G-108, G-P

25-pin-M_ ____________________________________________________________________________



________________Appendix D.

VDM Physical Interface Pictorials

Appendix D contains brief descriptions and illustrations of the following equipment associatedwith Voice Data Multiplexers (VDMs):

VDM cabinet shelf

VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

Model 045CS VDM

R-VDM

VDM Cabinet Shelf

VDM backplanes provide four 50-pin data connectors that support six circuits each. This shelf isalso used in the VDM-SAM504.

Data Connectors

Voice Connectors

FIGURE D-1. VDM Cabinet Shelf Backplane

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 D-3

Appendix D. VDM Physical Interface Pictorials________________VDM Stand-Alone Shelf

The VDM Stand-Alone Shelf supports up to 18 VDM circuits. The backplane for the Stand-Alone Shelf is equipped with 18 DB25 data interface connections.

J124 J122 J120 J118 J116 J114 J112 J110 J108

J123 J121 J119 J117 J115 J113 J111 J109 J107J126 J125

5 4 3 2 1

TB102

N.C.ARMN.O.

4 3 2 1

TB101

-48VGND

P101

Data Connectors

Voice andVoice/Data Connectors

FIGURE D-2. VDM Stand-Alone Shelf Backplane

D-4 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix D. VDM Physical Interface Pictorials________________Model 045CS VDM

The Model 045CS VDM is a single circuit assembly housed in a plastic enclosure with themodulating circuitry of the central VDM circuit pack. The Model 045CS VDM is equipped withone DB25 data connector.

LINE TEL PWRNORM

LOCLOOP

REM LOOP

DTE

FIGURE D-3. Model 045CS VDM Rear Panel

R-VDM

For each VDM circuit in a central office, a corresponding R-VDM is required at the customer orend-user equipment location. The R-VDM is equipped with one DB25 connector.

LINE TEL PWRNORM

DIGLOOP

SELFTEST

DTE

FIGURE D-4. R-VDM Rear Panel

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 D-5

________________Appendix E.

SYSTIMAX PDS Overview

The AT&T SYSTIMAX Premises Distribution System (PDS) is organized in subsystems that canbe treated as distinct parts. This enables you to plan and administer each subsystem separatelyand to make changes to one subsystem without necessarily affecting others. One benefit is thatparts of the distribution system that change frequently can be modified with a minimum impacton subsystems that remain unchanged.

SYSTIMAX PDS Subsystems

A distribution system made up of several independent subsystems is easier to administer andchange than a collection of cables running from nodes to connected devices. Changes in onesubsystem may not affect the others, so moving a terminal need not involve rearrangement or theaddition of new cables. SYSTIMAX PDS is divided into six subsystems that can be managed asdistinct units:

Campus subsystem. Consists of components that support communications betweenbuildings in an office park or on a campus where there are no right-of-way problems.

Equipment subsystem. Consists of equipment room cables that connect common equipmentto the rest of the distribution system.

Backbone subsystem (formerly called riser or house distribution). The central group ofcables running from an equipment room to other floors.

Horizontal subsystem (formerly called station distribution). Connects the backbonesubsystem to user work locations.

Administration subsystem. Consists of cross-connects, interconnects, and informationoutlets (wall jacks) that link the other subsystems. This subsystem allows for circuit additionsand rearrangements.

Work Location subsystem. Consists of all the cords and adapters that connect terminaldevices to information outlets (station jacks).

SYSTIMAX PDS uses both copper wire and fiber optic media.

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 E-3

Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Wire Cables

SYSTIMAX PDS uses several types of wire cables. In general, cables are twisted copper pairs of24 gauge. One of the following types of wire is selected depending on the SYSTIMAX PDSsubsystem and the type of device being connected:

four-pair D-type inside wire (DIW)

EIA cables

25-pair cables

large multipair cables

Four-Pair Cables

Four-pair cables are used for both horizontal and backbone distribution.

Horizontal distribution goes from the serving closet to user devices. One end of each four-paircable is punched down into a connecting block in the cross-connect, while the other end isconnected to an information outlet (IO). The IO contains an eight-pin modular jack to which aterminal can be connected.

Backbone distribution consists of a central group of cables running from an equipment room tosatellite locations.

EIA Cables

In SYSTIMAX PDS, EIA cables are mainly used to connect modules at the node or concentrator tothe equipment room cross-connect.

Connections to user devices are normally made through four-pair horizontal cables. Devices with25-pin RS-232-C connectors are served via modular-to-25-pin adapters called terminal adapters(e.g., 355 adapter) which have two functions:

adapt the terminal connector to the modular cord leading to the IO

provide overload protection for signals coming through the cross-connect

AT&T recommends using a terminal protector when connecting any device to a cross-connect.

25-Pair Cables

25-pair cables are generally used to connect nodes, concentrators, and multiplexers to SYSTIMAXPDS, for backbone connections, and for connections to satellite closets. Cross-connects (110P)provide female 50-pin connectors to connect 25-pair cables directly.

E-4 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Multipair Cables

Multipair cables are used only for backbone cables. Since these cables are used to carry servicesother than data, they cannot carry EIA signals.

Circuits routed via multipair backbone cables must use asynchronous data units (ADUs) orsynchronous data units (SDUs) to convert to LADC-II compatible signaling. A pair of ADUs orSDUs is required, one at each end of the circuit.

One exception to this rule occurs if the ISN concentrator is used for connections to asynchronousdevices. When the AIM for the ISN concentrator has an integral ADU (ADU8 module), no ADUis required between an ADU8 and a cross-connect, but an ADU is required between the cross-connect and the end-user device.


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Fiber Optic Cables

AT&T offers a variety of fiber optic cables including jumper cables for individual fibers, andbackbone and interbuilding cables for all environments. SYSTIMAX PDS uses AT&T multimode,graded-index fiber with a core diameter of 62.5 µm, a cladding diameter of 125 µm, and anumerical aperture of 0.29. This fiber provides high coupled power and low loss, resulting in ahigh bandwidth capacity. Each fiber optic circuit requires two fibers.

Fiber Optic Cable Types

Several types of fiber optic cables are available, depending on the location and use of the cable.They include:

single, dual, and quad fiber cables. AT&T 1860A Fiber Interconnection Cables are madewith a single fiber optic strand surrounded by polyvinyl chloride (PVC) buffer material and anouter layer of flame-retardant PVC. AT&T 1861A Fiber Interconnection Cable contains twofibers, and 1862A Fiber Interconnection Cable contains four fibers inside the outer PVCjacket. A single fiber cable can be used alone as a jumper cable. Dual and quad fiber cablescan be used as jumper cables or for connections to fiber optic equipment, such as fiber opticmultiplexers and fiber trunk modules. Single fibers (without the outer layer) are also used tocreate lightguide building cables and outside plant lightguide (see below).

lightguide building cables. AT&T Lightguide building cables use a stranded cable designcontaining 2, 4, 6, or 12 individual fiber strands. They can be ordered with riser or plenumsheathing. Backbone cables have a flame-retardant PVC outer sheath. Plenum cables have aHALAR outer sheath that meets electrical code restrictions for toxic fume emissions in afire and can be used in air-return plenums.

outside plant cables. AT&T manufactures outside plant cables for a variety of installationenvironments. Each cable consists of a core encased in a plastic tube, which is then sheathedin materials for outside plant (underground, buried, aerial, indoor, submarine, or building)applications. There are two basic core designs:

— ribbon cable. The ribbon core design consists of twelve parallel fibers sandwichedbetween layers of clear pressure sensitive adhesive tape. If less than twelve operatingfibers are needed, filler fibers are added to preserve the dimensions. The ribbons arestacked to form a rectangular array up to twelve layers deep. The fiber count can rangefrom 4 to 144 fibers, with the number of guaranteed operable fibers ranging from 4 to 136.

— Lightpack cable. The Lightpack cable core consists of from one to eight bundles, with upto twelve fibers per bundle. The bundles are spirally wrapped with color-coded yarnbinders. From 4 to 96 fibers per cable are available, in increments of two fibers. The fiberbundles are encased in an extruded plastic tube filled with a water-blocking gel to preventwater penetration and migration.

The minimum bend radius for each type of AT&T fiber optic cable is as follows:


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________TABLE E-1. Minimum Bend Radius for AT&T Fiber Optic Cable

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Cable Type Radius (inches) Notes:_ _____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

This includes fiber jumpers and fiberinterconnection cables, such as the FL2P-P.

single, dual, and quad fiber cables 1.5

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Lightguide building cables Individual fibers in an express splice have the

same (smaller) bend radius as single fiber cables.3.0

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Individual fibers in a splice or fanout have thesame (smaller) bend radius as single fiber cables.

Ribbon cables 5.0

_ ____________________________________________________________________________Individual fibers in a splice or fanout have thesame (smaller) bend radius as single fiber cables.

Lightpack cables 5.0

_ ____________________________________________________________________________

Fiber Optic Connectors

AT&T manufactures two types of fiber optic cable connectors for distribution systems:

The precision-molded 1005B biconic connector (not part of SYSTIMAX PDS)

The split-ferrule ST (straight-tip) connector (part of the SYSTIMAX PDS)

Each fiber in a cable requires a separate connector. These connectors are used at the module endof a fiber optic cable, at the end-user equipment end, and at fiber optic cross-connect orinterconnect equipment along the cable route.

Because each connection causes a slight power loss (depending on the type of connector used),there is a limit to the number of splices and connections that can be made on one fiber opticcircuit. The following table shows the power losses for array splices, ST connectors, and biconicconnectors.

TABLE E-2. Connector and Splice Power Loss

_ _________________________________________________Splice or Connector Type Mean Loss (dB per component)_ __________________________________________________ _________________________________________________Array splice 0.1_ _________________________________________________ST connector 0.4_ _________________________________________________Biconic connector 0.7_ _________________________________________________


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Signaling

Signaling techniques are significant in SYSTIMAX PDS when a circuit is routed via a backbonecable that carries mixed voice and data circuits. For details, see the AT&T SYSTIMAX PDS SharedSheath Compatibility Chart within the AT&T SYSTIMAX PDS Marketing Guide. EIA signals canbe carried in backbone cables. EIA signals require 25-pair or smaller cables, and should not betransmitted outside of a building, except when using an ADU. Whenever a circuit travels in awire cable through the backbone subsystem, it must use LADC-II compatible signaling.

Signals traveling through fiber optic cables do not interfere with each other or with signals in wirecables.

EIA Compatible Signals

The maximum EIA signaling distance is 300 feet at a data rate of 19200 bps. Under certaincircumstances, that distance may be extended for devices that communicate at lower speeds. Theconditions are as follows:

Devices connected to four-pair intrabuilding horizontal cables running directly to a cross-connect at the node, concentrator, or multiplexer

Noise-free environments

The following table shows the distance limits for these conditions.

TABLE E-3. Extended EIA Signal Distances

_ _______________________________Data Rate (bps) Maximum Distance_ ________________________________ _______________________________9600 600 feet_ _______________________________4800 or less 1,000 feet_ _______________________________

Measure the horizontal cable length from the cross-connect terminal block assembly to theinformation outlet. The horizontal cable length should be at least 50 feet less than the distancelimit to allow for wiring in the user’s room.

In environments where equipment is rearranged often, a high-speed device may be connectedaccidentally to a cable intended only for low speeds. To avoid this problem, use a limit of 300feet for all cables.


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________LADC-II Compatible Signals

ADUs and SDUs translate EIA signals into LADC-II compatible signals. These signals can betransmitted through backbone cables or through wire pairs in a common sheath with other signals,without interference. These units also can be used to extend cables beyond the EIA signaldistance limits or to operate over horizontal cables in noisy environments.

The ADU does not support the Ring Indicator (RI) circuit or the hardware flow control circuitsRequest to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS). If these circuits are supported beyond the EIAdistance limits, use a concentrator or SAM located near the end-user equipment, connected by atrunk.

An ADU or SDU that gets its power from the EIA interface cannot be located more than 50 feetfrom the interface on the endpoint. Some devices do not provide power to the EIA interface; anSDU or ADU must have an auxiliary power source when used with these devices. Examples ofdevices that do not supply power to the interface are:

receive-only devices, such as printers

DCE interfaces, such as modems

devices operating below 300 bps

The distance limits for ADU and SDU signals traveling over 24 gauge wire are shown in thefollowing table.

TABLE E-4. ADU and SDU Signal Distance Limits for 24 Gauge Wire

_ _____________________________________________ADU Distance Limit SDU Distance Limit

Data Rate(ft) (km) (ft) (km)_ ______________________________________________ _____________________________________________

19200 2,000 0.61 9,800 3.0_ _____________________________________________9600 5,000 1.52 16,400 5.0_ _____________________________________________4800 7,000 2.13 26,200 8.0_ _____________________________________________2400 12,000 3.66 29,500 9.0_ _____________________________________________1200 20,000 6.10 36,000 11.0_ _____________________________________________≤300 40,000 12.19 — —_ _____________________________________________


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Cross-Connect Devices

The effort and expense needed to rearrange, test, and label circuits, depends on how the cross-connect devices are set up. The main purpose of configuring a distribution system with cross-connects is to simplify the job. When terminals or computers are moved, the circuits can berearranged at the cross-connects. Cross-connects also provide access points to test individualcircuits and components.

SYSTIMAX PDS relies on wire or fiber cross-connect and interconnect devices as fundamentalcomponents in the distribution system. They provide a means of rerouting connections tomodules and end-user devices without handling the cables attached to that equipment. Thissection provides details of cross-connect and interconnect designs and components.

Wire Cross-Connects

A 110 cross-connect terminates cables from interface modules, backbone distribution, and userrooms. There are two types of 110 cross-connects: the AT&T 110A Connector System and theAT&T 110P Patch Panel System.

The 110A Connector System uses short jumper wires between cable terminations. Thesejumpers must be installed and removed by a trained technician with special tools. The 110Across-connect is appropriate for connecting backbone cables to horizontal distribution cables,where the circuits are not likely to change after installation.

The 110P Patch Panel System provides for quick and easy rearrangement of circuits usingpatch cords that snap into the patch panel. It has one or more terminal block assemblies,which contain four terminal blocks each. Terminal blocks terminate 25 pairs of wire, and aremade up of five to eight connecting blocks. Connecting blocks come in 3-pair, 4-pair, or5-pair sizes for different distribution services. Cables terminate at the back of connectingblocks, and patch cords snap onto the front to complete the circuits.

A basic 100-pair terminal block assembly contains four terminal blocks and measures about 3.5inches high by 8.5 inches wide. Up to nine such assemblies can be mounted in a metal frame 8.5inches wide and 60 inches high for a 900-pair assembly. Bundles of patch cords lie in horizontaltrays separating the terminal block assemblies. The 110P patch panel has one horizontal jumpertray for every 100-pair assembly, while the 110A has one jumper tray for every 300 pairs. The110A is well-suited for hard-wired cross-connects or where space and security are importantconsiderations.

Between every two 25-pair terminal blocks there is a designation strip that holds circuit labels anda color insert. The color insert designates the type of service terminating on each terminal block(see Patch Panel Color Coding below). Terminal blocks can be ordered prewired or unwired. Aprewired (or connectorized) terminal block has a 25-pair cable attached, with a 50-pin femaleconnector at one end and the other end fanned out to the connecting blocks. It is commonly usedfor connecting to the interface modules in a node, multiplexer, or concentrator. An unwiredconnecting block has punch blocks to accept wires such as those from 4-pair horizontal cables.


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________SYSTIMAX PDS uses 3-pair and 4-pair patch cords. Asynchronous circuits with software flowcontrol can use 3-pair patch cords, while asynchronous circuits with EIA flow control require 4-pair patch cords.

Patch Panel Color Coding

When connections are made between subsystems at the patch panel, the connections are labeledaccording to the subsystem or equipment to which the circuit is connected. Labels are color-coded for fast identification. The SYSTIMAX PDS color codes to which this guide refers are asfollows:

Purple labels are used for equipment subsystem connections. This includes cables in theequipment room leading from nodes, MPCs, ISN concentrators, or SAMs to the patch panel.

White labels are used for connections to backbone subsystem cables.

Grey labels are used for connections to cables leading to satellite closets (containing cross-connects used to tie to user equipment).

Blue labels are used for connections to the work location subsystem.

Green labels are used for connections to central office trunks.

Yellow labels are used for connections to auxiliary equipment.

Orange labels are used for connections to multiplexer ports.

Fiber Cross-Connect and Interconnect Modules

The AT&T fiber optic cross-connect and interconnect equipment provides an effective means torun fiber optic cabling. Locate the main cross-connect panel near the node, and place interconnectpanels as needed in other floors and building areas to form a star configuration.

Both cross-connect and interconnect modules are built from the same basic components:

lightguide interconnection units (LIUs), cabinets that protect and organize the cables. TheLIU includes fanouts that split ribbon cables into individual fibers with connectors attached

connector panels, where connector couplings are mounted in the LIU

couplings, the hardware that joins connectors

In addition, cross-connect modules have vertical and horizontal troughs for routing fiber jumpersbetween LIUs. Finally, a complete complement of accessories such as grommets, clips, andsplicing kits is available to cover every type of equipment configuration.

Cross-connect and interconnect hardware parts are interchangeable. They can be combined tomake cross-connect or interconnect panels in a variety of sizes and arrangements to meet bothinstallation and space requirements.


Appendix E. SYSTIMAX PDS Overview________________Fiber Cross-Connect

Fiber cross-connects are designed for circuit administration. They feature short lengths of singleor dual fiber cables (patch cords) that allow existing circuits to be rerouted, new circuits added,and old circuits removed. A fiber cross-connect panel has a double-sided arrangement with twocable couplers for each fiber connection. The feeder cable (from the node or concentrator)connects to a coupler on one side of the cross-connect, and the distribution cable (to terminals orother endpoints) connects to a coupler on the other side. A jumper cable makes the connectionbetween the coupler for the feeder cable and the coupler for the distribution cable.

This equipment is designed for use at the center of the cabling configuration near the node.

Fiber Interconnect

An interconnect panel has a single cable coupler for each fiber connection. No jumpers are used,since the connections are made between cables. The feeder cable (from the node or the cross-connect panel) connects to one side of the coupler. The distribution cable (to the terminating end)connects to the other side of the coupler. This equipment is designed for use at the userequipment end of the configuration, where the connections are not expected to change. Althoughsometimes used for circuit administration, fiber interconnects more often serve as junction pointsfor fiber optic cables.

During installation, spare fibers can be cabled for later use. This cabling is called an expresssheath splice. This is done by removing the outside jacket of the spare fiber cable, looping thefibers in the interconnect panel, and running the cable on to another location.

Cross-Connect and Interconnect Elements

AT&T uses a modular design for its fiber optic cable interconnection equipment. The maincomponents are described below.

Lightguide Interconnection Unit (LIU). The basic component of fiber cross-connects andinterconnects is the 100A lightguide interconnection unit (LIU). Up to six LIUs can becombined with fiber jumper troughs to make a lightguide cross-connect. The AT&T 100ALIU is a modular enclosure with retainer rings to hold slack fiber loops in the correct bendradius, two slots to accommodate fiber connector panels, and a door with labels on both sidesfor circuit labeling. Each LIU terminates up to 12 stranded optical fibers.

Fanout. A fanout is a ribbon cable that has an AT&T 1009C array connector on one end thatsplices directly to a 12-fiber ribbon array and 12 individually jacketed fibers with STconnectors on the other end. A fanout is used in an LIU for easy connection of individualfibers at the connector panels. The LIU is available with a factory-installed fanout for splicingdirectly to ribbon cable.

Fiber Jumper Troughs. Fiber jumper troughs are added to an LIU to organize jumpersrunning between LIUs in a cross-connect.


________________Appendix F.

Module and I/O BoardApplication Matrix

Appendix F contains a cross-reference chart of Data Networking Product interface modules.Each functional component or module discussed in this document consists of a main circuit pack(e.g., TN, UN, or MC code) and an I/O board (e.g., ED, AWJ, CEY, EAA code).

The interface functions are grouped according to their associated equipment type (e.g.,Datakit II VCS node, SAM504, and SAM64). Cabling for each of the functional interfaces listedon the chart is addressed in Chapter 1 through Chapter 7 of this guide.

Matrix Page

Datakit II VCS Circuit Pack Configurations F-2

BNS-2000 Circuit Pack Configurations F-4

SAM8 Circuit Pack Configurations F-6



SAM504 and VDM-SAM504 Circuit Pack Configurations F-6

Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4 F-1

Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix________________D

ATA

KIT

II V

CS

MO

DU

LAR

CA

BIN

ET

*C

IRC

UIT

PA

CK

CO

NF

IGU

RAT

ION

S

Fun

ctio

nal

Com

pone

nts

Clo

ck

Sw

itch

Enh

ance

d S

witc

h (E

switc

h)

Rep

eate

r

CP

U

EC

PU

Red

unda

nt C

PU

Red

unda

nt E

CP

U

MR

CM

DK

AP

SA

MS

L-N

RS

-232

-C

SA

MS

L-N

V.3

5

SA

MM

L R

S-2

32-C

SA

MM

L V.

35

CP

MM

L R

S-2

32-C

CP

MM

L V.

35

CP

MM

L-H

S

FR

M (

V.35

)

FR

M (

chT

1)

FR

M (

chE

1) 7

5 ΩF

RM

(ch

E1)

120

ΩLP

M

SC

LC8

8 D

TE

SC

LC8

8 D

CE

SD

LC8

V.35

, 3 D

TE

SD

LC8

V.35

, 3 D

CE

SD

LC8

NR

ZI,

8 D

TE

SD

LC8

NR

ZI,

8 D

CE

IRU

Tru

nk-6

4 R

S-2

32-C

Tru

nk-6

4 V.

35

NO

TE

:*

Als

o ap

plie

s to

BN

S-1

000

TN

UN

MC

1DM

C 2PE

D5P

1 0 0 1 B

1 0 0 2 B

1 0 0 3

2 0 9 7

2 0 9 8

2 0 9 9

2 1 0 9 C

3 2 6

3 4 7

6 3 5 B

0 8 4 A 1

1 4 2 A 1

0 9 1 A 1

1 0 5 A 1

1 1 6 A 1

1 1 7 A 1

1 3 8 A 1

1 3 9 A 1

1 4 3 A 1

0 2 3 A 1

A S P 1

A S P 4 B

A W J 5

A W J 6

A W J 7

A W J 8

A W J 9

A W J 1 0

A W J 1 1

A W J 1 2

A W J 1 5

A W J 1 6 B

A W J 1 7

A W J 1 8

A W J 2 4

A W J 3 2

0 6 3 30 G1

0 8 0 30 G1

X

X

XX X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X X X

X X

X X

X XX X

X X

X

X X

X

X X

X X X X

X X X

X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X X

A S P 8 X X X X

XC S D 1

X X X X

C S D 3

X XX

X

X X X X X X

X X

XX

X

X

XX

XX

X

C S D 2

X

2 2 2 9 X

C S D 6 X

F-2 Data Networking Products Cabling Guide, Issue 4

Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix________________D

ATA

KIT

II V

CS

MO

DU

LAR

CA

BIN

ET

*C

IRC

UIT

PA

CK

CO

NF

IGU

RAT

ION

S

Tru

nk-H

S

Tru

nk-T

1

SF

T

Tru

nk-P

Q

SW

T R

S-2

32-C

SW

T V

.35

SW

T R

S-4

49

SW

T G

.703

CP

M-H

S

CP

M-4

22B

TY

6

TY

12

E2A

SLM

MS

M

TS

M-8

8 D

TE

TS

M-8

8 D

CE

TS

M-8

V.3

5 3

DT

E

TS

M-8

V.3

5 3

DC

E

TS

M-8

NR

ZI 8

DT

E

TS

M-8

NR

ZI 8

DC

E

TS

M-T

1

X.2

5 4

DT

E

X.2

5 4

DC

E

X.2

5 V.

35 3

DT

E

X.2

5 V.

35 3

DC

E

X.2

5 N

RZ

I 4 D

TE

X.2

5 N

RZ

I 4 D

CE

X.2

5P V

.35

4 D

TE

X.2

5P R

S-2

32-C

8 D

CE

/DT

E

X.7

5

SY

NC

8 D

TE

SY

NC

8 D

CE

SY

NC

8 V.

35, 3

DT

E

SY

NC

8 V.

35, 3

DC

E

TN

UN

MC

1DM

C 5PE

D5P

1 0 0 6

1 0 0 9 B

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1 C

1 0 1 2

1 0 1 3

1 0 1 5

2 0 9 2 B

2 0 9 4

2 2 1

0 8 5 A 1

0 8 8 A 1

0 8 9 A 1

1 1 6 A 1

1 1 7 A 1

1 3 9 A 1

1 4 2 A 1

1 4 3 A 1

0 2 5 A 1

A W J 2

A W J 3

A W J 4

A W J 5

A W J 6

A W J 7

A W J 8

A W J 9

A W J 1 0

A W J 1 1

A W J 1 7

A W J 1 8

A W J 2 4

0 8 0 30 G1

X

X

X

X X X X

X X X X X X

0 6 6 30 G1

0 7 4 30 G1

0 7 7 30 G1

X

X

X

X

X X X X X X

X

X X X X

X

XX X

XX

XX

XX

XX

X

X

XX

X

XX

XX

XX

X

Fun

ctio

nal

Com

pone

nts

NO

TE

:*

Als

o ap

plie

s to

BN

S-1

000

1 4 9 A 1 XX

1 5 1 A 1

1 5 2 A 1

A W J 3 3

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

2 1 1 1 B

1 5 3 A 1

C S D 4

XX

XX

X

X


Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix________________

CIM

CT

RM

Str

atum

4 C

lock

Hig

h-S

peed

Sw

itch

Con

trol

ler

MR

CM

TY

SW

T R

S23

2

SW

T V

.35

SW

T R

S44

9

SW

T G

.703

SF

T

Tru

nk-T

1

Tru

nk-H

S

CP

M-H

S

Clo

ck I/

O

Exp

Clo

ck I/

O

AI-

T1

AI-

T3P

AI-

T3

AI-

E1

AI-

E3

Tru

nk-T

3

Tru

nk-T

3A

Tru

nk-T

3S

Tru

nk-E

3

Tru

nk-E

3A

Tru

nk-T

3I

Tru

nk-E

3S

GA

R

* In

dica

tes

quan

tity

of tw

o

NO

TE

: All

TN

, UN

, MC

, AS

P, A

WJ,

and

CS

D c

ircui

t pac

ks a

re a

ssoc

iate

d w

ith S

erie

s M

1 ca

bine

t.

A

ll C

MA

, CN

A A

ND

CM

C c

ircui

t pac

ks a

re a

ssoc

iate

d w

ith S

erie

s M

2 ca

bine

t.

TN

UNM

C1D

1 0 0 9 B

1 0 1 1 C

1 0 1 5

2 0 9 2 B

2 0 9 6

2 1 0 9 C

2 1 7 5

0 8 5 A 1

1 3 8 A 1

C M A 1

C M A 2

C M A 1 1 B

X

2 0 9 7

6 3 5 B

C M A 5

C M A 9 B

C M A 1 3BN

S-2

000

CIR

CU

IT P

AC

K C

ON

FIG

UR

ATIO

NS

X

X

X X X X

X

X

X

XX

XX

X

X

Fun

ctio

nal

Com

pone

nts

C M A 1 4

C M A 1 5

C M A 1 6

C M A 1 7

X

X

X X

XXX X

X

*

X

1 0 1 0

XX

X

X

I/O's

A S P 4 B

A S P 7

A S P 8

A W J 2

A W J 3

A S J 4

A W J 9

A W J 1 0

A W J 1 1

A W J 1 2

A W J 1 5

A W J 2 4

A W J 1 6 B

C M C 2

C M C 3

C N A 1

C N A 2

C M C 5

C M C 6 B

XX

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

A W J 3 3

C M C 8

C M C 1 3 B

C M C 1 4

X

X

X

XX X X

X X

X X X

X

C M A 1 8 X X

C M C 1 5

C M C 1 6

X

X


Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix________________BNS-2000 CIRCUIT PACK CONFIGURATIONS

TSM-8 8 DTE

TSM-8 8 DCE

TSM-8 V.35 3 DTE

TSM-8 V.35 3 DCE

TSM-8 NRZI 8 DTE

TSM-8 NRZI 8 DCE

TSM-T1

X.25 4 DTE

X.25 4 DCE

X.25 V.35 3 DTE

X.25 V.35 3 DCE

X.25 NRZI 4 DTE

X.25 NRZI 4 DCE

X.25P V.35 4 DTE

X.25P RS-232-C 8 DCE/DTE

X.75

FRM (V.35)

FRM (chT1)

FRM (chE1) 75 ΩFRM (chE1) 120 ΩLPM

Trunk-PQ

MSM

TN UN I/O's

2092B

2094

221

085A1

088A1

089A1

116A1

117A1

139A1

142A1

143A1

149A1

151A1

152A1

AWJ2

AWJ3

AWJ4

AWJ5

AWJ9

AWJ10

AWJ11

AWJ17

AWJ18

AWJ24

CSD1

CSD2

CSD3

FunctionalComponents

AWJ6

AWJ7

AWJ8

MC1D

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

XX

X

XX

XX

X

X

2111B

153A1

CSD4

X

X

X

X

XX

X

2229

X

CSD6

X


Appendix F. Module and I/O Board Application Matrix________________SAM8

CIRCUIT PACK CONFIGURATIONS

SAM16CIRCUIT PACK CONFIGURATIONS

SAM64CIRCUIT PACK CONFIGURATIONS

SAM504 & VDM-SAM504CIRCUIT PACK CONFIGURATIONS

SAM8

CGU1

AMDA

CHG1

X X X

PROCESSOR

TERM8

SINGLE PORT V.35 TRUNK

DUAL RS232 TRUNK

CGW1

CPY1

CRA1

X

X

*

CRA2

X

NOTE: * Indicates a quantity of 2

HS-TRUNK 0 - 3 KM

T1-TRUNK

SAMSL RS-232

SAMSL V.35

SAMDL RS-232

TERM32

TCONC

1391

1392

1394C

315

090A1B

106A1

CEY1

CEY2

CEY3

CEY4

TN UN MC1D

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HS-TRUNK 0 - 3 KM

T1-TRUNK

SAMSL V.35

TERM32

TCONC

1391

1392

1394C

315

090A1B

EAA2

46530G1

TN UN MC1D

X

X

ED2P

46630G1

47131G1

X

XX X

X

X

X




